Samacheer Kalvi 11th Books Solutions Guide

Subject Matter Experts at SamacheerKalvi.Guide have created Tamil Nadu State Board Samacheer Kalvi 11th Books Answers Solutions Guide Pdf Free Download in English Medium and Tamil Medium are part of Samacheer Kalvi Books Solutions.

Let us look at these TN State Board New Syllabus Samacheer Kalvi 11th Std Guide Pdf of Text Book Back Questions and Answers of Volume 1 and Volume 2, Chapter Wise Important Questions, Study Material, Question Bank, Notes, Formulas and revise our understanding of the subject.

Students can also read Tamil Nadu Samacheer Kalvi 11th Model Question Papers 2020-2021.

Tamilnadu Samacheer Kalvi 11th Guide Text Book Back Answers Solutions Pdf Free Download

TN Samacheer Kalvi 11th Book Back Answers Solutions Guide

We hope these Tamilnadu State Board Samacheer Kalvi Class 11th Std Books Solutions Answers Guide Pdf Free Download in English Medium and Tamil Medium will help you get through your subjective questions in the exam.

Let us know if you have any concerns regarding TN State Board New Syllabus Samacheer Kalvi 11th Standard Guides Pdf of Text Book Back Questions and Answers of Volume 1 and Volume 2, Chapter Wise Important Questions, Study Material, Question Bank, Notes, Formulas, drop a comment below and we will get back to you as soon as possible.

Tamil Nadu 11th Accountancy Model Question Papers 2020-2021 English Tamil Medium

Subject Matter Experts at SamacheerKalvi.Guide have created Samacheer Kalvi Tamil Nadu State Board Syllabus New Paper Pattern 11th Accountancy Model Question Papers 2020-2021 with Answers Pdf Free Download in English Medium and Tamil Medium of TN 11th Standard Accountancy Public Exam Question Papers Answer Key, New Paper Pattern of HSC 11th Class Accountancy Previous Year Question Papers, Plus One +1 Accountancy Model Sample Papers are part of Tamil Nadu 11th Model Question Papers.

Let us look at these Government of Tamil Nadu State Board 11th Accountancy Model Question Papers Tamil Medium with Answers 2020-21 Pdf. Students can view or download the Class 11th Accountancy New Model Question Papers 2021 Tamil Nadu English Medium Pdf for their upcoming Tamil Nadu HSC Board Exams. Students can also read Tamilnadu Samcheer Kalvi 11th Accountancy Guide.

TN State Board 11th Accountancy Model Question Papers 2020 2021 English Tamil Medium

Tamil Nadu 11th Accountancy Model Question Papers English Medium 2020-2021

Tamil Nadu 11th Accountancy Model Question Papers Tamil Medium 2020-2021

  • Tamil Nadu 11th Accountancy Model Question Paper 1 Tamil Medium
  • Tamil Nadu 11th Accountancy Model Question Paper 2 Tamil Medium
  • Tamil Nadu 11th Accountancy Model Question Paper 3 Tamil Medium
  • Tamil Nadu 11th Accountancy Model Question Paper 4 Tamil Medium
  • Tamil Nadu 11th Accountancy Model Question Paper 5 Tamil Medium

11th Accountancy Model Question Paper Design 2020-2021 Tamil Nadu

Types of Questions Marks No. of Questions to be Answered Total Marks
Part-I Objective Type 1 20 20
Part-II Very Short Answers
(Totally 10 questions will be given. Answer any Seven. Any one question should be answered compulsorily)
2 7 14
Part-Ill Short Answers
(Totally 10 questions will be given. Answer any Seven. Any one question should be answered compulsorily)
3 7 21
Part-IV Essay Type 5 7 35
Marks 90
Internal Assessment 10
Total Marks 100

Tamil Nadu 11th Accountancy Model Question Paper Weightage of Marks

Purpose Weightage
1. Knowledge 30%
2. Understanding 40%
3. Application 20%
4. Skill/Creativity 10%

It is necessary that students will understand the new pattern and style of Model Question Papers of 11th Standard Accountancy Tamilnadu State Board Syllabus according to the latest exam pattern. These Tamil Nadu Plus One 11th Accountancy Model Question Papers State Board Tamil Medium and English Medium are useful to understand the pattern of questions asked in the board exam. Know about the important concepts to be prepared for TN HSLC Board Exams and Score More marks.

We hope the given Samacheer Kalvi Tamil Nadu State Board Syllabus New Paper Pattern Class 11th Accountancy Model Question Papers 2020 2021 with Answers Pdf Free Download in English Medium and Tamil Medium will help you get through your subjective questions in the exam.

Let us know if you have any concerns regarding the Tamil Nadu Government 11th Accountancy State Board Model Question Papers with Answers 2020 21, TN 11th Std Accountancy Public Exam Question Papers with Answer Key, New Paper Pattern of HSC Class 11th Accountancy Previous Year Question Papers, Plus One +1 Accountancy Model Sample Papers, drop a comment below and we will get back to you as soon as possible.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 15 Environmental Chemistry

Tamilnadu State Board New Syllabus Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Pdf Chapter 15 Environmental Chemistry Text Book Back Questions and Answers, Notes.

Tamilnadu Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 15 Environmental Chemistry

11th Chemistry Guide Environmental Chemistry Text Book Back Questions and Answers

Textbook Evaluation:

I. Choose the best answer:

Question 1.
The gaseous envelope around the earth is known as atmosphere. The region lying between an altitudes of 11 – 50 km is _______.
(a) Troposphere
(b) Mesosphere
(c) Thermosphere
(d) Stratosphere
Answer:
(d) Stratosphere

Question 2.
Which of the following belongs to secondary air pollutant?
(a) Hydrocarbon
(b) Peroxy acetyl nitrate
(c) Carbon monoxide
(d) Nitric oxide
Answer:
(a) Hydrocarbon

Question 3.
Which of the following is natural and human disturbance in ecology?
(a) Forest fire
(b) Floods
(c) Acid rain
(d) Green house effect
Answer:
(b) Floods

Question 4.
Bhopal Gas Tragedy is a case of _______.
(a) thermal pollution
(b) air pollution
(c) nuclear pollution
(d) land pollution
Answer:
(c) nuclear pollution

Question 5.
Haemoglobin of the blood forms carboxy haemoglobin with
(a) Carbon dioxide
(b) Carbon tetra chloride
(c) Carbon monoxide
(d) Carbonic acid
Answer:
(c) Carbon monoxide

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 15 Environmental Chemistry

Question 6.
Which sequence for green house gases is based on GWP?
(a) CFC > N2O > CO2 > CH4
(b) CFC > CO2 > N2O > CH4
(c) CFC > N2O > CH4 > CO2
(d) CFC > CH4 > N2O > CO2
Answer:
(b) CFC > CO2 > N2O > CH4

Question 7.
Photo chemical smog formed in congested metropolitan cities mainly consists of
(a) Ozone, SO2 and hydrocarbons
(b) Ozone, PAN and NO2
(c) PAN, smoke and SO2
(d) Hydrocarbons, SO2 and CO2
Answer:
(d) Hydrocarbons, SO2 and CO2

Question 8.
The pH of normal rain water is
(a) 6.5
(b) 7.5
(c) 5.6
(d) 4.6
Answer:
(c) 5.6

Question 9.
Ozone depletion will cause
(a) forest fires
(b) eutrophication
(c) bio magnification
(d) global warming
Answer:
(a) forest fires

Question 10.
_______ is considered to be ozone friendly substitude for CFC’S
(a) HFC (Hydro Fluro Carbon)
(b) Halons
(c) PAN (Peroxy acetyl nitrate)
(d) PAH (Poly cyclic aromatic hydro carbon)
Answer:
(d) PAH (Poly cyclic aromatic hydro carbon)

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 15 Environmental Chemistry

Question 11.
Identify the wrong statement in the following.
(a) The clean water would have a BOD value of less than 5 ppm
(b) Greenhouse effect is also called as Global warming
(c) Minute solid particles in air is known as particulate pollutants
(d) Biosphere is the protective blanket of gases surrounding the earth
Answer:
(c) Minute solid particles in air is known as particulate pollutants

Question 12.
Living in the atmosphere of CO is dangerous because it
(a) combines with O2 present inside to form CO2
(b) Reduces organic matter of tissues
(c) Combines with haemoglobin and makes it incapable to absorb oxygen
(d) Dries up the blood
Answer:
(c) Combines with haemoglobin and makes it incapable to absorb oxygen

Question 13.
World Ozone layer protection Day is celebrated in ________.
(a) June 5
(b) Nov – 19
(c) Sep – 16
(d) Jan – 26
Answer:
(c) Sep – 16

Question 14.
Release of oxides of nitrogen and hydrocarbons into the atmosphere by motor vehicles is prevented by using
(a) grit chamber
(b) scrubbers
(c) trickling filters
(d) catalytic convertors
Answer:
(b) scrubbers

Question 15.
Biochemical oxygen Demand value less than 5 ppm indicates a water sample to be
(a) highly polluted
(b) poor in dissolved oxygen
(c) rich in dissolved oxygen
(d) low COD
Answer:
(d) low COD

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 15 Environmental Chemistry

Question 16.
Match the List I with List II and select the correct answer using the code given below the lists:

List I List II
A. Depletion of ozone layer 1. CO2
B. Acid rain 2. NO
C. Photochemical smog 3. SO2
D. Green house effect 4. CFC

Code:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 15 Environmental Chemistry 1
Answer:
(a)

Question 17.
Match the List I with List II and select the correct answer using the code given below the lists.

List I List II
A. Stone leprosy 1. CO
B. Biological magnification 2. Green house gases
C. Global warming 3. Acid rain
D. Combination with haemoglobin 4. DDT

Code:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 15 Environmental Chemistry 1
Answer:
(d)

Question 18.
Assertion (A):
If BOD level of water in a reservoir is more than 5 pm it is highly polluted.
Reason (R):
High biological oxygen demand means high activity of bacteria in water.
(i) Both (A) and (R) are correct and (R) is the correct explanation of (A)
(ii) Both (A) and (R) are correct and (R) is not the correct explanation of (A)
(iii) Both (A) and (R) are not correct
(iv) (A) is correct but (R) is not correct
(a) i
(b) ii
(c) iii
(d) iv
Answer:
(a) i

Question 19.
Assertion (A):
Excessive use of chlorinated pesticide causes soil and water pollution.
Reason (R):
Such pesticides are non – biodegradable.
(i) Both (A) and (R) are correct and (R) is the correct explanation of (A)
(ii) Both (A) and (R) are correct and (R) is not the correct explanation of (A)
(iii) Both (A) and (R) are not correct
(iv) (A) is correct but (R) is not correct
(a) i
(b) ii
(c) iii
(d) iv
Answer:
(a) i

Question 20.
Assertion (A):
Oxygen plays a key role in the troposphere
Reason (R):
Troposphere is not responsible for all biological activities
(i) Both (A) and (R) are correct and (R) is the correct explanation of (A)
(ii) Both (A) and (R) are correct and (R) is not the correct explanation of (A)
(iii) Both (A) and (R) are not correct
(iv) (A) is correct but (R) is not correct
(a) i
(b) ii
(c) iii
(d) iv
Answer:
(b) ii

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 15 Environmental Chemistry

II. Write brief answer to the following questions:

Question 21.
Dissolved oxygen in water is responsible for aquatic life. What processes are responsible for the reduction in dissolved oxygen in water?
Answer:
The process which are responsible for the reduction of dissolved oxygen in water are excessive use of phosphatic and nitrate fertilizers, detergents, the discharge of human sewage and organic waste from food, paper and pulp industries. The microorganisms which oxidize organic matter also used oxygen dissolved in H2O.

More over, during night, photosynthesis stops but the aquatic plants continue to respire, resulting in reduction of dissolved oxygen.

Question 22.
What would happen, if the greenhouse gases were totally missing in the earth’s atmosphere?
Answer:
The solar energy radiated back from the earth surface in absorbed by the green house gases. (CO2, CH4, O3, CFCs) are present near the earth’s surface. They heat up the atmosphere near the earth’s surface and keep it warm.

As a result of these, there is growth of vegetation which supports the life. In the absence of this effect, there will be not life of both plant and animal on the surface of the earth.

Question 23.
Define smog.
Answer:
Smog is a combination of smoke and fog which forms droplets that remain suspended in the air. Smog is a chemical mixture of gases that forms a brownish yellow haze over urban cities.Smog mainly consists of ground level ozone, oxides of nitrogen, volatile organic compounds, SO2 acidic aerosols and gases, and particulate matter.

Question 24.
Which is considered to be earth’s protective umbrella? Why?
Answer:
At high altitudes to the atmosphere consists of a layer of ozone (O3) which acts as an umbrella or shield for harmful UV radiations. It protects us from harmful effect such as skin cancer. UV radiation can convert molecular oxygen into ozone as shown in the following reaction.
O2(g) Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 15 Environmental Chemistry 12 O(g) + O(g)
O(g) + O2(g) Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 15 Environmental Chemistry 12 O3(g)

Question 25.
What are degradable and non – degradable pollutants?
Answer:
The pollutants are classified as bio-degradable and non-biodegradable pollutants.

Bio-degradable pollutants:
The pollutants which can be easily decomposed by the natural biological processes are called bio-degradable pollutants.
Example:
plant wastes, animal wastes etc.

Non bio-degradable pollutants:
The pollutants which cannot be decomposed by the natural biological processes are called Non bio-degradable
pollutants.
Examples:
Metal wastes (mainly Hg and Pb), D.D.T, plastics, nuclear wastes etc.,
These pollutants are harmful to living organisms even in low concentration. As they are not degraded naturally, it is difficult to eliminate them from our environment.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 15 Environmental Chemistry

Question 26.
From where does ozone come in the photo chemical smog?
Answer:
NO2 Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 15 Environmental Chemistry 2 NO + (O)
O3 are strong oxidizing agent and can react with unburnt hydrocarbons in polluted air to form formaldehyde, acrolein and peroxy acetyl nitrate (PAN).

Question 27.
A person was using water supplied by corporation. Due to shortage of water he started using underground water. He felt laxative effect. What could be the cause?
Answer:
A moderate concentration of sulphate ions in water are harmless but excessive concentration is greater than 500 ppm in water causes laxative effects. Hence under ground water may have consisted excess of suplhates.

Question 28.
What is green chemistry?
Answer:
Efforts to control environmental pollution resulted in development of science for synthesis of chemicals favorable to environment which is called green chemistry. Green chemistry means science of environmentally favorable chemical synthesis.

Question 29.
Explain how does green house effect cause global warming.
Answer:
Greenhouse effect may be defined as the heating up of the earth surface due to trapping of infrared radiations reflected by earth’s surface by CO2 layer in the atmosphere”. The heating up of earth through the greenhouse effect is called global warming.

Without the heating caused by the greenhouse effect, Earth’s average surface temperature would be only about -18 °C (CPF). Although the greenhouse effect is a naturally occurring phenomenon, it is intensified by the continuous emission of greenhouse gases into the atmosphere.

During the past 100 years, the amount of carbon dioxide in the atmosphere increased by roughly 30 percent and the amount of methane more than doubled. If these trends continue, the average global temperature will increase which can lead to melting of polar ice caps and flooding of low lying areas. This will increase incidence of infectious diseases like dengue, malaria etc.

Question 30.
Mention the standards prescribed by BIS for quality of drinking water.
Answer:
Standard characteristics prescribed for deciding the quality of drinking water by BIS, in 1991 are shown in Table.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 15 Environmental Chemistry 3

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 15 Environmental Chemistry

Question 31.
How does classical smog differ from photochemical smog?
Answer:
Classical smog was first observed in London in December 1952 and hence it is also known as Londo coal smoke and fog.

It occurs in cool atmospheric smog found in many large cities. The chemical composition is the mixture of SO2, SO3 and humidity. It generally occurs in the morning and becomes worse when the sun rises. This is mainly due to the induced oxidation of SO2 to SO3, which reacts with water yielding sulphuric acid aerosol.

Chemically it is reducing in nature because of high concentration of SO2 and so it is also called as reducing smog.

ii) Photo chemical smog or Los Angel Smog:
Photo Chemical smog was first observed in Los Angels in 1950. It occurs in warm, dry and sunny climate. This type of smog is formed by the combination of smoke, dust and fog with air pollutants like oxides of nitrogen and hydrocarbons in the presence of sunlight.

It forms when the sun shines and becomes worse in the afternoon. Chemically it is oxidizing in nature because of high concentration of oxidizing agents NO2 and O3, so it is also called as oxidizing smog.

Question 32.
What are particulate pollutants? Explain any three.
Answer:
1. Particulate pollutants are small solid particles and liquid droplets suspended in air. Many of particulate pollutants are hazardous.
Examples: dust, pollen, smoke, soot and liquid droplets (aerosols) etc,

2. Smoke particulate consists of solid particles (or) mixture of solid and liquid particles formed by the combustion of organic matter.
For example, cigarette smoke, oil smoke, smokes from burning of fossil fuel, garbage and dry leaves.

3. Dust composed of fine solid particles produced during crushing and grinding of solid materials.
For example, sand from sand blasting, saw dust from wood works, cement dust from cement factories and fly ash from power generating units.

Question 33.
Even though the use of pesticides increases crop production, they adversely affect the living organisms. Explain the function and the adverse effects of the pesticides.
Answer:
Pesticides are chemicals that are used to kill or stop the growth of unwanted organisms. But these pesticides can affect the health of human beings.
These are further classified as

Insecticides:
Insecticides like DDT, BHC, aldrin etc. can stay in soil for long period of time and are absorbed by soil. They contaminate root crops like carrot, raddish, etc.

Fungicide:
Organo mercury compounds are used as most common fungicide. They dissociate in soil to produce mercury which is highly toxic.

Herbicides:
Herbicides are the chemical compounds used to control unwanted plants. They are otherwise known as weed killers. Example sodium chlorate (NaClO3) and sodium arsenite (Na3AsO3). Most of the herbicides are toxic to mammals.

Question 34.
Ethane burns completely in air to give CO2, while in a limited supply of air gives CO. The same gases are found in automobile exhaust. Both CO and CO2 are atmospheric pollutants.
Answer:
The major pollutants of oxides of carbon are carbon monoxide and carbon dioxide.

(i) Carbon Monoxide:
Carbon monoxide is a poisonous gas produced as a result of incomplete combustion of coal are firewood. It is released into the air mainly by. automobile exhaust. It binds with haemoglobin and form carboxy haemoglobin which impairs normal oxygen transport by blood and hence the oxygen carrying capacity of blood is reduced. This oxygen deficiency results in headache, dizziness, tension, Loss of consciousness, blurring of eye sight and cardiac arrest.

(ii) Carbon dioxide:
Carbon dioxide is released into the atmosphere mainly by the process of respiration, burning of fossil fuels, forest fire, decomposition of limestone in cement industry etc.

Green plants can convert CO2 gas in the atmosphere into carbohydrate and oxygen through a process called photosynthesis. The increased CO2 level in the atmosphere is responsible for global warming. It causes headache and nausea.

Question 35.
On the basis of chemical reactions involved, explain how do CFC’s cause depletion of ozone layer in stratosphere?
Answer:
In the presence of uv radiation, CFC’s break up into chlorine free radical
CF2Cl2 Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 15 Environmental Chemistry 4 CF2Cl + Cl
CFCl3 Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 15 Environmental Chemistry 4 CFCl2 + Cl
Cl + O3 → ClO + O2
ClO + O → Cl + O2

Chlorine radical is regenerated in the course of reaction. Due to this continuous attack of Cl thinning of Ozone layer takes place which leads to formation of the ozone hole.

It is estimated that for every reactive chlorine atom generated in the stratosphere 1,00,000 molecules of ozone are depleted.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 15 Environmental Chemistry

Question 36.
How is acid rain formed? Explain its effect.
Answer:
Rain water normally has a pH of 5.6 due to dissolution of atmospheric CO2 into it. Oxides, of sulphur and nitrogen in the atmosphere may be absorbed by droplets of water that make up clouds and get chemically converted into sulphuric acid and nitric acid respectively as a results of pH of rainwater drops to the level 5.6 hence it is called acid rain.

Acid rain is a by-product of a variety of sulphur and nitrogen oxides in the atmosphere. Burning of fossil fuels (coal and oil) in power stations, furnaces and petrol, diesel in motor engines produce sulphur dioxide and nitrogen oxides. The main contributors to acid rain are SO2 and NO2. They are converted into sulphuric acid and nitric acid respectively by the reaction with oxygen and water.

2SO2 + O2 + 2H2O → 2H2SO4
4NO2 + O2 + 2H2O → 4HNO3

Question 37.
What is sewage? What are the major steps involved in the treatment of sewage waste?
Answer:
Objectives of waste water treatment:

  1. To convert harmful compounds into harmless compounds.
  2. To eliminate the offensive smell.
  3. To remove the solid content of the sewage.
  4. To destroy the disease-producing micro organisms.

Treatment process:
The sewage (or) wastewater treatment process involves the following steps.

I. Preliminary Treatment:
In this treatment, coarse solids and suspended impurities are removed by passing the wastewater through bar and mesh screens.

II. Primary treatment (or) Settling process:
In this treatment, greater proportion of the suspended inorganic and organic solids are removed from the liquid sewage by settling. In order to facilitate quick settling coagulants like alum, ferrous sulphate are added. These produce large gelatinous precipitates, which entrap finely divided organic matter and settle rapidly.
Al2(SO4)3 + 6H2O → 2Al(OH)3 ↓ + 3H2SO4

III. Secondary (or) biological treatment:
In this treatment, biodegradable organic impurities are removed by aerobic bacteria. It removes upto 90 % of the oxygen demanding wastes. This is done by trickling filter or activated sludge process.

(a) Trickling filter process:
It is a circular tank and is filled with either coarse or crushed rock. Sewage is sprayed over this bed by means of slowly rotating arms.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 15 Environmental Chemistry 5

When sewage starts percolating downwards, mocroorganisms present in the sewage grow on the surface of filtering media using organic material of the sewage as food. After completion of aerobic oxidation the treated sewage is taken to the settling tank and the sludge is removed. This process removes about 80 – 85 % of BOD.

(b) Activated sludge process:

Activated sludge is biologically active sewage and it has a large number of aerobic bacterias, which can easily oxidize the organic impurities.

The sewage effluent from primary treatment is mixed with the required amount of activated sludge. Then the mixture is aerated in the aeration tank. Under these condition, organic impurities of the sewage get oxidized rapidly by the microorganisms.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 15 Environmental Chemistry 6

After aeration, the sewage is taken to the sedimentation tank. Sludges settle down in this tank, called activated sludge, a portion of which is used for seeding fresh batch of the sewage. This process removes about 90-95 % of BOD.

IV. Tertiary treatment:
After the secondary treatment, the sewage effluent has a lower BOD (25 ppm), which can be removed by the tertiary treatment process.

In the tertiary treatment, the effluent is introduced into a flocculation tank, where lime is added to remove phosphates. From the flocculation tank the effluent is led to ammonia stripping tower, where pH is maintained to 11 and the NH4+ is converted to gaseous NH3. Then the effluent is allowed to pass through activated charcoal column, where minute organic wastes are absorbed by charcoal. Finally the effluent water is treated with disinfectant (chlorine).

V. Disposal of sludge:
This is the last stage in the sewage treatment. Sludge formed from different steps can be disposed by

  1. dumping into low – lying areas,
  2. burning of sludge (incineration),
  3. dumping into the sea,
  4. using it as low grade fertilizers.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 15 Environmental Chemistry 7

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 15 Environmental Chemistry

Question 38.
Differentiate the following:
(i) BOD and COD
(ii) Viable and non-viable particulate pollutants.
Answer:
(i) BOD and COD Biochemical oxygen demand (BOD):
The total amount of oxygen in milligrams consumed by microorganisms in decomposing the waste in one litre of water at 200°C for a period of 5 days is called biochemical oxygen demand (BOD) and its value is expressed in ppm. BOD is used as a measure of degree of water pollution. Clean water would have BOD value less than 5 ppm whereas highly polluted water has BOD value of 17 ppm or more.

Chemical Oxygen Demand (COD):
BOD measurement takes 5 days so another parameter called the Chemical Oxygen Demand (COD) is measured. Chemical oxygen demand (COD) is defined as the amount of oxygen required by the organic matter in a sample of water for its oxidation by a strong oxidising agent like K2Cr2O7 in acid medium for a period of 2 hrs.

(ii) Viable and non – viable particulate pollutants:

Viable particulates:
The viable particulates are the small size living organisms such as bacteria, fungi, moulds, algae, etc. which are dispersed in air. Some of the fungi cause allergy in human beings and diseases in plants.

Non-viable particulates:
The non- viable particulates are small solid particles and liquid droplets suspended in air. They help in the transportation of viable particles. There are four types of non-viable particulates in the atmosphere.
Example:
Smoke, Dust, Mists, Fumes.

Question 39.
Explain how oxygen deficiency is cause by carbon monoxide in our blood? Give its effect.
Answer:
Carbon monoxide is a poisonous gas produced as a result of incomplete combustion of coal are firewood. It is released into the air mainly by automobile exhaust. It binds with haemoglobin and form carboxy haemoglobin which impairs normal oxygen transport by blood and hence the oxygen carrying capacity of blood is reduced.

This oxygen deficiency results in headache, dizziness, tension, Loss of consciousness, blurring of eye sight and cardiac arrest. Efforts to control environmental pollution have resulted in development of science for synthesis of chemical favorable to environment and it is called green chemistry.

Question 40.
What are the various methods you suggest to protect our environment from pollution?
Answer:

  1. Waste management:
    Environmental pollution can be controlled by proper disposal of wastes.
  2. Recycling:
    A large amount of disposed waste material can be reused by recycling the waste, thus it reduces the land fill and converts waste into useful forms.
  3. Substitution of less toxic solvents for highly toxic ones used in certain industrial processes.
  4. Use of fuels with lower sulphur content (e.g., washed coal)
  5. Growing more trees.
  6. Control measures in vehicle emissions are adequate.
  7. Efforts to control environmental pollution have resulted in development of science for synthesis of chemical favourable to environment and it is called green chemistry.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 15 Environmental Chemistry

11th Chemistry Guide Environmental Chemistry Additional Questions and Answers

I. Choose the best answer:

Question 1.
The type of pollution cause by spraying of DDT is
(a) air and soil
(b) air and water
(c) air
(d) air, water and soil
Answer:
(d) air, water and soil

Question 2.
The green house effect is caused by
(a) CO2
(b) NO2
(c) NO
(d) CO
Answer:
(a) CO2

Question 3.
The gas responsible for ozone depletion:
(a) NO and freons
(b) SO2
(c) CO2
(d) CO
Answer:
(a) NO and freons

Question 4.
In Antartica ozone depletion is due to the formation of following compound
(a) acrolein
(b) peroxyacetyl nitrate
(c) SO2 and NO2
(d) chlorine nitrate
Answer:
(a) acrolein

Question 5.
The main element of smog is
(a) O3 and PAN
(b) O3
(c) PAN
(d) PPN and PBN
Answer:
(a) O3 and PAN

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 15 Environmental Chemistry

Question 6.
Classical smog occurs in places of
(a) excess SO2
(b) low temperature
(c) high temperature
(d) excess NH3
Answer:
(b) low temperature

Question 7.
Which gas is responsible for ‘Bhopal Gas Tragedy’ in 1984?
(a) CO
(b) Methyl isocynate
(c) SO2 and NO2
(d) Ethyl isocynate
Answer:
(b) Methyl isocynate

Question 8.
Which gas is a main reason behind air pollution, is produced by
(a) sewage pollutant
(b) aerosols
(c) industrial remains
(d) Above all
Answer:
(b) aerosols

Question 9.
Which is a dangerous radiological pollutant?
(a) C14
(b) S35
(c) Sr90
(d) P32
Answer:
(c) Sr90

Question 10.
Which is related to ‘Green House Effect’?
(a) Farming of Green Plants
(b) Farming of Vegetables in Houses
(c) Global Warming
(d) Biodegradable pollutant
Answer:
(c) Global Warming

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 15 Environmental Chemistry

Question 11.
The uppermost region of the atmosphere is called
(a) Ionosphere
(b) Mesosphere
(c) Troposphere
(d) Stratosphere
Answer:
(d) Stratosphere

Question 12.
Which of the following is the coldest region of atmosphere
(a) Thermosphere
(b) Mesosphere
(c) Troposphere
(d) Stratosphere
Answer:
(b) Mesosphere

Question 13.
The region which is greatly affected by air pollution is
(a) Thermosphere
(b) Stratosphere
(c) Troposphere
(d) Mesosphere
Answer:
(c) Troposphere

Question 14.
The substance which is a primary pollutant?
(a) H2SO4
(b) CO
(c) PAN
(d) Aldehydes
Answer:
(b) CO

Question 15.
Depletion of ozone layer causes
(a) breast cancer
(b) blood cancer
(c) lung cancer
(d) skin cancer
Answer:
(d) skin cancer

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 15 Environmental Chemistry

Question 16.
Formation of London smog takes place in
(a) Winter during day time
(b) summer during day time
(c) summer during morning time
(d) winter during morning time
Answer:
(d) winter during morning time

Question 17.
The substance which is not regarded as a pollutant?
(a) NO2
(b) CO2
(c) O3
(d) Hydrocarbons
Answer:
(b) CO2

Question 18.
Green house gases
(a) allow shorter wavelength to enter earth’s atmosphere while doesn’t allow longer wavelength to leave the earth’s atmosphere.
(b) allow longer wavelength to enter earth atmosphere while doesn’t allow shorter wavelength to leave the surface.
(c) don’t have wavelength specific character.
(d) she wavelength specific behaviour near the earth while far from earth these have wavelength independent behavior.
Answer:
(a) allow shorter wavelength to enter earth’s atmosphere while doesn’t allow longer wavelength to leave the earth’s atmosphere.

Question 19.
Carbon monoxide (CO) is harmful to man because
(a) it forms carbolic acid
(b) it generates excess CO2
(c) it is carcinogenic
(d) it competes with O2 for haemoglobin
Answer:
(d) it competes with O2 for haemoglobin

Question 20.
Today the concentration of green house gases is very high because of
(a) use of refrigerator
(b) increased combustion of oils and coal
(c) deforestation
(d) All of the above
Answer:
(d) All of the above

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 15 Environmental Chemistry

Question 21.
The quantity of CO2 in atmosphere is
(a) 3.34 %
(b) 6.5 %
(c) 0.034 %
(d) 0.34 %
Answer:
(c) 0.034 %

Question 22.
BOD of pond is connected with
(a) microbes & organic matter
(b) organic matter
(c) microbes
(d) None of these
Answer:
(a) microbes & organic matter

Question 23.
When rain is accompanied by a thunderstorm, the collected rain water will have a pH value
(a) slightly lower than that of rain water without thunderstorm
(b) slightly higher than that when the thunderstorm is not there
(c) uninfluenced by occurrence of thunderstorm
(d) which depends upon the amount of dust in air
Answer:
(a) slightly lower than that of rain water without thunderstorm

Question 24.
Water pollution is caused by
(a) pesticides
(b) SO2
(c) O2
(d) CO2
Answer:
(a) pesticides

Question 25.
Minamata disease of Japan is due to pollution of
(a) Aresenic
(b) Lead
(c) Cynide
(d) Mercury
Answer:
(d) Mercury

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 15 Environmental Chemistry

Question 26.
Which causes death of fish in water bodies polluted by sewage?
(a) Foul smell
(b) Pathogens
(c) Herbicides
(d) Decrease in D.O.
Answer:
(d) Decrease in D.O.

Question 27.
Sewage water is purified by
(a) aquatic plants
(b) microorganisms
(c) light
(d) fishes
Answer:
(b) microorganisms

Question 28.
Which pollutant is harmful for ‘Tajmahal’?
(a) Hydrogen
(b) O2
(c) SO2
(d) Chlorine
Answer:
(c) SO2

Question 29.
Negative soil pollution is
(a) reduction in soil productivity due to erosion and over use
(b) reduction in soil productivity due to addition of pesticides and industrial wastes
(c) converting fertile land into barren land by dumping ash, sludge and garbage
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(a) reduction in soil productivity due to erosion and over use

Question 30.
The quantity of DDT in food chain
(a) decreases
(b) remains same
(c) increases
(d) changes
Answer:
(c) increases

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 15 Environmental Chemistry

Question 31.
Which is known as “Third poison of environment” and also creates ‘Blue baby syndrome’
(a) Nitrate present in water
(b) Phosphate and detergents found in water
(c) Cyanide
(d) Pesticides
Answer:
(b) Phosphate and detergents found in water

Question 32.
The substance having the largest concentration in acid rain?
(a) H2CO3
(b) HNO3
(c) HCl
(d) H2SO4
Answer:
(d) H2SO4

Question 33.
Water is often treated with chlorine to
(a) remove hardness
(b) increase oxygen content
(c) kill germs
(d) remove suspended particles
Answer:
(c) kill germs

Question 34.
Thermal pollution affects mainly
(a) vegetation
(b) aquatic creature
(c) rocks
(d) air
Answer:
(b) aquatic creature

Question 35.
B.O.D test or biochemical oxygen demand test is made for measuring
(a) air pollution
(b) water pollution
(c) noise pollution
(d) soil pollution
Answer:
(b) water pollution

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 15 Environmental Chemistry

Question 36.
Brewery and sugar factory water alters the quality of a water body by increasing
(a) temperature
(b) turbidity
(C) pH
(d) COD and BOD
Answer:
(d) COD and BOD

Question 37.
A dental disease characterized by mottling of teeth is due to the presence of a certain chemical element in drinking water. Which is that element?
(a) Boron
(b) Chlorine
(c) Fluorine
(d) Mercury
Answer:
(c) Fluorine

Question 38.
The high amount of E.coli in water is an indicator of
(a) hardness of water
(b) industrial pollution
(c) sewage pollution
(d) presence of chlorine in the water
Answer:
(c) sewage pollution

Question 39.
A lake with an inflow of domestic sewage rich in organic waste may result in
(a) drying of the lake very soon due to algal bloom
(b) an increase production of fish due to a lot of nutrients
(c) death of fish due to lack of oxygen
(d) increased population of aquatic food web organisms
Answer:
(c) death of fish due to lack of oxygen

Question 40.
In which one of the following the BOD (Biochemical Oxygen Demand) of sewage(S), distillery effluent (DE), paper mill effluent (PE) and sugar mill effluent (SE) have been arranged in ascending order
(a) SE < S < PE < DE
(b) SE < PE < S < DE
(c) PE < S < SE < DE
(d) S < DE < PE < SE
Answer:
(c) PE < S < SE < DE

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 15 Environmental Chemistry

Question 41.
The greenhouse effect is because of the
(a) presence of gases, which in general are strong infrared absorbers, in the atmosphere
(b) presence of CO2 only in the atmosphere
(c) presence of O3 and CH4 in the atmosphere
(d) N2O and chlorofluoro hydrocarbons in the atmosphere
Answer:
(a) presence of gases, which in general are strong infrared absorbers, in the atmosphere

Question 42.
Which of the following is/are the hazardous pollutant(s) present in automobile exhaust gases?
(a) N2
(b) CO
(c) CH4
(d) Oxides of nitrogen
Answer:
(c) CH4

Question 43.
Green chemistry means such reactions which:
(a) produce colour during reactions
(b) reduce the use and production of hazardous chemicals
(c) are related to the depletion of ozone layer
(d) study the reactions in plants
Answer:
(b) reduce the use and production of hazardous chemicals

Question 44.
Which one of the following statement is not true?
(a) pH of drinking water should be between 5.5 – 9.5.
(b) Concentration of DO below 6 ppm is good for the growth of fish.
(c) Clean water would have a BOD value of less than 5 ppm.
(d) Oxides of sulphur, nitrogen and carbon are the most widespread air pollutant.
Answer:
(b) Concentration of DO below 6 ppm is good for the growth of fish.

Question 45.
Which one of the following statements regarding photochemical smog is not correct?
(a) Carbon monoxide does not play any role in photochemical smog formation.
(b) photochemical smog is an oxidizing agent in character.
(c) photochemical smog is formed through photochemical reaction involving solar energy.
(d) Photochemical smog does not cause irritation in eyes and throat.
Answer:
(d) Photochemical smog does not cause irritation in eyes and throat.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 15 Environmental Chemistry

Question 46.
Frequent occurrence of water blooms in a lake indicates
(a) nutrient deficiency
(b) oxygen deficiency
(c) excessive nutrient availability
(d) absence of herbivores in the lake
Answer:
(b) oxygen deficiency

Question 47.
The smog is essentially caused by the presence of
(a) Oxides of sulphur and nitrogen
(b) O2 and N2
(c) O2 and O3
(d) O2 and N2
Answer:
(a) Oxides of sulphur and nitrogen

Question 48.
Identify the wrong statement in the following.
(a) Chlorofluorocarbons are responsible for ozone layer depletion.
(b) Greenhouse effect is responsible for global warming.
(c) Ozone layer does not permit infrared radiation from the sun to reach the earth.
(d) Acid rain is mostly because of oxides of nitrogen and sulphur.
Answer:
(c) Ozone layer does not permit infrared radiation from the sun to reach the earth.

Question 49.
Identify the incorrect statement from the following.
(a) Ozone absorbs the intense ultraviolet radiation of the sun.
(b) Depletion of ozone layer is because of its chemical reactions with chlorofluoro alkanes.
(c) Ozone absorbs infrared radiation.
(d) Oxides of nitrogen in the atmosphere can cause the depletion of ozone layer.
Answer:
(c) Ozone absorbs infrared radiation

Question 50.
What is DDT among the following?
(a) Greenhouse gas
(b) A fertilizer
(c) Biodegradable pollutant
(d) Non – biodegradable pollutant
Answer:
(d) Non – biodegradable pollutant

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 15 Environmental Chemistry

Question 51.
The gas leaked from a storage tank of the Union Carbide plant in Bhopal gas tragedy was:
(a) Methyl isocyanate
(b) Methylamine
(c) Ammonia
(d) Phosgene
Answer:
(a) Methyl isocyanate

Question 52.
Black – foot disease is caused due to groundwater contaminated with excess of
(a) Nitrate
(b) Fluoride
(c) Arsenic
(d) Sulphur
Answer:
(c) Arsenic

Question 53.
Exposure of an organism to UV system causes
(a) photodynamic action
(b) formation of thymidine
(c) splitting of H – bonds of DNA
(d) splitting of phosphodiester bonds
Answer:
(c) splitting of H – bonds of DNA

Question 54.
Under column – I, a list of gases that are known to have a greenhouse effect is given. Relate them to their main source selecting from the given under Column – II:

Column – I Column – II
A. Nitrous oxide 1. Secondary pollutant from car exhausts
B. Chlorofluoro carbon (CFCs) 2. Combustion of fossil fuels, wood, etc.
C. Methane 3. Denitrification
D. Ozone (O3) 4. refrigerators, aerosol, sprays
E. Carbondioxide 5. Cattle, rice fields, toilets

(a) A – 3, B – 4, C – 5, D – 1, E – 2
(b) A – 5, B – 1, C – 3, D – 4, E – 2
(c) A – 4, B – 5 , C – 1, D – 2, E – 3
(d) A – 1, B – 3, C – 4, D – 5, E – 2
Answer:
(a) A – 3, B – 4, C – 5, D – 1, E – 2

Question 55.
Minamata disease is a pollution related disease results form
(a) oil spills into sea
(b) accumulation of arsenic into atmosphere
(c) release of industrial waste mercury into bodies water
(d) release human organic waste into drinking water
Answer:
(c) release of industrial waste mercury into bodies water

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 15 Environmental Chemistry

Question 56.
Air pollution causing photochemical oxidants production include
(a) Carbon monoxide, sulphur dioxide
(b) Nitrous oxide, nitric acid fumes, nitric oxide
(c) Ozone, peroxyacetyl nitrate, aldehydes
(d) Oxygen, chlorine, fuming nitric acid
Answer:
(c) Ozone, peroxyacetyl nitrate, aldehydes

Question 57.
Photochemical smog formed in congested metropolitan cities mainly consists of
(a) ozone, peroxyacetyl nitrate and NOx
(b) smoke, peroxyacetyl nitrate and SO2
(c) hydrocarbons, SO2 and CO2
(d) hydrocarbons, ozone and SOx
Answer:
(a) ozone, peroxyacetyl nitrate and NOx

Question 58.
Which, one of the following statements is correct?
(a) Extensive use of chemical fertilizers may lead to eutrophication of nearby water bodies
(b) Both Azotobacter and Rhizobium fix atmospheric nitrogen in root nodules of plants
(c) Cyanobacteria such as Anabaena and Nostoc are important mobilizers of phosphates and potassium for plant nutrition in soil
(d) At present it is not possible to grow maize without chemical fertilizers
Answer:
(a) Extensive use of chemical fertilizers may lead to eutrophication of nearby water bodies

Question 59.
Reducing the use of non-biodegradable things will contribute of
(a) Increase in O2
(b) Cyanophycean blooms occur
(c) Depletion of O2 layers
(d) Eutrophication
Answer:
(a) Increase in O2

Question 60.
Which of the following metal is a water pollutant and causes sterility in human. being?
(a) As
(b) Mn
(c) Mg
(d) Hg
Answer:
(b) Mn

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 15 Environmental Chemistry

Question 61.
Lichens do not like to grow in cities
(a) because of absence of the right type of algae and fungi
(b) because of lack of moisture
(c) because of SO2 pollution
(d) because natural habitat is missing
Answer:
(c) because of SO2 pollution

Question 62.
Limit of BOD prescribed by Central pollution Control Board for the discharge of industrial and municipal waste waters into natural surface waters, is
(a) < 100 ppm
(b) < 30 ppm
(c) < 3.0 ppm
(d) < 10 ppm
Answer:
(b) < 30 ppm

Question 63.
Which one of the following pairs is mismatched
(a) Fossil fuel burning – release of CO2
(b) Nuclear power – radioactive wastes
(c) Solar energy – Greenhouse effect
(d) Biomass burning – release of CO2
Answer:
(c) Solar energy – Greenhouse effect

Question 64.
In a coal fired power plant electrostatic precipitators are installed to control emission of
(a) SO2
(b) NOx
(c) SPM
(d) CO
Answer:
(c) SPM

Question 65.
The term “Bio – magnification” refers to the
(a) growth of organism due to food consumption
(b) increase in population size
(c) blowing up of environmental issues by man
(d) increase in the concentration of non – degradable pollutants as they pass through food chain
Answer:
(d) increase in the concentration of non – degradable pollutants as they pass through food chain

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 15 Environmental Chemistry

Question 66.
In almost all Indian metropolitan cities like Delhi, the major atmospheric pollutant(s) is / are
(a) suspended particulate matter (SPM)
(b) oxides of sulphur
(c) carbon dioxide and carbon monoxide
(d) oxides of nitrogen
Answer:
(a) suspended particulate matter (SPM)

Question 67.
In coming years, skin related disorders will be more common due to
(a) pollutants in air
(b) use of detergents
(c) water pollution
(d) depletion of ozone layer
Answer:
(d) depletion of ozone layer

Question 68.
Statement 1:
Inhabitants close to very busy airports are likely to experience health hazards.
Statement 2:
Sound level of jet aeroplanes usually exceeds 160 dB.
(a) Statement – 1 is True, Statement – 2 is True, Statement – 2 is a correct explanation for Statement – 1.
(b) Statement – 1 is True, Statement – 2 is True, Statement – 2 is not a correct explanation for statement – 1
(c) Statement – 1 is True, Statement – 2 is False
(d) Statement – 1 is False, Statement – 2 is True
Answer:
(a) Statement – 1 is True, Statement – 2 is True, Statement – 2 is a correct explanation for Statement – 1.

Question 69.
Statement 1:
Suspended particulate matter (SPM) is an important pollutant released by diesel vehicles.
Statement 2:
Catalytic converters greatly reduce pollution caused by automobiles.
(a) Statement – 1 is True, Statement – 2 is True, Statement -2 is a correct explanation for Statement – 1.
(b) Statement – 1 is True, Statement – 2 is True, Statement – 2 is not a correct explanation for statement – 1
(c) Statement – 1 is True, Statement – 2 is False
(d) Statement – 1 is False, Statement – 2 is True
Answer:
(b) Statement – 1 is True, Statement – 2 is True, Statement – 2 is not a correct explanation for statement – 1

Question 70.
Statement 1:
Eutrophication shows increase in productivity in water.
Statement 2:
With increasing eutrophication, the diversity of the phytoplankton increases.
(a) Statement – 1 is True, Statement – 2 is True, Statement -2 is a correct explanation for Statement – 1.
(b) Statement – 1 is True, Statement – 2 is True, Statement – 2 is not a correct explanation for statement – 1
(c) Statement – 1 is True, Statement – 2 is False
(d) Statement – 1 is False, Statement – 2 is True
Answer:
(b) Statement – 1 is True, Statement – 2 is True, Statement – 2 is not a correct explanation for statement – 1

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 15 Environmental Chemistry

Question 71.
Statement 1:
The main cause of the Bhopal gas tragedy was phosgene.
Statement 2:
Phosgene is a volatile liquid.
(a) Statement – 1 is True, Statement – 2 is True, Statement -2 is a correct explanation for Statement – 1.
(b) Statement – 1 is True, Statement – 2 is True, Statement – 2 is not a correct explanation for statement – 1
(c) Statement – 1 is True, Statement – 2 is False
(d) Statement – 1 is False, Statement – 2 is True
Answer:
(d) Statement – 1 is False, Statement – 2 is True

Question 72.
Statement 1:
CO2 causes green house effect.
Statement 2:
Other gases do not show such effect.
(a) Statement – 1 is True, Statement – 2 is True, Statement -2 is a correct explanation for Statement – 1
(b) Statement – 1 is True, Statement – 2 is True, Statement – 2 is not a correct explanation for statement – 1
(c) Statement – 1 is True, Statement – 2 is False
(d) Statement – 1 is False, Statement – 2 is True
Answer:
(c) Statement – 1 is True, Statement – 2 is False

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 15 Environmental Chemistry

II. Very short question and answers (2 Marks):

Question 1.
What is called as environmental pollution?
Answer:
Any undesirable change in our environment that has harmful effects on plants, animals and human beings is called environmental pollution.

Question 2.
What are pollutants?
Answer:
The substances which cause pollution of environment are called pollutants.

Question 3.
Write the different types of atmospheric pollution.
Answer:

  1. Air pollution
  2. Water pollution
  3. Soil pollution.

Question 4.
What is Air pollution?
Answer:
Any undesirable change in air which adversely affects living organisms is called air pollution. Air pollution is limited to troposphere and stratosphere. Air pollution is mainly due to the excessive discharge of undesirable foreign matter in to the atmospheric air.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 15 Environmental Chemistry

Question 5.
What are the techniques adopt to reduce particulate pollutants?
Answer:
The particulates from air can be removed by using electrostatic precipitators, gravity settling chambers, and wet scrubbers or by cyclone collectors. These techniques are based on washing away or settling of the particulates.

Question 6.
Define soil pollution.
Answer:
Soil pollution is defined as the buildup of persistent toxic compounds, radioactive materials, chemical salts and disease causing agents in soils which have harmful effects on plant growth and animal health.

Question 7.
Write the effects that were caused by classical smog.
Answer:

  1. Smog is primarily responsible for acid rain.
  2. Smog results in poor visibility and it affects air and road transport.
  3. It also causes bronchial irritation.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 15 Environmental Chemistry

III. Short question and answers (3 Marks):

Question 1.
How the oxides of nitrogen pollute the atmospheric air?
Answer:
Oxides of nitrogen are produced during high temperature combustion processes, oxidation of nitrogen in air and from the combustion of fuels (coal, diesel, petrol etc.).
N2 + O2 Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 15 Environmental Chemistry 8 2NO
2NO + O2 Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 15 Environmental Chemistry 9 2NO2
NO + O3 → NO2 + O2

The oxides of nitrogen are converted into nitric acid which comes, down in the form of acid rain. They also form reddish brown haze in heavy traffic. Nitrogen dioxide potentially damages plant leaves and retards photosynthesis. NO2 is a respiratory irritant and it can cause asthma and lung injury. Nitrogen dioxide is also harmful to various textile fibres and metals.

Question 2.
How the hydrocarbon compounds make harmful effects on living things?
Answer:
The compounds composed of carbon and hydrogen only are called hydrocarbons. They are mainly produced naturally (marsh gas) and also by incomplete combustion of automobile fuel.

They are potential cancer causing (carcinogenic) agents. For example, polynuclear aromatic hydrocarbons (PAH) are carcinogenic, they cause irritation in eyes and mucous membranes.

Question 3.
Explain the environmental impact of ozone depletion.
Answer:
The formation and destruction of ozone is a regular natural process, which never disturbs the equilibrium level of ozone in the stratosphere. Any change in the equilibrium level of the ozone in the atmosphere will adversely affect life in the biosphere in the following ways.

Depletion of ozone layer will allow more UV rays to reach the earth surface and layer would cause skin cancer and also decrease the immunity level in human beings. UV radiation affects plant proteins which leads to harmful mutation of cells. UV radiation affects the growth of phytoplankton, as a result ocean food chain is disturbed and even damages the fish productivity.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 15 Environmental Chemistry

Question 4.
Write the causes of water pollution.
Answer:
(i) Microbiological (Pathogens):
Disease causing microorganisms like bacteria, viruses and protozoa are most serious water pollutants. They come from domestic sewage and animal excreta. Fish and shellfish can become contaminated and people who eat them can become ill. Some serious diseases like polio and cholera are water borne diseases. Human excreta contain bacteria such as Escherichia coli and Streptococcus faecalis which cause gastrointestinal diseases.

(ii) Organic wastes:
Organic matter such as leaves, grass, trash etc can also pollute water. Water pollution is caused by excessive phytoplankton growth within water. Microorganisms present in water decompose these organic matter and consume dissolved oxygen in water.

Question 5.
Write a short note on Eutrophication.
Answer:
Eutrophication is a process by which water bodies receive excess nutrients that stimulates excessive plant growth (algae, other plant weeds). This enhanced plant growth in water bodies is called as algae bloom.

The growth of algae in extreme abundance covers the water surface and reduces the oxygen concentration in water. Thus, bloom-infested water inhibits the growth of other living organisms in the water body. This process in which the nutrient-rich water bodies support a dense plant population, kills animal life by depriving it of oxygen and results in loss of biodiversity is known as eutrophication.

Question 6.
Write the harmful effects those caused by chemical water pollutants.
Answer:

  1. Cadmium and mercury can cause kidney damage.
  2. Lead poisoning can leads to severe damage of kidneys, liver, brain etc. it also affects central nervous system
  3. Polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs) causes skin diseases and are carcinogenic in nature.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 15 Environmental Chemistry

Question 7.
Distinguish between BOD and COD.
Answer:

BOD COD
1. BOD is the amount of oxygen required for the biological decomposition of organic matter present in the water. COD is the amount of oxygen required for chemical oxidation of organic matter using some oxidizing agent like K2Cr207 and KMn04.
2. It is an important indication of the amount of organic matter present in the river water. It is carried out to determine the pollution strength of river water.
3. Since complete oxidation occurs in an indefinite period, the reaction period is taken as 5 days at 20°C. It is a rapid process and takes only 8 hours.

IV. Long question and answer (5 Marks):

Question 1.
Explain the different layers of earth’s atmosphere.
Answer:
Troposphere:
The lowest layer of the atmosphere is called the troposphere and it extends from o – 10 km from the earth surface. About 80% of the mass of the atmosphere is in this layer. This troposphere in further divided as follows.

i) Hydrosphere:
Hydrosphere includes all types of water sources like oceans, seas, rivers, lakes, streams, underground water, polar icecaps, clouds etc. It covers about 75% of the earth’s surface. Hence the earth is called as a blue planet.

ii) Lithosphere:
Lithosphere includes soil, rocks and mountains which are solid components of earth.

iii) Biosphere:
It includes the lithosphere, hydrosphere and atmosphere integrating the living organism present in the lithosphere, hydrosphere and atmosphere.

Question 2.
How the oxides of sulphur pollute the atmospheric air?
Answer:
Sulphur dioxide and sulphur trioxide are produced by burning sulphur-containing fossil fuels arid roasting sulphide ores. Sulphur dioxide is a poisonous gas to both animals and plants. Sulphur dioxide causes eye irritation, coughing and respiratory asthma, bronchitis, etc.

Sulphur dioxide is oxidised into more harmful sulphur trioxide in the presence of particulate matter present in polluted air.
2SO2 + O2 Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 15 Environmental Chemistry 10 2SO3

SO3 combines with atmospheric water vapour to form H2SO4, which comes down in the form of acid rain.
SO3 + H2O → H2SO4

Question 3.
Explain the health effects of particulate pollutants for human health.
Answer:

  1. Dust, mist, fumes,etc., are air borne particles which are dangerous for human health. Particulate pollutants bigger than 5 microns are likely to settle in the nasal passage whereas particles of about 10 micron enters the lungs easily and causes scaring or fibrosis of lung lining.
  2. They irritate the lungs and causes cancer and a,sthma. This disease is also called pneumoconiosis. Coal miners may suffer from black lung disease. Textile workers may suffer from white lung disease.
  3. Lead particulates affect children’s brain, interferes maturation of RBCs and even cause cancer.
  4. Particulates in the atmosphere reduce visibility by scattering and absorption of sunlight. It is dangerous for aircraft and motor vehicles
  5. Particulates provide nuclei for cloud formation and increase fog and rain.
  6. Particulates deposit on plant leaves and hinder the intake of CO2 from the air and affect photosynthesis.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 15 Environmental Chemistry

Question 4.
Explain the effects of photo chemical smog and its control.
Answer:
The three main components of photo chemical smog are nitrogen oxide, ozone and oxidised hydro carbon like formaldehyde(HCHO), Acrolein (CH2 = CH – CHO), peroxy acetyl nitrate (PAN). Photochemical smog causes irritation to eyes, skin and lungs, increase in chances of asthma.

High concentrations of ozone and NO can cause nose and throat irritation, chest pain, uncomfortable in breathing, etc. PAN is toxic to plants, attacks younger leaves and cause bronzing and glazing of their surfaces. It causes corrosion of metals stones, building materials and painted surfaces.

Control of Photo chemical smog:
The formation of photochemical smog can be suppressed by preventing the release of nitrogen oxides and hydrocarbons into the atmosphere from the motor vehicles by using catalytic convertors in engines. Plantation of certain trees like Pinus, Pyrus, Querus Vitus and juniparus can metabolise nitrogen oxide.

Question 5.
List out the major water pollutants and their sources.
Answer:

Pollutant Sources
1.Microorganisms Domestic sewage, domestic waste water, dung heap.
2. Organic wastes Domestic sewage, animal excreta, food processing factory waste, detergents and decayed animals and plants.
3. Plant nutrients Chemical fertilisers.
4. Heavy metals Heavy metal producing factories.
5. Sediments Soil erosion by agriculture and strip-mining.
6. Pesticides Chemicals used for killing insects, fungi and weeds.
7. Radioactive Mining of uranium containing minerals substances.
8. Heat Water used for cooling in industries.

Question 6.
What are the major sources that cause soil pollution?
Answer:
Artificial fertilizers:
Soil nutrients are useful for growth of plants. Plants obtains carbon, hydrogen and oxygen from air or water, whereas other essential nutrients like nitrogen, phosphorous, potassium, calcium, magnesium, sulphur are being absorbed from soil. To remove the deficiency of nutrients in soil, farmers add artificial fertilizers. Increased use of phosphate fertilizers or excess use of artificial fertilizers like NPK in soil, results in reduced yield in that soil.

Pesticides:
Pesticides are the chemicals that are used to kill or stop the growth of unwanted organisms. But these pesticides can affect the health of human beings.
These are further classified as

Insecticides:
Insecticides like DDT, BHC, aldrin etc. can stay in soil for long period of time and are absorbed by soil. They contaminate root crops like carrot, raddish, etc.

Fungicide:
Organo mercury compounds Eire used as most common fungicide. They dissociate in soil to produce mercury which is highly toxic.

Herbicides:
Herbicides are the chemical compounds used to control unwanted plants. They are otherwise known as weed killers.
Example:
Simple sodium chlorate (NaClO3) and sodium arsenite (Na3AsO3). Most of the herbicides are toxic to mammals.

Industrial wastes:
Industrial activities have been the biggest contributor to the soil pollution especially the mining Eind manufacturing activities.

Large number of toxic wastes are released from industries. Industrial wastes include cyanides, chromates, acids, alkalis, and metals like mercury, copper, zinc, cadmium and lead etc. These industrial wastes in the soil surface lie for a long time and make it unsuitable for use.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 15 Environmental Chemistry

Question 7.
Explain the various contribution of green chemistry in our day to day life.
Answer:
(1) Dry cleaning of clothes:

Solvents like tetrachloroethylene used in dry cleaning of clothes, pollute the ground water and are carcinogenic. In the place of tetrachloroethylene, liquefied CO2 with suitable detergent is an Alternate solvent used. Liquified CO2 is not harmful to the ground water. Now a days H2O2 used for bleaching clothes in laundry, gives better results and utilizese less water.

(2) Bleaching of paper:

Conventional method of bleaching was done with chlorine. Now a days H2O2 can be used for bleaching paper in presence of catalyst.

(3) Synthesis of chemicals:

Acetaldehyde is now commercially prepared by one step oxidation of ethene in the presence of ionic catalyst in aqueous medium with 90% yield.

CH2 = CH2 + O Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 15 Environmental Chemistry 11 CH3CHO
Ethylene Acetaldehyde

(4) Instead of petrol, methanol is used as a fuel in automobiles:

Methanol is considered to be less expensive than other commercial fuel and gasoline. During the process of combustion, it provides a higher thermal efficiency and power output because of its high octane rating and high heat vapourization.

(5) Neem based pesticides have been synthesised, which are more safer than the chlorinated hydrocarbons:

Every individual has an important role for preventing pollution and improving our environment. We Eire responsible for environmental protection. Let us begin to save our environment and provide a clean earth for our future generations.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes

Tamilnadu State Board New Syllabus Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Pdf Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes Text Book Back Questions and Answers, Notes.

Tamilnadu Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes

11th Chemistry Guide Haloalkanes and Haloarenes Text Book Back Questions and Answers

Textbook Evaluation:

I. Choose the best answer:

Question 1.
The IUPAC name of Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 1 is
a) 2 – Bromo pent – 3 – ene
b) 4 – Bromo pent – 2 – ene
c) 2 – Bromo pent – 4 – ene
d) 4 – Bromo pent – 1 – ene
Answer:
b) 4 – Bromo pent – 2 – ene

Question 2.
Of the following compounds, which has the highest boiling point?
a) n – Butyl chloride
b) Isobutyl chloride
c) t – Butyl chloride
d) n – Propyl chloride
Answer:
a) n – Butyl chloride

Question 3.
Arrange the following compounds in increasing order of their density
A) CCl4
B) CHCl3
C) CH2Cl2
D) CH3Cl
a) D < C < B < A
b) C > B > A > D
c) A < B < C < D
d) C > A > B > D
Answer:
a) D < C < B < A

Question 4.
With respect to the position of – Cl in the compound CH3 – CH = CH – CH2 – Cl, it is classified as
a) Vinyl
b) Allyl
c) Secondary
d) Aralkyl
Answer:
b) Allyl

Question 5.
What should be the correct IUPAC name of diethyl chloromethane?
a) 3 – Chloro pentane
b) 1 – Chloropentane
c) 1 – Chloro – 1, 1 – diethyl methane
d) 1- Chloro-1-ethyl propane
Answer:
a) 3 – Chloro pentane

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes

Question 6.
C – X bond is strongest in
a) Chloromethane
b) Iodomethane
c) Bromomethane
d) Fluoromethane
Answer:
d) Fluoromethane

Question 7.
In the reaction Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 2 X is ______.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 3
Answer:
b) Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 4

Question 8.
Which of the following compounds will give racemic mixture on nucleophilic substitution by OH ion?
i) Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 5

ii) Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 6

iii) Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 7
a) (i)
b) (ii) and (iii)
c) (iii)
d) (i) and (ii)
Answer:
c) (iii)

Question 9.
The treatment of ethyl formate with excess of RMgX gives
a) Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 8

b) Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 9
c) R – CHO
d) R – O – R
Answer:
c) R – CHO

Question 10.
Benzene reacts with Cl2 in the presence of FeCl3 and in absence of sunlight to form
a) Chlorobenzene
b) Benzyl chloride
c) Benzal chloride
d) Benzene hexachloride
Answer:
a) Chlorobenzene

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes

Question 11.
The name of C2F4C12 is
a) Freon – 112
b) Freon – 113
c) Freon – 114
d) Freon – 115
Answer:
c) Freon – 114

Question 12.
Which of the following reagent is helpful to differentiate ethylene dichloride and ehtylidene chloride?
a) Zn / methanol
b) KQH / ethanol
c) aqueous KOH
d) ZnCl2 / Con HCl
Answer:
c) aqueous KOH

Question 13.
Match the compounds given in Column I with suitable items given in Column II:

Column I (Compound) Column II (Uses)
A. Iodoform 1. Fire extinguisher
B. Carbon tetra chloride 2. Insecticide
C. CFC 3. Antiseptic
D. DDT 4. Refrigerants

Code
a) A → 2 B → 4 C → 1 D → 3
b) A → 3 B → 2 C → 4 D → 1
c) A → 1 B → 2 C → 3 D → 4
d) A → 3 B → 1 C → 4 D → 2
Answer:
d) A → 3 B → 1 C → 4 D → 2

Question 14.
Assertion:
Inmonohaloarenes, electrophilic substitution occurs at ortho and para positions.
Reason:
Halogen atom is a ring deactivator.
Assertion and Reason type questions.
Directions:
In the following questions, a statement of assertion (A) is followed by a statement of reason (R) mark the correct choice as
(i) If both assertion and reason are true and reason is the correct explanation of assertion.
(ii) If both assertion and reason are true but reason is not the correct explanation of assertion.
(iii) If assertion is true but reason is false.
(iv) If both assertion and reason are false.
a) (i)
b) (ii)
c) (iii)
d) (iv)
Answer:
b) (ii)

Question 15.
Consider the reaction,
CH3CH2CH2Br + NaCN → CH3CH2CH2CN + NaBr This reaction will be the fastest in
a) ethanol
b) methanol
c) DMF (N, N’ – dimethyl formamide)
d) water
Answer:
c) DMF (N, N’ – dimethyl formamide)

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes

Question 16.
Freon – 12 manufactured from tetrachloro methane by
a) Wurtz reaction
b) Swarts reaction
c) Haloform reaction
d) Gattermann reaction
Answer:
b) Swarts reaction

Question 17.
The most easily hydrolysed molecules under SN1 condition is
a) allyl chloride
b) ethyl chloride
c) isopropyl chloride
d) benzyl chloride
Answer:
a) allyl chloride

Question 18.
The carbon cation formed in SN1 reaction of alkyl halide in the slow step is
a) sp3 hybridized
b) sp2 hybridized
c) sp hybridized
d) none of these
Answer:
b) sp2 hybridized

Question 19.
The major products obtained when chlorobenzene is nitrated with HNO3 and con H2SO4
a) 1 – chloro – 4 – nitrobenzene
b) 1 – chloro – 2 – nitrobenzene
c) 1 – chloro – 3 – nitrobenzene
d) 1 – chloro – 1 – nitrobenzene
Answer:
a) 1 – chloro – 4 – nitrobenzene

Question 20.
Which one of the following is most reactive towards nucleophilic substitution reaction?
a) Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 10

b) Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 11

c) Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 12

d) Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 13
Answer:
d) Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 13

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes

Question 21.
Ethylidene chloride on treatment with aqueous KOH gives
a) acetaldehyde
b) ethylene glycol
c) formaldehyde
d) glycoxal
Answer:
a) acetaldehyde

Question 22.
The raw material for Raschig process
a) chloro benzene
b) phenol
c) benzene
d) anisole
Answer:
c) benzene

Question 23.
Chloroform reacts with nitric acid to produce
a) nitro toluene
b) nitro glycerine
c) chloropicrin
d) chloropicric acid
Answer:
c) chloropicrin

Question 24.
Acetone Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 14 X, X is
a) 2 – propanol
b) 2 – methyl – 2 – propanol
c) 1 – propanol
d) acetonol
Answer:
b) 2 – methyl – 2 – propanol

Question 25.
Silverpropionate when refluxed with Bromine in carbon tetrachloride gives
a) propionic acid
b) chloroethane
c) Bromo ethane
d) chloro propane
Answer:
c) bromo ethane

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes

II. Write brief answer to the following questions:

Question 26.
Classify the following compounds in the form of alkyl, allylic, vinyl, benzylic halides.
i) CH3 – CH = CH – Cl

ii) C6H5CH2I

iii) Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 15

iv) CH2 = CH – Cl
Answer:
i) CH3 – CH = CH – Cl = Allylic halide

ii) C6H5CH2I = Benzylic halide

iii) Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 15 = Alkyl halide

iv) CH2 = CH – Cl = Vinyl halide

Question 27.
Why chlorination of methane is not possible in dark?
Answer:
The reaction of chlorine and methane is a free radical reaction under the influence of light energy. Chlorine molecule first split into two Cl atoms or radicals. These are both very reactive species in contact with methane they form methyl radical and HCl.

Methyl radical further reacts with Cl to give CH3Cl and another Cl atom thus of a chain reaction. So this reaction takes place only under the influence of light. Hence the reaction does not take place in dark condition.

Question 28.
How will you prepare n propyl iodide from n – propyl bromide?
Answer:
Finkelstein reaction,
nCH3 – CH2 – CH2 – Br + NaI Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 16 n – CH3 – CH2 – CH2 – I + NaBr
n – propyl iodide                                              n- propyl bromide

Question 29.
Which alkyl halide from the following pair is
i) chiral
ii) undergoes faster SN2 reaction?
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 17
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 18
It contains one chiral carbon atom.
2 – bromo butane undergoes SN2 mechanism faster than 1- Chloro butane.

Question 30.
How does chlorobenzene react with sodium in the presence of ether? What is the name of the reaction?
Answer:
Haloarenes react with sodium metal in dry ether, two aryl groups combine to give biaryl products.
This reaction is called fittig reaction.
C6H5Cl + 2Na + Cl – C6H5 Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 19 C6H5 – C6H5 + 2NaCl
Chlorobenzene                                      Biphenyl

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes

Question 31.
Give reasons for polarity of C – X bond in halo alkane.
Answer:
Carbon halogen bond is a polar bond as halogens are more electro negative than carbon. The carbon atom exhibits a partial positive charge (δ+) and halogen atom a partial negative charge (δ)
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 20

The C -X bond is formed by overlap of sp3 orbital of carbon atom with half-filled p- orbital of the halogen atom. The atomic size of halogen increases from fluorine to iodine, which increases the C – X bond length. Larger the size, greater is the bond length, and weaker is the bond formed. The bond strength of C – X decreases from C – F to C – I in CH3X.

Question 32.
Why is it necessary to avoid even traces of moisture during the use of Grignard reagent?
Answer:
Grignard reagents are mostly reactive and react with the source of product to give hydrocarbons. Even alcohols, amines, H2O are sufficiently acidic to convert them to corresponding hydrocarbons.
R Mg X + H2O → RH + Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 21

Due to its high reactivity, it is necessary to avoid even traces of moisture from Grignard reagent.

Question 33.
What happens when acetyl chloride is treated with an excess of CH3MgI?
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 22

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 23

Question 34.
Arrange the following alkyl halide in increasing order of bond enthalpy of RX.
CH3Br, CH3F, CH3Cl, CH3I
Answer:
The order is:
CH3I < CH3Br < CH3Cl < CH3F.

Question 35.
What happens when chloroform reacts with oxygen in the presence of sunlight?
Answer:
2 CHCl3 + O2 → 2 COCl2 + 2 HCl

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes

Question 36.
Write down the possible isomers of C5H11Br and give their IUPAC and common names.
Answer:
C5H11Br – Possible isomers
1. CH3 – CH2 – CH2 – CH2 – CH2 – Br → 1 – bromo pentane

2. Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 24 → 2 – bromo pentane

3. Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 25 → 3 – bromo pentane

4.  Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 26 → 1 – bromo 2, 2 – dimethyl propane

5. Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 27 → 1 – bromo 3 – methyl butane

6. Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 28 → 2 – bromo 3 – methyl butane

7. Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 29 → 2 – bromo 2 – methyl butane

8. Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 30 → 1 – bromo 2- methyl butane

9. Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 31 → (2S) – 1 – bromo 2 – methyl butane

10. Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 32 → (2R) – 1 – bromo 2 – methyl butane

Question 37.
Mention any three methods of preparation of haloalkanes from alcohols.
Answer:
Haloalkanes are prepared by the following methods.
1) From alcohols:
Alcohols can be converted into halo alkenes by reacting it with any one of the following reagent.
1. Hydrogen halide
2. Phosphorous halides
3. Thionyl chloride.

a) Reaction with hydrogen halide:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 33

Mixture of con. HCl and anhydrous ZnCl2 is called Lucas Reagent.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 34

The order of reactivity of halo acids with alcohol is in the order HI > HBr > HCl.
The order of reactivity of alcohols with halo acid is tertiary > secondary > primary.

b) Reaction with phosphorous halides:
Alcohols react with PX5 or PX3 to form haloalkanes.
Example:
CH3CH2OH + PCl5 → CH3CH2Cl + POCl3 + HCl
Ethane                      Chloro ethane

3CH3CH2OH + PCl3 → 3 CH3CH2Cl + H3PO3
Ethanol                       Chloro ethane

c) Reaction with Thionyl chloride(Sulphonyl Chloride)
CH3CH3OH + SOCl2 Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 35 CH3CH2Cl + SO2↑ + HCl↑
Ethanol                                      Chloro ethane

Question 38.
Compare SN1 and SN2 reaction mechanisms.
Answer:

SN1 SN2
Rate law Unimolecular (Substrate only) Biomolecular (substrate and nucleophile)
“Big Barrier” Carbocation stability Steric hindrance
Alkyl halide (electrophile) 3° > 2° > 1°  1° > 2° > 3°
Nucleophile Weak (generally neutral) Strong (generally bearing a negative charge)
Solvent Polar protic (e.g., alcohols) Polar aprotic (e.g., DMSO, acetone)
Stereo Chemistry Mix of retention and inversion inversion

Question 39.
Reagents and the conditions used in the reactions are given below. Complete the table by writing down the product and the name of the reaction.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 36
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 37

Question 40.
Discuss the aromatic nucleophilic substitutions reaction of chlorobenzene.
Answer:
The halogen of haloarenes can be substituted by OH, NH2 or CN with appropriate nucleophilic reagents at high temperature and pressure.
Example:
(i) Chlorobenzene reacts with ammonium at 250 and at 50 atm to give aniline.
C6H5Cl + 2NH3 Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 38 C6H5NH2 + NH4Cl
Chlorobenzene                  Aniline

(ii) Chlorobenzcne reacts with CuCN in presence of pyridine at 250 to give phenyl cyanide.
C6H5Cl + CuCN Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 39 C6H5CN + CuCl
Chlorobenzene                Phenyl cyanide

(iii) Dows process:
C6H5Cl + NaOH Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 40 C6H5OH + NaCl
Chlorobenzene                   Phenol
This reaction is known as Dow’s process.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes

Question 41.
Account for the following:
(i) t – butyl chloride reacts with aqueous KOH by SN1 mechanism while n – butyl chloride reacts with SN2 mechanism.
(ii) p – dichloro benzene has higher melting point than those of o – and m – dichloro benzene.
Answer:
(i) t – butyl chloride reacts with aqueous KOH by SN1 mechanism while n – butyl chloride reacts with SN2 mechanism.
It general, SN1 reaction proceeds through the formation, of carbocation, The tert- butyl chloride readily loses Cl ion to form stable 3° carbocation. Therefore, it reacts with aqueous KOH by SN1 mechanism as:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 41

On the other hand n-Butyl chloride does not undergo ionization to form n-Butyl carbocation (1°) because it is not stable. Therefore, it prefers to undergo reaction by SN2 mechanism, which occurs is one step through a transition state involving nucleophilic attack of OH ion from the backside with simultaneous expulsion of Cl ion from the front side.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 42

SN1 mechanism follows the reactivity order as 3° > 2°> 1° while SN2 mechanism follows the reactivity order as 1° > 2° > 3°. Therefore, tert-butyl chloride (3°) reacts by SN1 mechanism while n-butyl chloride (1°) reacts by SN2 mechanism. (ii) p – dichloro benzene has higher melting point than those of o – and m – dicholoro benzene. The higher melting point of p – isomer is due to its symmetry which leads to more close packing of its molecules in the crystal lattice and consequently strong intermolecular attractive force which requires more energy for melting. p – Dihalo benzene > o – Dichloro benzene> m – Dichioro benzene
Melting point: 323 K 256 K 249 K

Question 42.
In an experiment methyl iodide in ether is allowed to stand over magnesium pieces. Magnesium dissolves and product is formed.
a) Name of the product and write the equation for the reaction.
b) Why all the reagents used in the reaction should be dry? Explain.
c) How is acetone prepared from the product obtained in the experiment?
Answer:
a) Name of the product and write the equation for the reaction.
CH3I + Mg Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 43 CH3MgI

b) Why all the reagents used in the reaction should be dry? Explain.
All the reagents used in the reaction should be dry because reagent reacts with H20 to produce alkane. This is the reason that everything has to be very dry during the preparation of Grignard reagents.
CH3 – MgI + H2O → CH4 +Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 44
Methane

c) How is acetone prepared from the product obtained in the experiment?
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 45

Question 43.
Write a chemical reaction useful to prepare the following.
i) Freon – 12 from Carbon tetrachloride
ii) Carbon tetrachloride from carbon disulphide.
Answer:
i) Freon – 12 from Carbon tetrachloride:
Freon – 12 is prepared by the action of hydrogen fluoride on carbon tetrachloride in the presence of catalytic amount of antimony pentachloride.
CCl4 + 2HF Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 46 2HCl + CCl2F2
Carbon tetrachloride            Freon – 12

ii) Carbon tetrachloride from carbon disulphide.
Carbon disulphide reacts with chlorine gas in the presence of anhydrous AlCl3 as catalyst giving carbon tetra chloride.
CS2 + 3 Cl2 Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 47 CCl4 + S2Cl2
Carbon disulfide                Carbon tetrachloride

Question 44.
What are Freons? Discuss their uses and environmental effects.
Answer:
The chloro fluoro derivatives of methane and ethane are called freons.
Nomenclature:
Freon is represented as Freon – cba
Where a = number of carbon atoms – 1;
b = number of hydrogen atoms + 1
a = total number of fluorine atoms
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 48

Uses:
i) Freons are used as a refrigerants in refrigerators and air conditioners.
ii) It is used as a propellant for aerosols and foams
iii) It is used as propellant for foams to spray out deodorants, shaving creams, and insecticides.

Question 45.
Predict the products when bromo ethane is treated with the following.
i) KNO2 ii) AgNO2
Answer:
i) KNO2:
Bromo ethane reacts with alcoholic solution of NaNO2 or KNO2 to form ethyl nitrite.
CH3CH2Br + KNO2 → CH3CH2 – O – N = O + KBr
Bromoethane Ethyl nitrite

ii)AgNO2:
Bromo ethane reacts with alcoholic solution of AgNO2 to form nitro ethane.
CH3CH2Br + AgNO2 → CH3CH2 NO2 + AgBr
Bromoethane                Nitro ethane

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes

Question 46.
Explain the mechanism of SN1 reaction by highlighting the stereochemistry behind it.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 49
In SN1 reactions, if the alkyl halide is optically active, the product obtained in a racemic mixture. The intermolecular carbocation formed in slowest step being sp2 hybridised is planar species. Therefore the attack of the nucleophile OH on it, can occur from both the faces with equal case forming a mixture of two enantiomers. Thus SN1 reaction of optically active alkyl halides are accompained by racemisation.

Question 47.
Write short notes on the following.
i) Raschig process
ii) Dows process
iii) Darzen’s process
Answer:
i) Raschig process:
Chloro benzene is commercially prepared by passing a mixture of benzene vapour, air and HCl overheated cupric chloride, this reaction is called the Raschig process,
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 50

ii) Dows Process:
C6H5Cl + NaOH Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 51 C6H5OH + NaCl
This reaction is known as Dows process.

iii) Darzen’s process:
CH3CH2OH + SOCl Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 51 CH3CH2Cl + SO2↑ + HCl↑
Ethanol Chloro ethane
This reaction is known as Darzen’s process.

Question 48.
Starting from CH3MgI, How will you prepare the following?
i) Acetic acid
ii) Acetone
iii) Ethyl acetate
iv) Iso propyl alcohol
v) Methyl cyanide
Answer:
i) Acetic acid:
Solid carbon dioxide reacts with methyl magnesium iodide to form addition product which on hydrolysis yields aceti acid.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 52

ii) Acetone:
Acetyl chloride reacts with methyl magnesium iodide and followed by acid hydrolysis to give acetone.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 53

iii) Ethyl Acetate:
Ethyl chloroformate reacts with methyl magnesium iodide to form ethyl acetate.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 54

iv) Isopropyl alcohol:
Aldehydes (Acetaldehyde) other than formaldehyde, react with methyl magnesium iodide to give addition product which on hydrolysis yields isopropyl alcohol.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 55

v) Methyl cyanide:
Methyl magnesium iodide reacts with cyanogen chloride to give methyl cyanide.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 56

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes

Question 49.
Complete the following reactions.
i) CH3 – CH = CH2 + HBr Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 57
ii) CH3 – CH2 – Br + NaSH Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 58
iii) C6H5Cl + Mg Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 59
iv) CHCl3 + HNO3 Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 60
v) CCl4 + H2O Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 60
Answer :
i) CH3 – CH = CH2 + HBr Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 57 CH3 – CH2 – CH2 – Br
Propene                                                   n – propyl bromide

ii) CH3 – CH2 – Br + NaSH Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 58 CH3 – CH2 – SH + NaBr
Propyl bromide                                     Ethanethiol

iii) C6H5Cl (Chloro benzene) + Mg Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 59 C6H5MgCl (Phenyl magnesium chloride)

iv) CHCl3 + HNO3 Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 60 CCl3NO2 + H
Chloroform                               Chloropicrin

v) CCl4 (Carbon tetrachloride) + H2O Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 60COCl2 (Carbonyl chloride) + 2HCl

Question 50.
Explain the preparation of the following compounds.
i) DDT
ii) Chloroform
iii) Biphrnyl
iv) Chloropicrin
v) Freon – 12
Answer:
i) DDT:
DDT can be prepared by heating a mixture of chlorobenzene with chloral (Trichloro acetaldehyde) in the presence of con.H2SO4.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 61

ii) Chloroform:
Preparation:
Chloroform is prepared in the laboratory by the reaction between ethyl alcohol with bleaching powder followed by the distillation of the product chloroform. Bleaching powder act as a source of chlorine and calcium hydroxide. This reaction is called haloform reaction. The reaction proceeds in three steps as shown below.

Step – 1: Oxidation
CH3CH2OH + Cl2 → CH3CHO + 2HCl
Ethyl alcohol           Ethanal (Acetaldehyde)

Step – 2: Chlorination
CH3CHO + 3Cl2 → CCl3CHO + 3HCl
Acetaldehyde        Trichloro acetaldehyde

Step – 3: Hydrolysis
2CCl3CHO + Ca(OH)2 → 2CHCl3 + (HCOO)2 Ca
Chloral                         chloroform

iii) Biphenyl:
Chloro benzene react with sodium metal in dry ether, to give biphenyl. This reaction is called fitting reaction.
C6H5Cl + 2 Na + Cl – C6H5 Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 65 C6H5 – C6H5 + 2NaCl
Chloro benzene                                          Biphenyl

iv) Chloropicrin:
Chloroform reacts with nitric acid to form chloropicrin. (Trichloro nitro methane)
CHCl3 + HNO3 Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 66 CCl3NO2 + H2O
Chloroform                   Chloropicrin

v) Freon – 12
Freon – 12 is prepared by the action of hydrogen fluoride on carbon tetrachloride in the presence of catalytic amount of antimony pentachloride
CCl4 + 2 HF Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 67 2 HCl + CCl2F2
Carbon tetrachloride                     Freon – 12

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes

Question 51.
An organic compound (A) with molecular formula C2H5Cl reacts with KOH gives compounds (B) and with alcoholic KOH gives compound (C). Identify (A), (B), (C).
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 62

Question 52.
Simplest alkene (A) reacts with HCl to form compound (B). Compound (B) reacts with ammonia to form compound (C) of molecular formula C2H7N. Compound (C) undergoes carbylamine test. Identify (A),
(B) and (C).
Answer:
CH2 = CH2 + HCl → C2H5Cl
(A) Ethylene              (B) Ethyl chloride

C2H5Cl + NH3    →    C2H5NH2 + HCl
(C) Ethyl chloride      (B) Ethyl amine

Question 53.
A hydrocarbon C3H6(A) reacts with HBr to form compound (B). Compound (B) reacts with aqueous potassium hydroxide to give (C) of molecular formula C3H6O. What are the (A), (B) and (C). Explain the reactions.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 63

Question 54.
Two isomers (A) and (B) have the same molecular formula C2H4Cl2. Compound (A) reacts with aqueous KOH gives compound (C) of molecular formula C2H4O. Compound (B) reacts with aqueous KOH gives compound (D) of molecular formula C2H6O2. Identify (A), (B), (C) and (D).
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 64

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes

11th Chemistry Guide Haloalkanes and Haloarenes Additional Questions and Answers

I. Choose the best answer:

Question 1.
Which of the following is 1° alkyl halide
a) R – CH2 – X
b) R2CHX
C) R3C – X
d) R – H
Answer:
a) R – CH2 – X

Question 2.
2° halide among the following
a) isopropyl chloride
b) iso – butyl chloride
c) n – propyl chloride
d) n – butyl chloride
Answer:
a) isopropyl chloride

Question 3.
Ethylidene dibromide is
a) CH3CH2Br
b) Br – CH2 – CH2 – Br
c) CH3 – CHBr2
d) CH2 = CH Br
Answer:
c) CH3 – CHBr2

Question 4.
Which of the following is gemdihalide?
a) CH3CHBrCH2Br
b) CH3CHBr2
c) CH3CHBrCH2CH2Br
d) BrCH2CH2Br
Answer:
b) CH3CHBr2

Question 5.
Vicinal dihalide is
a) CH3CH2Br
b) Br – CH2 – CH2 – Br
c) CH3 – CHBr2
d) CH2 = CHBr
Answer:
b) Br – CH2 – CH2 – Br

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes

Question 6.
The reagent used to get alkyl halide from alcohol
a) PCl5
b) SOCl2
c) Both a and b
d) Cl2
Answer:
c) Both a and b

Question 7.
For the preparation of alkyl halides from alcohols which among the following cannot be used
a) PCl5
b) SOCl2
c) PCl3
d) NaCl
Answer:
d) NaCl

Question 8.
In the preparation of alkyl halide from alkane and halogen which of the following reaction involved
a) Electrophilic addition
b) Nucleophilic addition
c) Electrophilic substitution
d) Nucleophilic substitution
Answer:
a) Electrophilic addition

Question 9.
In the preparation of alkyl halide from alkane and halogen which of the following reaction involved
a) Free radical substitution
b) Nucleophilic addition
c) Electrophilic substitution
d) Nucleophilic substitution
Answer:
a) Free radical substitution

Question 10.
Grignard reagent is formed when alkyl halide reacts with which one of the following
a) Mg in alcohol
b) Mg in acid
c) Mg in dry ether
d) MgO
Answer:
c) Mg in dry ether

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes

Question 11.
When alkyl halide reacts with moist Ag2O gives
a) alcohol
b) ether
c) alkane
d) Alkene
Answer:
a) alcohol

Question 12.
Alkyl halide on reduction with Zn + HCl gives
a) alcohol
b) alkene
c) alkane
d) ether
Answer:
c) alkane

Question 13.
Cyanide is formed as the major product of the reaction when alkyl halide is treated with one of the following :
a) AgNO2
b) KNO2
c) AgCN
d) KCN
Answer:
c) AgCN

Question 14.
Which of the reactions are most common in alkyl halides
a) Nucleophilic addition
b) Electrophilic addition
c) Nucleophilic substitution
d) Electrophilic substitution
Answer:
c) Nucleophilic substitution

Question 15.
Treatment of ammonia with excess of ethyl chloride will yield
a) Diethyl amine
b) Ethane
c) Tetra ethyl ammonium chloride
d) methyl amine
Answer:
c) Tetra ethyl ammonium chloride

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes

Question 16.
In chloro ethane the carbon bearing halogen is bonded to ________.
a) three, primary
b) two, secondary
c) one, tertiary
d) two, primary
Answer:
d) two, primary

Question 17.
Which of the fallowing is used as refrigerant?
a) CH3COCH3
b) CCl4
c) C2H5Cl
d) CF4
Answer:
c) C2H5Cl

Question 18.
SN1reaction occurs through the intermediate formation of
a) carbocation
b) carbanion
c) free radicals
d) transition
Answer:
a) carbocation

Question 19.
The rate of SN2 reaction is maximum when the solvent is
a) Methyl alcohol
b) Water
c) Dimethyl sulphoxide
d) Benzene
Answer:
c) Dimethyl sulphoxide

Question 20.
The most reactive nucleophile among the following is
a) CH3O
b) C6H5O
c) (CH3)2CHO
d) (CH3)3CO
Answer:
a) CH3O

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes

Question 21.
The correct order of reactivity towards nucleophilic substitution reaction is
a) CH3F > CH3Cl > CH3Br > CH3I
b) CH3I > CH3Br > CH3Cl > CH3F
C) CH3I > CH3Cl > CH3Br > CH3F
d) CH3I > CH3Br > CH3F > CH3Cl
Answer:
b) CH3I > CH3Br > CH3Cl > CH3F

Question 22.
In SN2 reactions the order of reactivity of the halides.
CH3X, C2H5X , n – C3H7X, n- C4H9X is
a) CH3X > C2H5X > n – C3H7X > n – C4H9X
b) C2H5X > n – C3H7X > n – C4H9X > CH3X
c) C2H5X > n – C3H7X > n – C4H9X < CH3X
d) n – C4H9X > n – C3H7X > C2H5X > CH3X
Answer:
a) CH3X > C2H5X > n – C3H7X > n – C4H9X

Question 23.
SN2 mechanism proceeds through the formation of a
a) carbocation
b) transition state
c) free radical
d) carbanion
Answer:
b) transition state

Question 24.
In Dow’s process the starting raw material is
a) Phenol
b) Chloro benzene
c) Aniline
d) Diazobenzene
Answer:
b) Chloro benzene

Question 25.
Chloro benzene is prepared commercially by
a) Dow’s process
b) Decon’s process
c) Raschig process
d) Etard’s process
Answer:
c) Raschig process

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes

Question 26.
Chloro benzene is ________ reactive than benzene towards electrophilic substitution and directs incoming electrophile to the ______ position.
a) more, ortho & para
b) less, ortho & para
c) more, meta
d) less, meta
Answer:
b) less, ortho & para

Question 27.
The raw material for raschig; process is
a) chloro benzene
b) phenol
c) benzene
d) anisol
Answer:
c) benzene

Question 28.
Chloro benzene on treatment with sodium in dry ether gives diphenyl. The name of the reaction is
a) Fitting reaction
b) Wurtz fittig reaction
c) Wurtz reaction
d) Sandmeyer reaction
Answer:
a) Fitting reaction

Question 29.
An organic compound which produces a bluish green coloured flame on heating in the presence of copper is,
a) chloro benzene
b) benzaldehyde
c) aniline
d) benzoic acid
Answer:
a) chloro benzene

Question 30.
The raw materials for the commercial manufacture of DDT are
a) chloro benzene and chloroform
b) chloro benzene and chloro methane
c) chloro benzene and chloral
d) chloro benzene and iodoform
Answer:
c) chloro benzene and chloral

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes

Question 31.
Iodoform is used as
a) anaesthetic
b) antiseptic
c) analgesic
d) anti febrin
Answer:
b) antiseptic

Question 32.
The following is used in paint removing
a) CHCl3
b) CH2Cl2
c) CCl4
d) CH3CI
Answer:
b) CH2Cl2

Question 33.
In fire extinguishers, following is used
a) CHCl3
b) CS2
c) CCl4
d) CH2Cl2
Answer:
c) CCl4

Question 34.
The following is used for metal cleaning and finishing
a) CHCl3
b) CHI3
c) CH2Cl2
d) C6H6
Answer:
c) CH2Cl2

Question 35.
First chlorinated insecticide
a) DDT
b) Gammaxene
c) Iodoform
d) Freon
Answer:
a) DDT

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes

Question 36.
The following is used as anaesthetic
a) C2H4
b) CHCl3
c) CH2Cl2
d) DDT
Answer:
b) CHCl3

Question 37.
Freon – 12 is
a) CF3Cl
b) CHCl2F
c) CF2Cl2
d) DDT
Answer:
c) CF2Cl2

Question 38.
The name of DDT
a) p, p’ – dichloro diphenyl trichloro ethane
b) p, p’ – dichloro diphenyl trichloro ethene
C) p, p’ – dichloro diphenyl tnchloro benzene
d) p, p’ – tetra chloro ethane
Answer:
a) p, p’ – dichloro diphenyl trichloro ethane

Question 39.
Freon R – 22 is
a) CHClF2
b) CCl2F2
c) CH3Cl
d) CH2Cl2
Answer:
a) CHClF2

Question 40.
Molecular formula of DDT has
a) 5 Cl atoms
b) 4 Cl atoms
c) 3 Cl atoms
d) 2 Cl atoms
Answer:
a) 5 Cl atoms

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes

Question 41.
What is DDT among the following
a) Green house gas
b) A fertilizer
c) Bio degradable pollutant
d) Non – Bio degradable pollutant
Answer:
d) Non – Bio degradable pollutant

Question 42.
The IUPAC name of (CH3)3CHCH2Br is
a) 1 – bromo – 2 – methyl propane
b) 2 – bromo – 2 -methyl propane
c) 1 – bromo – 1 – methyl propane
d) 2 – bromo – 1 -methylpropane
Answer:
a) 1 – bromo – 2 – methyl propane

Question 43.
IUPAC name of allyl chloride is
a) 1 – chloro ethane
b) 3 – chloro- 1 – propyne
c) 3 – chloro – 1 – propene
d) 1 – chloro propane
Answer:
c) 3 – chloro – 1 – propene

Question 44.
The number of structural isomers possible with the formula C4H9Cl are
a) 5
b) 4
c) 3
d) 2
Answer:
b) 4

Question 45.
Density is highest for
a) CH3Cl
b) CH2Cl2
c) CHCl3
d) CCl4
Answer:
d) CCl4

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes

Question 46.
C2H5OH Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 68 X. In this reaction ‘X’ is
a) Ethanol
b) Ethylene chloride
c) ethylidene chloride
d) ethyl chloride
Answer:
d) ethyl chloride

Question 47.
Thionyl chloride is preferred in the preparation of chloro compound from alcohol since
a) Both the byproducts are gases and they escape out leaving product in pure state
b) It is a chlorinating agent
c) It is an oxidising agent
d) All other reagents are unstable
Answer:
a) Both the byproducts are gases and they escape out leaving product in pure state

Question 48.
The only alkene which gives primary alkyl halides on hydro halogenation
a) C2H4
b) C3H6
c) C4H8
d) C5H10
Answer:
a) C2H4

Question 49.
– OH cannot be replaced by – Cl if we use
a) PCl5
b) PCl3
c) S2Cl2
d) SOCl2
Answer:
c) S2Cl2

Question 50.
In the hydrohalogenation of ethylene for adding HCl, the catalyst used is
a) Anhydrous AlCl3
b) Conc. Sulphuric acid
c) Dilute Sulphuric acid
d) Anhydrous ZnCl2
Answer:
a) Anhydrous AlCl3

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes

Question 51.
Which one of the following has the lowest boiling point?
a) CH3Cl
b) C2H5Cl
c) C2H5Br
d) C2H5I
Answer:
a) CH3Cl

Question 52.
Chloroethane is reacted with alcoholic potassium hydroxide. The product formed is
a) C2H6O
b) C2H6
c) C2H4
d) C2H4O
Answer:
c) C2H4

Question 53.
What is X in the following reaction? C2H5Cl + X → C2H5OH + KCl
a) KHCO3
b) alc. KOH
c) aq. KOH
d) K2CO3
Answer:
c) aq. KOH

Question 54.
Which of the following acids will give maximum yield of alkyl chloride in Hunsdiecker reaction
a) CH3CH2CH2COOH
b) (CH3)2CHCOOH
c) (CH3)3CCOOH
d) C6H5CH (CH3)COOH
Answer:
a) CH3CH2CH2COOH

Question 55.
In the reaction sequence
C2H5Cl + KCN X. What is the molecular formula of X is
a) C2H5CN
b) C2H5NC
c) C2H5OH
d) C2H4O
Answer:
a) C2H5CN

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes

Question 56.
Ethyl chloride on heating with silver cyanide forms a compound X. The functional isomer of X is
a) C2H5NC
b) C2H5NCN
c) H3C – NH – CH3
d) C2H5NH2
Answer:
b) C2H5NCN

Question 57.
With Zn – Cu couple and C2H5OH, ethyl Iodide reacts to give
a) ethers
b) diethyl ether
c) Iodoform
d) Ethane
Answer:
d) Ethane

Question 58.
Ethyl bromide on boiling with alcoholic solutions of sodium hydroxide forms
a) Ethane
b) ethylene
c) ethyl alcohol
d) all of these
Answer:
b) ethylene

Question 59.
Following major compound is formed when ethyl chloride react with silver nitrite
a) Nitro ethane
b) Ethyl nitrite
c) Ethylene
d) Acetaldehyde
Answer:
b) Ethyl nitrite

Question 60.
Which of the following represents Williamson’s synthesis?
a) CH3COOH + PCl3
b) CH3 – CH2 – Cl + CH3COOH →
c) CH3 – CH2 – ONa + CH3 – CH2 – Cl →
d) CH3 – CH2 – OH + Na →
Answer:
c) CH3 – CH2 – ONa + CH3 – CH2 – Cl →

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes

Question 61.
The reaction of alkyl halide with benzene in presence of anhydrous A1Cl3 gives alkyl benzene the reaction is known as
a) Friedel – craft’s reaction
b) Carbylamine reaction
c) Gattermann reaction
d) Wurtz reaction
Answer:
a) Friedel – craft’s reaction

Question 62.
A Grignard’s reagent reacts with water to give
a) ether
b) alkanes
c) amine
d) Alcohol
Answer:
b) alkanes

Question 63.
C2H5Cl + Mg → C2H5 MgCl in this reaction the solvent is
a) C2H5OH
b) Water
c) Dry ether
d) Acetone
Answer:
c) Dry ether

Question 64.
For a nucleophilic substitution reaction the rate was found in the order RI > RBr > RCl > RF then the reaction could be
a) SN1 only
b) SN2 only
c) Either SN1 or SN2
d) Neither SN1 or SN2
Answer:
c) Either SN1 or SN2

Question 65.
SN2 reaction leads to
a) inversion of configuration
b) retention of configuration
c) partial racemisation
d) no racemisation
Answer:
a) inversion of configuration

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes

Question 66.
Which of the following alkyl halide is hydrolysed by SN1 mechanism
a) CH3Cl
b) CH3 – CH2 – Cl
c) CH3 – CH2 – CH2 – Cl
d) (CH3)3CCl
Answer:
d) (CH3)3CCl

Question 67.
SN1 reaction is favoured by
a) non – polar solvents
b) Bulky group on the carbon atom attached to the halogen atom
c) Small groups on the carbon atom attached to halogen atom
d) All of the above
Answer:
b) Bulky group on the carbon atom attached to the halogen atom

Question 68.
Which of the following is not stereospecific
a) SN1
b) SN2
c) E2
d) Addition of Br2 to ethylene in CCl4
Answer:
a) SN1

Question 69.
Which of the following factors does not favour SN1 mechanism
a) Strong base
b) Polar solvent
c) Low. conc. of nucleophile
d) 3° halide
Answer:
c) Low. conc. of nucleophile

Question 70.
The order of reactivity of various alkyl halides toward SN1 reaction is
a) 3° > 2° > 1°
b) 1° > 2° > 3°
c) 3° = 2° = 1°
d) 1° > 3° > 2°
Answer:
a) 3° > 2° > 1°

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes

Question 71.
In aryl halides carbon atom holding halogen is
a) sp2 hybridised
b) sp hybridised
c) sp3 hybndised
d) sp3d hybridised
Answer:
a) sp2 hybridised

Question 72.
Chloro benzene can be prepared by reacting benzene diazonlum chloride with
a) HCl
b) Cu2Cl2 / HCl
c) Cl2 / AlCl3
d) HNO2
Answer:
b) Cu2Cl2 / HCl

Question 73.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 69 + Cl2 Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 70 X, X is
a) Chloro benzene
b) m – dichloro benzene
c) benzene hexachioride
d) p – dichlorobenzene
Answer:
a) Chloro benzene

Question 74.
The following is an example of Sandmeyer reaction
a) C6H5N2+ Cl Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 71 C6H5Cl
b) C6H5N2+ Cl Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 72 C6H5OH
c) C6H5N2+ Cl Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 73 C6H5F
d) C6H5N2+ Cl Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 74 C6H5Cl
Answer:
a) C6H5N2+ Cl Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 71 C6H5Cl

Question 75.
Chlorobenzene on reaction with CH3Cl in presence of AlCl3 gives
a) toulene
b) m – chloro toulene
c) only o – chloro toulene
d) mixture of o – and p – chlorotoulene
Answer:
d) mixture of o – and p – chlorotoulene

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes

Question 76.
2C6H5Cl + 2Na → X, X is
a) toulene
b) biphenyl
C) phenyl ethane
d) 1 – chloro – 2 – phenyl ethane
Answer:
b) biphenyl

Question 77.
Chlorobenzene on fusing with solid NaOH gives
a) benzene
b) benzoic acid
c) phenol
d) benzene chloride
Answer:
c) phenol

Question 78.
Chlorobenzene on nitration gives major product of
a) 1 – chloro – 4 – nitro benzene
b) 1 – chloro – 3 – nitro benzene
c) 1, 4 – dinitro benzene
d) 2, 4, 6 – tri nitro benzene
Answer:
a) 1 – chloro – 4 – nitro benzene

Question 79.
The reaction C6H5I + 2 Na + CH3I → C6H5CH3 + 2 NaI is
a) Wurtz reaction
b) Fittig reaction
c) Wurtz-Fittig reaction
d) Sandmeyer reaction
Answer:
c) Wurtz-Fittig reaction

Question 80.
R – Cl + Nal Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 75 R – I + NaCl. This reaction is
a) Wurtz reaction
b) Fittig reaction
c) Finkelstein reaction
d) Frankland reaction
Answer:
c) Finkelstein reaction

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes

Question 81.
C2H5OH + SOCl2 Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 76 x + y + z. In this reaction x, y and z respectively are
a) C2H4Cl2, SO2, HCl
b) C2H5Cl, SO2, HCl
c) C2H5Cl, SOCl, HCl
d) C2H4, SO2, Cl2
Answer:
b) C2H5Cl, SO2, HCl’

Question 82.
C2H5Cl + AgOH → A + AgCl.
A + CH3COCl → C + HCl. “C” is
a) Ethyl acetate
b) Methyl acetate
c) butanone – 2
d) propanone
Answer:
a) Ethyl acetate

Question 83.
The compound (B) in the below reaction is:
C2H5Cl Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 77 A Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 78 B
a) ethylene chloride
b) acetic acid
c) propionic acid
d) ethyl cyanide
Answer:
c) propionic acid

Question 84.
Chloro ethane reacts with X to form diethyl ether. What is X?
a) NaOH
b) H2SO4
c) C2H5ONa
d) Na2S2O3
Answer:
c) C2H5ONa

Question 85.
1 – chlorobutane on reaction with alcoholic potash gives
a) 1 – butene
b) 1 – butanol
c) 1 – butyne
d) 2 – butanol
Answer:
a) 1 – butene

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes

Question 86.
Propane nitrile may be prepared by heating
a) Propyl alcohol with KCN
b) ethyl chloride with KCN
c) Propyl chloride with KCN
d) ethyl chloride with KCN
Answer:
d) ethyl chloride with KCN

Question 87.
CH3CH = CH2 Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 79 A Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 141 B, B is
a) propanol – 2
b) propanal – 1
c) propanol – 1
d) propanal – 2
Answer:
c) propanol – 1

Question 88.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 80 Y is
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 81
Answer:
c) Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 82

Question 89.
The correct order of increasing boiling points is
a) 1 – chloropropane < isopropylchloride < 1 – chlorobutane
b) isopropylchloride < 1 – chloropropane < 1 – chlorobutane
c) 1 – chlorobutane < isopropylchloride < 1 – chloropropane
d) 1 – chlorobutane < 1 – chloropropane < isopropylchloride
Answer:
b) isopropylchloride < 1 – chloropropane < 1 – chlorobutane

Question 90.
The correct order of decreasing SN2 reactivity
a) RCH2X > R2CHX > R3CX
b) RCH2X > R3CX > R2CHX
c) R2CHX > R3CX > RCH2X
d) R3CX > R2CHX > RCH2X
Answer:
a) RCH2X > R2CHX > R3CX

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes

II. Very short question and answer (2 Marks):

Question 1.
What are haloalkanes? Give example.
Answer:
Mono halogen derivatives of alkanes are called haloalkanes. Haloalkanes are represented by general formula R – X, Where, R is an alkyl group (CnH2n + 1) – and X is a halogen atom (X = F, Cl, Br or I). Haloalkanes are further classified into primary, secondary, tertiary haloalkane on the basis of type of carbon atom to which the halogen is attached.
Example:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 83

Question 2.
How will you convert methane into tetra chloro methane?
Answer:
Chlorination of methane gives different products which have differences in the boiling points. Hence, these can be separated by fractional distillation.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 84

Question 3.
What is Finkelstein reaction?
Answer:
Chloro or bromoalkane on heating with a concentrated solution of sodium iodide in dry acetone gives iodo alkanes. This reaction is called as Finkelstein reaction.
CH3CH2Br + NaI Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 85 CH3CH2I + NaI
Bromo ethane Iodoethane

Question 4.
What is Swartz reaction?
Answer:
Chloro or bromo alkanes on heating with metallic fluorides like AgF or SbF3 gives fluoro alkanes. This reaction is called Swarts reaction.
CH3CH2Br + AgF Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 86 CH3CH2F + AgBr
Bromo ethane Fluoro ethane

Question 5.
What is Hunsdiecker reaction?
Answer:
Silver salts of fatty acids when refluxed with bromine in CCl4 gives bromo alkane.
CH3CH2COOAg + Br2 Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 87 CH3CH2Br + CO2 + AgBr
Silver propionate Bromo ethane

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes

Question 6.
How is ehtyl magnesium bromide prepared from ethyl bromide?
Answer:
When a solution of ethyl bromide in ether is treated with magnesium, we get ethyl magnesium bromide.
CH3 – CH2 – Br + Mg Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 88 CH3CH2MgBr
Ethyl bromide Ethyl magnesium bromide

Question 7.
How will you convert ethyl bromide into ethyl lithium?
Answer:
Ethyl bromide reacts with active metals like sodium, lead etc in the presence of dry ether to form ethyl lithium.
CH3 CH2 Br + 2Li Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 88 CH3 CH2Li + LiBr
Ethyl bromide Ethyl Lithium

Question 8.
How is TEL prepared from ethyl bromide?
Answer:
When ethyl bromide reacts with Na / Pb alloy to give TEL.
4CH3 CH2 Br + 4Na/Pb → (CH3CH2)4Pb + 4NaBr + 3Pb
Ethyl bromide Sodium-lead alloy Tetra ethyl lead (TEL)

Question 9.
What are organic metallic compounds? Give example.
Answer:
Organo metallic compounds are organic compounds in which there is a direct carbon-metal bond
Example:
CH3 Mg I – Methyl magnesium iodide
CH3CH2Mg Br – Ethyl magnesium bromide

Question 10.
How is methane prepared from Grignard reagent?
Answer:
Compounds like water, alcohols and amines which contain active hydrogen atom react with Grignard reagents to form alkanes.
CH3MgI + HO – H → CH4 + Mg I (OH)

CH3MgI + C2H5OH         Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 86 CH4 + MgI (OC2H5)
Ethyl alcohol                Methane

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes

Question 11.
What are Haloarenes? Give a suitable example.
Answer:
Haloarenes are the compounds in which the halogen is directly attached to the benzene ring.
Example:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 89

Question 12.
How is chloro benzene prepared from benzene by direct halogenation?
Answer:
Chloro benzene is prepared by the direct chlorination of benzene in the presence of lewis acid catalyst like FeCl3.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 90

Question 13.
Write a note on Sand Meyer reaction.
Answer:
When aqueous solution of benzene diazonium chloride is warmed with Cu2Cl in HCl gives chioro benzene.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 91

Question 14.
How is Iodo benzene prepared from benzene diazonium chloride?
Answer:
Iodo benzene is prepared by warming benzene diazonium chloride with an aqueous KI solution.
C6H5N2Cl + Kl    Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 92      C6H5I + N2 + KCl
Benzene dizonium chloride        Iodo benzene

Question 15.
What happens when ethylidene dichloride is treated with Zinc dust in methanol?
Answer:
Gem dihalides and vic – dihalides on treatment with zinc dust in methanol give alkenes.
CH3 – CHCl2 + Zn Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 93 CH2 = CH2 + ZnCl2
Ethylidene dichloride                     Ethylene

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes

Question 16.
How will you convert chloroform into methylene chloride?
Answer:
a) Reduction of chloroform in the presence of Zn + HCl gives methylene chloride.
CHCl3 (chloroform) Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 94 CH2Cl (Methylene chloride) + HCl
b) Reduction of chloroform using H2/Ni
CHCl3 (chloroform) Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 95 CH2Cl2 (Methylene chloride) + HCl

Question 17.
Write the chlorination reaction of methane.
Answer:
Chlorination of methane gives methylene chloride
CH4 Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 96 CH3Cl Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 97 CH2Cl2
Methane                                               Methylene chloride

Question 18.
How is chloroform prepared from carbon tetrachloride?
Answer:
Carbon tetrachloride is reduced by iron powder in dilute HCl medium to form chloroform
CCl4 (carbon tetrachloride) + 2[H] Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 98 CHCl3 (chloroform) + HCl

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes

III. Short question and answers (3 Marks):

Question 1.
write IUPAC name of the following.
i) Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 99

ii) Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 100

iii) Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 101
Answer:
i) Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 102

ii) Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 103

iii) Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 104

Question 2.
Write the structure of the following compounds.
i) 1 – Bromo – 4 – ethyl cyclohexane
ii) 1, 4 – Dichlorobut – 2 – ene
iii) 2 – chloro – 3 – methyl pentane
Answer:
i) 1 -Bromo – 4 – ethyl cyclohexane:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 105

ii) 1, 4 – Dichlorobut – 2 – ene
– Cl – CH2 – CH = CH – CH2 – Cl

iii) 2 – chloro – 3 – methyl pentane
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 106

Question 3.
Write any three methods of preparation of chloro ethane from ethanol.
Answer:
a) Reaction with hydrogen halide:
Ethanol is heated with HCl in presence of anhydrous ZnCl2 to give ethyl chloride.
CH3CH2OH + HCl Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 107 CH3CH2Cl + H2O
Ethanol Chloroethane

b) Reaction with phosphorous halides:
Ethanol reacts with PCl5 or PCl3 it gives ethyl chloride.
CH3CH2OH + PCl5 → CH3CH2Cl + POCl3 + HCl
Ethanol                      Chloro ethane

3 CH3CH2OH + PCl3 → 3CH3CH2Cl + H 3PO3
Ethanol                        Chloro ethane

C) Reaction with thionyl chloride (Sulphonyl chloride):
When ethanol reacts with SOCl2 in presence of pyridine, it gives chloro ethane.
CH3CH2OH + SOCl2 Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 108 CH3CH2Cl + SO2 + HCl
Ethanol                                            Chloro ethane

Question 4.
What happens when haloalkane reacts with aqueous alkali or most silver oxide?
Answer:
Ethyl bromide reacts with aqueous solution of KOH or moist silver oxide (Ag2O/H2O) to form ethanol.
CH3 – CH2 – Br + KOH (aq) Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 109 CH3CH2 – OH + KBr
Bromoethane                                   Ethyl alcohol

CH3 – CH2 – Br   +   AgOH(aq)   Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 109 CH3CH2 – OH + AgBr
Bromoethane         Moist silver oxide            Ethanol

Question 5.
Explain the ammonolysis reaction of bromo ethane.
Answer:
Ethyl bromide reacts with alcoholic ammonia solution to form ethylamine.
CH3 – CH2 – Br + H – NH2 → CH3 CH2 – NH2 + HBr
Bromo ethane                        Ethyl amine

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 110
However, with excess of ethyl bromide, secondary and tertiary amines along with quaternary ammonium salts are obtained.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes

Question 6.
What happens when bromoethane reacts with alcoholic KCN and alcoholic AgCN?
Answer:
Reaction with alcoholic KCN:
Ethyl bromide reacts with alcoholic KCN solution to form ethyl cyanides.
CH3 – CH2 – Br + KCN → CH3 – CH2 – CN + KBr
Bromoethane                    Ethyl cyanide

Reaction with alcoholic AgCN:
Haloalkanes react with alcoholic AgCN solution to form alkyl isocyanide.
CH3CH2Br + AgCN → CH3CH2NC + AgBr
Bromoethane           Ethyl isocyanide

Question 7.
How are the following compounds prepared from bromo ethane?
i) Ethane thiol
(ii) Diethyl ether
Answer:
i) Ethane thiol:
Ethyl bromide reacts with sodium or potassium hydrogen sulphide to form thio alcohols.
CH3CH2Br Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 111 CH3CH2SH + NaBr
Bromo ethane                           Ethane thiol

ii) Diethyl ether:
Ethyl bromide, when boiled with sodium alkoxide gives diethyl ether. This method can be used to prepare mixed (unsymmetrical) ethers also.
CH3 – CH2Br +      NaOCH2CH3      Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 112    CH3CH2 – O – CH2CH3 + NaBr
Bromo ethane        Sodium ethoxide                 diethyl ether

Question 8.
How is ethane prepared from the following compounds?
i) Bromo ethane ii) Iodo ethane
Answer:
i) From bromo ethane:
Ethyl bromide is reduced to ethane by treating with H2 in the presence of metal catalyst like nickel, palladium etc or with hydroiodic acid in the presence of red phosphrous.
Ni(or)Pd
CH3CH2Br + H2 Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 113 CH3 – CH3 + HBr
Bromo ethane                              Ethane

ii) From iodo ethane:
Iodo ethane is reduced with H2 in presence of Red P it gives ethane.
CH3CH2I + HI Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 114 CH3 – CH3 + I2
Iodo ethane                         Ethane

Question 9.
Write the uses of carbon tetra chloride.
Answer:

  1. Carbon tetrachloride is used as dry cleaning agent.
  2. It is used as a solvent for oils, fats and waxes
  3. As the vapour of CCl4 is non-combustible, it is used under the name pyrene for extinguishing the fire in oil or petrol.

Question 10.
Write the uses of Grignard reagents.
Answer:

  1. Grignard reagents are synthetically very useful compounds. These reagents are converted to various organic compounds like alcohols, carboxylic acids, aldehydes and ketones.
  2. The alkyl group being electron rich acts as a carbanion or a nucleophile.
  3. They would attack polarized molecules at a point of low electron density. The following reactions illustrate the synthetic uses of Grignard reagent.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes

Question 11.
What is Balz – Schiemann reaction?
Answer:
Fluoro benzene is prepared by treating benzene diazonium chloride with fluoro boric acid. This reaction produces diazonium fluoroborate which on heating produces fluorobenzene. This reaction is called Balz – schiemann reaction.
C6H5N2Cl + HBF4 Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 115 C6H5N2 + BF4 Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 116 C6H5 F + BF3 + N2
Benzene diazonium chloride                                          Fluorobenzene

Question 12.
Write the uses of chloro benzene.
Answer:

  • Chloro benzene is used in the manufacture of pesticides like DDT
  • It is used as high boiling solvent in organic synthesis.
  • It is used as fibre – swelling agent in textile processing.

Question 13.
How is ethylidene dichloride prepared from
(i) Acetaldehyde
(ii) Acetylene
Answer:
i) Treating acetaldehyde with PCl5:
CH3CHO (Acetaldehyde) + PCl5 → CH3CHCl2 (Ethylidene dichloride) + POCl

ii) Adding hydrogen chloride to acetylene
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 117

Question 14.
How is ethylene dichloride prepared from (i) Chloride (ii) PCl5?
Answer:
i) Addition of chlorine to ethylene
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 118

ii) Action of PCl5 (or HCl) on ethylene glycol

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 119

Question 15.
What happens when the following compounds are treated with alcoholic KOH?
i) Ethylidene dichloride
ii) Ethylene dichloride
Answer:
i) Ethylidene dichloride:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 120

ii) Ethylene dichloride:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 121

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes

Question 16.
Write the uses of methylene chloride.
Answer:
Methylene chloride is used as

  1. aerosol spray propellant
  2. solvent in paint remover
  3. process solvent in the manufacture of drugs
  4. a metal cleaning solvent

Question 17.
How are the following compounds prepared from chlorobenzene?
i) Benzene
ii) Phenyl magnesium chloride
Answer:
i) C6H6 (Benzene):
Chlorbenzene undergoes reduction with Ni – Al alloy in the presence of NaOH gives benzene.
C6H5Cl + 2(H) Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 122 C6H6 + HCl
Chloro benzene              Benzeneide

ii) Phenyl Magnesium chloride:
Chloro benzene reacts with magnesium to form phenyl magnesium chloride in tetra hydrofuran (THF).
C6H5Cl (Chloro benzene) + Mg Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 123 C6H5MgCl (Phenyl magnesium chloride)

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes

IV. Long question and answers (5 Marks):

Question 1.
Explain the SN2 mechanism of haloalkanes with suitable example.
Answer:
S2 stands for bimolecular nucleophilic substitution
“S” stands for substitution
“N” stands for nucleophilic
“2” stands for bimolecular (two molecules are involved in the rate determining step)
The rate of SN2 reaction depends upon the concentration of both alkyl halide and the nucleophile.
Rate of reaction = k2 [alkyihalide] [nucleophile]
This SN2 reaction follows second order kinetics and occurs in one step.

This reaction involves the formation of a transition state in which both the reactant molecules are partially bonded to each other. The attack of nucleophile occurs from the back side and the halide ion leaves from the front side. The carbon at which substitution ocurs ha inverted configuration during the course of reaction just as an umbrella has tendency to invert in a wind storm. This inversion of configuration is called Walden inversion; after paul walden who first discovered the inversion of configuration of a compound in SN2 reaction.

We understand SN2 reaction mechanism by taking an example of reaction between chloromethane and aqueous KOH. SN2 reaction of an optically active haloalkane is always accompanied by inversion of configuration at the asymmetric centre.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 124

 

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes

Question 2.
Explain the SN1 mechanism of haloalkanes with suitable examples.
Answer:
SN1 stands for unimolecular nucleophilic substitution
‘S’ stands for substitution
‘N’ stands for nucleophilic
‘1’ stands for unimolecular (one molecule is involved in the rate determining step)
The rate of the following SN1 reaction depends upon the concentration of aikyl halide (RX) and is independent of the concentration of the nucleophile (OH-).
Rate of the reaction = k[alkyl halide]
R – Cl + OH → R – OH + Cl
This SN1 reaction follows first order kinetics and occurs in two steps.
We understand SN1 reaction mechanism by taking a reaction between tertiary hutyl bromide with aqueous KOH.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 125

This reaction takes place in two steps aas shown below.

Step – 1:
Formation of carbocation:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 126
t – butyl bromide

The polar C – Br bond breaks forming a carbocation and bromide ion. This step is slow and hence it is the rate determining step.

Step 2:
Nucleophilic attack on carbocation
The carbocation immediately reacts with the nucleophile. This step is fast and hence does not affect the rate of the reactions.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 127

As shown above, the nucleophilic reagent OH~ can attack carbocation from both the sides, they will be mirror image of each other.

In the above example the substrate tert-butyl bromide is not optically active, hence the obtained product is optically inactive. If halo alkane substrate is optically active then, the product obtained will be optically inactive racemic mixture. As nucleophilic reagent OH- can attack carbocation from both the sides, to form equal proportion of dextro and levorotatory optically active isomers which form optically inactive racemic mixture.

Example :
Hydrolysis of optically active 2- bromo butane gives racemic mixture of ±butan-2-ol.

Question 3.
Explain the E2 reaction mechanism with suitable example.
Answer:
E2 stands for bimolecular elimination reaction
‘E’ stands for elimination
‘2’ stands for bimolecular
The rate of E2 reaction depends on the concentration of alkyl halide and base

Rate = k2 [alkyl halide] [base]
It is therefore, a second-order reaction generally primary alkyl halide undergoes this reaction in the presence of alcoholic KOH. E2 is a one-step process in which the abstraction of the proton from the p carbon and expulsion of halide from the carbon occurs simultaneously. The mechanism is shown below.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 128

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes

Question 4.
Explain the E1 reaction mechanism with suitable example.
Answer:
E1 stands for unimolecular elimination reaction
‘E’ stands for elimination ‘1’ stands for unimolecular
The rate of E1 reaction depends on the concentration of alkyl halide only and hence
rate = k [alkyl halide]
Generally, tertiary alkyl halide which undergoes elimination reaction by this mechanism in the presence of alcoholic KOH following first order kinetics is a two step process. The mechanism is shown by taking following example.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 129

step – 1:
Heterolytic fission to yield a carbocation:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 130

Step – 2:
Elimination of a proton from the β – carbon to produce an alkene:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 131

Question 5.
How are the following compounds prepared from Methyl magnesium iodide?
(i) Ethanol
(ii) Tert-butyl alcohol
(iii) Acetaldehyde
Answer:
(i) Ethanol:
Formaldehyde reacts with methyl magnesium iodide to give addition products which on hydrolysis yield ethanol.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 132

(ii) Tert-butyl alcohol:
Acetone reacts with methyl magnesium iodide to give an additional product which on hydrolysis yields tert butyl alcohol.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 133

(iii) Acetaldehyde:
Ethyl formate reacts with methyl magnesium iodide and followed by acid hydrolysis, it forms Acetaldehyde.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 134

Question 6.
How is ethylene dichloride converted into
i) Acetaldehyde
ii) Ethylene glycol
ii) Ethylene
Answer:
i) Acetaldehyde:
(Hydrolysis with aqueous NaOH or KOH)
Ethylidene chloride reacts with aqueous KOH to give acetaldehyde.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 135

ii) Ethylene glycol :
Ethylene chloride reacts with aqueous KOH, it gives glycol.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 136

iii) Ethylene:
Ethylene dichloride is heated with Zinc in presence of methanol gives ehtylene.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 137

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes

Question 7.
How are the following compounds prepared from chloroform?
(i) Phosgene
(ii) Methylene chloride
(iii) Methyl isocyanide
Answer:
(i) Phosgene:
Chloroform undergoes oxidation in the presence of light and air to form phosgene (carbonyl chloride)
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 138
Since phosgene is very poisonous, its presence makes chloroform unfit for use as an anaesthetic.

(ii) Methylene chloride:
Chloroform undergoes reduction with zinc and HCl in the presence of ethyl alcohol to form methylene chloride.
CHCl3 (Chloroform) + 2(H) Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 139 CH2Cl2 (Methylene chloride)+ Cl2

(iii) Methyl isocyanide:
Chloroform reacts with aliphatic or aromatic primary amine and alcoholic caustic potash, to give foul-smelling alkyl isocyanide (carbylamines).
CH3NH2     +     CHCl2 + 3KOH → CH3NC + 3KCl + 3H2O
Methylamine Chloroform          Methyl isocyanide

Question 8.
Discuss the aromatic electrophilic substitutions reaction of chlorobenzene.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 14 Haloalkanes and Haloarenes 140

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Tamilnadu State Board New Syllabus Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Pdf Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology Text Book Back Questions and Answers, Notes.

Tamilnadu Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

11th Bio Zoology Guide Trends in Economic Zoology Text Book Back Questions and Answers

Part I

Question 1.
Which one of the following is not related to vermiculture?
a) Maintains soil fertility
b) Break down of inorganic matter
c) Gives porosity, aeration and moister holding capacity
d) Degradation of non biodegradable solid waste

a) a and b is correct
b) c and d is correct
c) b and d is not correct
d) a and c is not correct
Answer:
c) b and d is not correct

Question 2.
Which one of the following is not an endemic species of earthworm?
a) Perionyx
b) Lampito
c) Eudrillus
d) Octochaetona
Answer:
c) Eudrillus

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 3.
Match the following
1) Bombyxmori-
a) Champa – I) Muga
2) Antheraeaassamensis
b) Mulberry – II) Eri
3) Antheraeamylitta-
c) Arjun – III) Tassar
4) Attacus ricini –
d) Castor – IV) Mulberry

Select the correct one
a) 1-b-IV
b) 2-a-I
c) 3-c -III
d) 4-d-II
Answer:
c) 3-c -III

Question 4.
Silk is obtained from
a) Laccifer lacca
b) Nosema bombycis
c) Attacus ricird
d) Attacus mylitta
Answer:
c) Attacus ricird

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 5.
Assertion: Nuptial flight is a unique flight taken by the queen bee followed by serveral drones.
Reason: The queen bee produces a chemical substance called pheromone. The drones in that area are attracted to the pheromone and then mating takes place.
a) Assertion and reason is correct but not related
b) Assertion and reason is incorrect but related
c) Assertion and reason is correct but related
d) Assertion and reason is incorrect but not related
Answer:
c) Assertion and reason is correct but related

Question 6.
Rearing of honey bee is called
a) Sericulture
b) Lac culture
c) Vermiculture
d) Apiculture
Answer:
d) Apiculture

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 7.
Which of the statement regarding Lac insect
a) A microscopic, resinous crawling scale insect
b) Inserts its proboscis into plant tissue suck juices and grows
c) Secretes lac from the hind end of body.
d) The male lac insect is responsible for large scale production of lac.
Answer:
d) The male lac insect is responsible for large scale production of lac.

Question 8.
Aquaponics is a technique which is
a) A combination of aquaculture and fish culture
b) A combination of aquaculture and hydroponics
c) A combination of vermiculture and hydroponics
d) A combination of aquaculture and prawn culture
Answer:
b) A combination of aquaculture and hydroponics

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 9.
Prawn belongs to the class
a) Crustacea
b) Annelida
c) Coelenterata
d) Echinodermata
Answer:
a) Crustacea

Question 10.
Pearl oyster belongs to the class
a) Gastropoda
b) Cephalopoda
c) Scaphapoda
d) Pelecypoda
Answer:
d) Pelecypoda

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 11.
Inland fisheries are
a) deep sea fishing
b) capturing fishes from sea coast
c) Raising and capturing fishes in fresh water
d) oil extraction from fish
Answer:
c) Raising and capturing fishes in fresh water

Question 12.
Induced breeding technique is used in
a) Marine fishery
b) Capture fishery
c) Culture fishery
d) Inland fishery
Answer:
d) Inland fishery

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 13.
Isinglass is used in
a) Preparation
b) Clearing of wines
c) Distillation of wines
d) Preservation of wines
Answer:
b) Clearing of wines

Question 14.
Animal husbandry is the science of rearing, feeding and caring, breeding and disease control of animals. It ensures supply of proper nutrition to our growing population through activities like increased production and improvement of animal products like milk, eggs, meat, honey etc.
a) Poultry production depends upon the photoperiod. Discuss
b) Polyculture of fishes is of great importance.
Answer:
a) Poultry production depends upon the photoperiod:

  • The photoperiod stimulates the growth and breeding of birds.
  • It increases the life span of birds
  • As it increases the metabolic rate the egg-laying fowl’s wifi lay more eggs.
  • The light induces the endocrine glands and increases hormone secretion.
  • The light intensity depends on its wavelengths.

b) Polyculture of fishes is of great importance:

  • In polyculture, fishes will not fight for food.
  • No deficiency of oxygen.
  • In this culture the upper layer fishes feeds on phy to and zooplanktons the middle layer fishes feeds on
  • submerged plants and fishes lives in the deeper layers feeds on bottom dwellers debris of plants and animals.
  • In polyculture the fishes use the maximum food to convert it into meat.
  • Fishes have high growth rate in short periods.
    Eg.: Catlacatla, cirrhinus mrigla labeorohita are cultured through polyculture.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 15.
Assertion: The best quality of pearl is known as lingha pearl and obtained from marine oysters.
Reason: Nacre is secreted continuously by the epithelial layer of the mantle and deposited around the foreign particle
a) Assertion is true Reason is false
b) Assertion and Reason is false
c) Asserion is false but Reason is true
d) Assertion and Reason are true
Answer:
d) Assertion and Reason are true

Question 16.
Choose the correctly matched pair
a) Egg layers-Brahma
c) Dual purpose-White plymouth rock
b) Broiler types -Leghorn
d) Ornamental breeds -Silkie
Answer:
d) Ornamental breeds -Silkie

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 17.
Write the advantages of vermicomposting.
Answer:

  1. Vermicomposting provides excellent organic manure for sustainable agro-practices.
  2. Marketing of vermicompost can provide a supplementary income.
  3. Vermicompost is rich in essential plant nutrients.
  4. It improves soil structure, texture, aeration, and water holding capacity and prevents soil erosion.
  5. It is rich in nutrients and an eco-friendly amendment to soil for farming and terrace gardening,
  6. It enhances seed germination and ensures good plant growth.

Question 18.
Name the three castes in a honey bee colony.
Answer:

  1. Queen bee
  2. Drone
  3. Worker bee

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 19.
Name the following

  1. The largest bee in the colony:
  2. The kind of flight which the new virgin queen takes along with the drones out of the hive:

Answer:

  1. The largest bee in the colony – The queen bee
  2. The kind of flight which the new virgin queen takes along with the drones out of the hive – Nuptial flight.

Question 20.
What are the main duties of a worker bee?
Answer:
Each worker has to perform different types of work in her lifetime. During the first half of her life, she becomes a nurse bee attending to indoor duties such as secretion of royal jelly, prepares bee- bread to feed the larvae, feeds the queen, takes care of the queen and drones, secretes beeswax, builds combs, cleans and fans the beehive. Then she becomes a soldier and guards the beehive. In the second half of her life lasting for three weeks, she searches and gathers the pollen, nectar, propolis, and water.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 21.
What happens to the drones after the mating flight?
Answer:
The drones are attracted to the pheromones of the queen bee and mating taking place The drone dies after copulation

Question 22.
Give the economic importance of silkworm?
Answer:

  1. Rearing of silkworm on a commercial scale is called sericulture.
  2. It is an agro-based industry comprising of
    • Cultivation of food plants for the silkworms.
    • Rearing of silkworms.
    • Reeling and spinning of silk.
  3. Silk fibres are utilized in preparing silk clothes.
  4. Silk is used in industries and for military purposes.
  5. Silk is used in the manufacture of fishing fibres, parachutes, cartridge bags, insulation coils for telephone, wireless receivers, tyres of racing cars, filter fibres, in medical dressings and suture materials.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 23.
What are the nutritive values of fishes?
Answer:

  • Fishes form a rich source of protein food.
  • It is a good stable food to tide over the nutritional needs of man.
  • Fish species such as sardines mackeral, tuna herrings have high amino acid concentrations.
  • They have histidine which is responsible for the meaty flavor of the flesh.
  • It is rich in omega 3 fatty acids.
  • Minerals such as calcium magnesium phosphorus potassium iron-manganese iodine and copper is present in fishes.

Question 24.
Give the economic importance of prawn fishery?
Answer:
The flesh of prawns is palatable and rich in glycogen, a protein with low-fat content.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 25.
Give the economic importance of lac insect.
Answer:

  • Lac is used as a sealing wax and adhesive for optical instruments.
  • It is a good insulator.
  • It is used in the preparations of shoe and leather polishes and as a protective coating of wood.
  • It is used in laminating paper board photographs, plastic moulded articles.
  • Used as a filling material for gold ornaments.

Question 26.
List any three common uses of shellac.
Answer:

  1. Shellac with denatured alcohol is used to remove dust on the walls.
  2. Coating of metals with shellac prevents rusting.
  3. Shellac coating on citrus fruits increases their shelf life.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 27.
Name any two trees on which lac insect grows?
Answer:

  1. Acacia catechu
  2. Acacia nilotica

Question 28.
What is seed lac?
Answer:
The lac after grinding the dust particles are removed. The resultant lac is called ‘seed lac’.

Question 29.
Define cross-breeding?
Answer:
Breeding between a superior male of one breed with a superior female of another breed is known as cross-breeding.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 30.
What are the advantages of artificial insemination?
Answer:

  • It increases the rate of conception.
  • It avoids genital diseases.
  • Semen can be collected from injured bulls which have desirable traits.
  • Superior animals located apart can be bred successfully.

Question 31.
Discuss the various techniques adopted in cattle breeding?
Answer:
There are two methods of animal breeding, namely inbreeding and outbreeding.
1. Inbreeding:
Breeding between animals of the same breed for 4-6 generations is called inbreeding.

2. Outbreeding:
The breeding between unrelated animals is called outbreeding. It is done in three ways;

  • Outcrossing: It is the breeding between unrelated animals of the same breed but having no common ancestry. The offspring of such a cross is called an outcross.
  • Crossbreeding: Breeding between a superior male of one breed with a superior female of another breed. The cross-bred progeny has superior traits (hybrid vigour or heterosis).
  • Interspecific hybridization: In this method of breeding mating is between male and females of two different species.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 32.
Mention the advantages of MOET.
Answer:
The advantage of this technology is to produce high milk-yielding females and high-quality meat-yielding bulls in a short time.

Question 33.
Write the peculiar characters of the duck.
Answer:
The peculiarity of ducks:
The ducks body is fully covered with oily feathers. They have a layer of fat under their skin which prevents it from getting wet. They lay eggs at night or in the morning. The ducks feed on rice bran, kitchen wastes, waste fish, and snails.

Part – II

11th Bio Zoology Guide Trends in Economic Zoology Additional Important Questions and Answers

I. Choose The Best Options

Question 1.
What is the primary use of earthworm?
a) Vermicompost
b) Increase the agriculture
c) To increase the fish culture
d) All the above
Answer:
a) Vermicompost

Question 2.
Who has proposed the term vermi tech?
a) Sultan Ismail
b) Darwin
c) Linnaeus
d) Albert William
Answer:
a) Sultan Ismail

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 3.
……………………. are the biological indicators of soil fertility?
a) Vermicast
b) Earthworm
c) Vermi excreta
d) Vermicompost
Answer:
b) Earthworm

Question 4.
Which of the following is the earthworm of the native soil?
a) Periyonx Eisenia
b) Eudrilus eugeniae lampito mauritii
c) Periyonyx excavatus, octohaetona
d) all the above
Answer:
c) Periyonyx excavates, octohaetona

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 5.
Which is called commercial fibre?
a) Silk fibre
b) Nylon fibre
c) Cofton fibre
d) Jute fibre
Answer:
a) Silk fibre

Question 6.
Who has known the utility of silk even before 3000 years?
a) Europe
b) African’s
c) China
d) India
Answer:
c) China

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 7.
…………………… More than countries in the world are practicing sericulture?
a) 29
b) 40
c) 10
d) 15
Answer:
a) 29

Question 8.
Match and find the correct sequences.
I. Bombyx mori – a) Erisilk
II. Antheraea assamensis – b) Tisaarsilk
III. Antheraea mylitta – c) Mugasilk
IV. Attacus ricini – d) Mulberry silk
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology 1
Answer:
a) I – d, II – c, III – b, IV – a

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 9.
Match the silk moth with their respective leaves.
I. Bombyx mori – a) Castor
II. Antheraea assamensis – b) Arjun
III. Antheraea mylitta – c) Champa
IV. Attacus ricini – d) Mulberry
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology 2
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology 3
Answer:
a) I -d, II – c, III – b, IV – a

Question 10.
Find the unrelated pair regarding the silk production and its states.
a) Karnataka – Mulberry silk
b) Manipur – Muga silk
c) West bengal – Tasar silk
d) Arunachala pradesh – Muga silk
Answer:
d) Arunachala pradesh – Muga silk

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 11.
Name the branches that involve agriculture and industry.
a) Vermiculture
b) Pisciculture
c) Sericulture
d) Poultry
Answer:
c) Sericulture

Question 12.
Life span of Bombyxmori
a) 2-3 days
b) 2 – 4 days
c) 2-5 days
d) 4 – 7 days
Answer:
a) 2 – 3 days

Question 13.
What is the number of eggs laid by Bombyx mori once?
a) 500 – 800
b) 400 – 500
c) 400 – 450
d) 600-700
Answer:
b) 400 – 500

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 14.
What is the length of matured silkworm?
a) 7.5 cm
b) 7cm
c) 8.5 cm
d) 8 cm
Answer:
a) 7.5 cm

Question 15.
What would be the length of silk fibre in a cocoon?
a) 1000-1100 m
b) 1000-1200 m
c) 1000-1500m
d) 1000 – 1300m
Answer:
b) 1000 – 1200m

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 16.
What is meant by mariculture?
a) Rearing of mulberry plants
b) Rearing of castor plants
c) Vermiculture
d) Apiculture
Answer:
a) Rearing of mulberry plants

Question 17.
What is meant by voltinism?
a) No of broods raised
b) Cocoon
c) Spinneret
d) None of the above
Answer:
a) No of broods raised

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 18.
What is the ideal period for mulberry culture?
a) January, February, and November, December
b) March, April and June, July
c) June, July, and Nov, December
d) October, November and December, January
Answer:
c) June, July, and November, December

Question 19.
Find the odd one out.
a) Healthy silk moths are allowed to mate for 4 hours
b) Female lays about 400 eggs in 24 hours
c) The small larvae hatch between 7-10 days after incubation
d) The optimum temperature for rearing silk moth is 25°C – 30°C
Answer:
d) The optimum temperature for rearing silk moth is 25°C – 30°C

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 20.
Silkmoth matured in about days
a) 40 days
b) 45 days
c) 50 days
d) 35 days
Answer:
b) 4 5 days

Question 21.
The cocoon is soaked in hot water in temperature for minutes.
a) 95°C – 97°C -10 -15 minute
b) 95°C – 97°C – 5 -10 minutes
c) 90°C – 95°C – 7 -10 minutes
d) 100°C – 105°C – 2 – 5 minutes
Answer:
a) 95°C – 97°C -10 -15 minute

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 22.
The areas where a lot of beehives can be placed.
a) Honey culture
b) Apiculture
c) Apiaries
d) all the above
Answer:
c) apiaries

Question 23.
The nectar got from the flowers is converted into honey by the enzyme.
a) Invertase
b) Zymase
c) Lipase
d) None of the above
Answer:
a) Invertase

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 24.
Find whether the following is true or false and find the correct sequence.
I) There is only one queen bee in a colony
II) Worker bees are around 5000 – 10000
III) The queen bee in its lifetime in 2 – 4 years lays 20 lakhs eggs.
IV) When the queen loses its fertility another worker bee becomes a queen by taking royal Jelly.
a) I – true, II – False, III – False, IV – true
b) I – true, II – False, III – true, IV – True
c) I – false, II – true, III – true, IV – true
d) I – false, II – true, III – false, IV – false
Answer:
a) I – true, II – false, III -false, IV – true.

Question 25.
How many days are needed for the worker bee to becoming mature done?
a) 15 days
b) 21 days
c) 20 days
d) 18 days
Answer:
b) 21 days

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 26.
What is the life span of a worker bees?
a) 6 weeks
b) 5 weeks
c) 7 weeks
d) 3 weeks
Answer:
a) 6 weeks

Question 27.
What are drones?
a) a male bee from unfertilised egg
b) a female bee from fertilised egg
c) a queen bee from fertilised egg
d) a worker bee after eating royal jelly becomes a queen
Answer:
a) a male bee from unfertilised egg

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 28.
Find the wrong pair?
a) Drone cell – Comb queen bee
b) King of honeycomb – Drone
c) Swarming – Worker bee flying with the queen bee
d) Male bee – After mating it will die
Answer:
a) Drone cell – Comb queen bee

Question 29.
Read the following statement and find the correct sequence.
I) The honeycomb is built from the abdominal secretion of a worker bee
II) The chamber of the honeycomb are hexagonal in shape
III) The young stages of honey bees accommodate the lower and central cells of the hive
IV) In Apis dorsata the brood of hive cells are similar in size and shape
a) I – false, II – false, III – true, IV – true
b) I – true, II – true, III – false, IV – false
c) I – true, II – true, III – true, IV – true
d) I – false, II – true, III – true, IV – false
Answer:
c) I – true, II – true, III – true, IV – true

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 30.
Assertion A: The pure wax is white in colour.
Reason: B The pure wax contains carotenoids pigments.
a) Assertion A true Reason B true
b) Assertion A false, Reason B false
c) Assertion A true Reason B false
d) Assertion A false, Reason B true
Answer:
c) Assertion A true Reason B false.

Question 31.
Find the correct sequence in the following.
I) Bee wax is secreted by the abdomen of the worker bees.
II) The resinous chemical substance present in the wax is called propolis.
III) The pure wax is white in colour.
IV) The yellow of the wax is due to the carotenoid pigments.
a) I – true, II – true, III – true, IV – false
b) I – false, II – false, III – true, IV – true
c) I – true, II – false, III – true, IV – true
d) I – true, II – true, III – true, IV – true
Answer:
d) I – true, II – true, III – true, IV – true

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 32.
Find whether the statement regarding Lac insect is true or false
I) Tachardia lacca produces lac.
II) The Lac insect is a parasite on host plant karanagalli, karuvelai
III) The female lac insects are small
IV) The female lac insects after fertilisation lays about 200 to 500 eggs
a) I – true, II – false, III – false, IV – true
b) I – true, II – true, III – true, IV – false
c) I – true, II – true, III – false, IV – true
d) I – true, II – false, III – true, IV – false
Answer:
c) I – true, II – true, III – false, IV – true

Question 33.
What is the ideal salinity for fish culture in brackish water?
a) 0.5-30ppt
b) 0.1-25ppt
c) 0.1-30ppt
d) 1-10ppt
Answer:
a) 0.5 – 30 ppt

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 34.
Which one of the following is correct pair?
a) Exotic breed – cyprinus carpiols
b) Apiculture – Reeling
c) Seri culture – Propolis
d) Milch breed – Malvi
Answer:
a) Exotic breed – cyprinus Carpio

Question 35.
Name the exotic fishes of India.
a) Catlacatla
b) Lapeorohita
c) Cirrhina mirgala
d) Cyprinus carbeo
Answer:
d) Cyprinus carbeo

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 36.
Name the vitamin found in fishoil?
a) A and E
b) A and D
c) A and C
d) A and K
Answer:
b) A and D

Question 37.
Ising glass is received from the part of the fish
a) Dried gills
b) Dried stomach
c) Dried air sacs
d) Dried liver
Answer:
c) Dried air sacs

Question 38.
What is the nutritive value of crustaceans?
a) Rich in glycogen protein with low-fat content
b) Rich in protein low in glycogen
c) Rich in glycogen low in fat content
d) Rich in protein and fat
Answer:
a) Rich in glycogen protein with low-fat content

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 39.
These are freshwater prawns.
a) Penaeus indicus
b) Macrobrachium rosenbergi
c) Penaeus monodon
d) Metapenaeus
Answer:
b) Macrobrochium rosenbergi

Question 40.
What is the optimum temperature and PH for prawn culture in a hatching tank
a) 24°C – 30°C PH – 7 – 8
b) 20°C – 22°C PH -10 -12
c) 20°C – 23°C PH – 5 – 6
d) 19°C – 20°C PH – 9 -10
Answer:
a) 24°C – 30°C – PH – 7 – 8

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 41.
Find the correct statement regarding the preparations of prawn form.
I) For algal growth, and for the subsequent stocking of prawns it is essential to drain off the water and sundry the bottom.
II) Lime should be applied to absorb excess C02 and to supply calcium which is required for moulting.
III) Fertilizers like rice, bran, poultry and cattle dung are used to increase the fertility of the soil.
IV) Preservation of prawns is done by peeling and deveining or by cooking and peeling
a) I – true, II – true, III – false, IV – false
b) I – false, II – true, III – true, IV – true
c) I – true, II – true, III – true, IV – true
d) I – true, II – false, III – true, IV – false
Answer:
c) I – true, II – true, III -true, IV – true

Question 42.
Where is pearl cultured in India for the first time?
a) Thoothukudi 1973
b) Visahapattinum 1974
c) Rameshwaram 1975
d) Kulchall973
Answer:
a) Thoothukudi 1973

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 43.
Where are pearl oysters seen?
a) Kanyakumari coastal region a Bay of Kutch
b) Rameshwaram coastal area and Bay of Mannar
c) Nagapatinum coastal area and Thoothukudi
d) Visahapatinum coastal area and Chennai
Answer:
a) Kanyakumari coastal region a Bay of Kutch

Question 44.
The pearl oysters belongs to ‘L’ genus produce Quality pearls.
a) Gastropoda
b) Pinctata
c) Pelecypoda
d) Cephalopoda
Answer:
b) Pinctata

Question 45.
……………………….. ulturing pearl in freshwater.
a) Lamellidens
b) Mytilus
c) Loligo
d) Dentalium
Answer:
a) Lamellidens

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 46.
The marine oysters are composed of
a) Calcium carbonate
b) Sodium carbonate
c) Potassium carbonate
d) Magnesium carbonate
Answer:
a) Calcium carbonate

Question 47.
The process of killing the silkworm cocoons is called
a) Reeling
b) Stifling
c) Spinning
d) rearing
Answer:
b) Stifling

Question 48.
Assertion A: The pearl oysters got from the sea are valuable
Reason B: The pearl oysters got from freshwater is not valuable
a) Assertion A true, B false
b) Assertion A and B reason all true
c) Assertion A false, Reason B true
d) Assertion A and Bare false
Answer:
b) Assertion A and B reason all true

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 49.
What is the name of the breed that produces mule?
a) Outbreeding
b) Crossbreeding
c) Interspecific hybridization
d) Outbreeding
Answer:
c) Interspecific hybridization

Question 50.
Assertion X: 6 – 8 eggs can be produced by induction in an artificial method
Reason Y: The embryos at 8 – 32 celled stages are transferred to a surrogate mother.
a) Assertion x false y true
b) Assertion X true, Y false
c) Assertion X false, Y false
d) Assertion X and Y are true
Answer:
d) Assertion X and Y are true

Question 51.
Which of the cattle breed yields more milk than what they eat?
a) Vechur
b) Kankeyem
c) Gir
d) Ongole
Answer:
a) Vechur

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 52.
Which of the following is not a milch breed?
a) Sindhi
b) Malvi
c) Jersey
d) Gir
Answer:
b) Malvi

Question 53.
Which of the following belongs to America?
a) Silkie
b) White Plymouth rock
c) Chittagong
d) Aseel
Answer:
b) White Plymouth rock

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 54.
Name the poultry which is noted for its pugnacity?
a) Leghorn
b) Silkie
c) Brahma
d) Aseel
Answer:
d) Aseel

Question 55.
Find the odd one out
a) Leghorn – Italy
b) Chittagong – good egg yielder
c) White Plymouth rock – American breed
d) Aseel-ornamental breed
Answer:
d) Aseel – ornamental breed

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 56.
Which among the following is a wild duck?
a) Syhlet
b) Muscori
c) Pekin
d) Mallard
Answer:
d) Mallard

Question 57.
Find the wrong statement about Duck.
a) The body is covered with oily feathers.
b) The fat layer beneath their skin prevents it from getting wet
c) They lay eggs at mid-day
d) The ducks feed on rice bran kitchen wastes and snails
Answer:
c) They lay eggs at midday

(2 marks)

II. Very Short Answer

Question 1.
What is Economic Zoology?
Answer:
Economic zoology is a branch of science that deals with economically useful animals. It involves the study of the application of animals for human welfare.

Question 2.
How are animals classified on the basis of their economic importance?
Answer:

  • Animals for food and food products.
  • Economically beneficial animals.
  • Animals of aesthetic importance.
  • Animals for scientific research.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 3.
Name the endemic earthworms of India.
Answer:

  1. Periy ony x excavatus
  2. Lampito Mauritius
  3. Octo chactona serrata

Question 4.
Name the exotic species of an earthworm?
Answer:

  • Eiseniafetida,
  • Eudrilus eugeniae

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 5.
Why are earthworms called ‘friends of farmers’?
Answer:
Earthworms play a vital role in maintaining soil fertility. Hence, they are called ‘friends of farmers’.

Question 6.
What decides the economic success of the industries?
Answer:

  • It depends on the animals and their products.
  • It depends on the proper production management and development of the next generation of farm animals.

Question 7.
What is meant by vermiculture?
Answer:
It is the process of using earthworm to decompose organic food waste into a nutrient-rich material capable of supplying necessary nutrients which help to sustain plant growth.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 8.
What is meant by vermicast?
Answer:
The organic matter of soil is decomposed by earthworm and becomes nutritious rich manure for plant growth.

Question 9.
What is meant by vermicompost?
Answer:
Vermicompost is composed of vermicast which contains nutrients plant growth promoters and organic matters.

Question 10.
What is meant by vermitech?
Answer:
The application of earthworm in the technology of composting and bioremediation of soil and other activities is called vermitech.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 11.
What are the pests of earthworms?
Answer:
Ants, springtails, centipedes, slugs, mites, certain beetle larvae, birds, rats, snakes, mice, toads and other insects or animals which feed on worms.

Question 12.
What are the special characters of vermicompost?
Answer:

  • Aeration
  • draining of water
  • retains water.

Question 13.
What is meant by vermiwash?
Answer:

  • Vermi wash is a liquid collected after the passage of water through a coloumn of vermibed.
  • It is useful as foliar spray to enhance plant growth and field.

Question 14.
What is sericulture?
Answer:
Sericulture is an agro-based industry which denotes commercial production of silk through silkworm rearing.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 15.
What is meant by sericulture?
Answer:
Sericulture denotes commercial production of silk through silk worm rearing.

Question 16.
What is meant by moriculture?
Answer:
The cultivation of mulberry plant which is used as a food for silk worm is called moriculture.

Question 17.
Which is the suitable period for mulberry cultivation?
Answer:
June, July, November, and December

Question 18.
What are the stages involved in rearing process of silk worm?
Answer:
Disinfection of rearing house Incubation of eggs Brushing, young larval rearing Late age larval rearing.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 19.
What is meant by stifling?
Answer:
The process of killing the cocoon is called stifling.

Question 20.
What is meant by reeling?
Answer:
The process of removing the threads from the killed cocoon is called reeling.

Question 21.
What is cooking?
Answer:
The process of soaking cocoons in hot water (95° – 97°) for 10 – 15 minutes to soften the gum that binds the silk threads together is called cooking.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 22.
What are Uzi files?
Answer:
These files which can attack silkworm.

Question 23.
What is meant by cooking?
Answer:
The cocoons are soaked in hot water at 95° – 97°c for 10 -15 minutes to soften the gum that binds, the silk threads together are called cooking.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 24.
What is spun silk?
Answer:
The silk produced from silk wastes used for producing spun silk.

Question 25.
What are apiaries?
Answer:
They are areas where a lot of beehives can be placed.

Question 26.
Name the bees used for Apiculture.
Answer:

  • Apis dorsata – Rock bee
  • Apis florea – Little bee
  • Apis indica – Indian bee
  • Apismellifera – European bee
  • Apis adamsoni – African bee

Question 27.
Name the types of beehives which are in practice in India?
Answer:

  • Langstroth
  • Newton

Question 28.
What is meant by swarming?
Answer:
The mass emergence of larvae of Lacinsect from the egg in search of a host plant is called swarming.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 29.
What is meant by nuptial flight?
Answer:
A unique flight that takes place by the queen bee followed by several drones is called “nuptial flight”.

Question 30.
Which is called as king of the colony? Why is called so?
Answer:
The king of colony is drone hence the sole duty of the drone is to fertilize the vergin queen.

Question 31.
Name the sugar component present in the honey?
Answer:
levulose, dextrose maltose.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 32.
What are the uses of honey?
Answer:

  • It is used as an antiseptic
  • Laxative
  • Sedative
  • It is used in the preparation of cakes bread and biscuits.

Question 33.
What is meant by Lac culture?
Answer:
The culture of lac insect using techniques for the procurement of Lac on large scale is known as Lac culture.

Question 34.
Name the host plants on which Lac insects live?
Answer:
Karanagalli – Acacia catechu Karuvelai – Acacia nilotica Kumbadiri – Schleichera oleosa.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 35.
What is meant by hyper parasitism?
Answer:

  • Hyper parasitism is a condition in which a secondary parasite develops within a previously existing parasite.
  • The caterpillars feed upon lac insects showing hyper – parasitism.

Question 36.
What is meant by inoculation?
Answer:
The process of introducing lac insects to the host plant is called inoculation.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 37.
What is meant by Harvesting?
Answer:
The collection of Lac from the host plant is known as harvesting.

Question 38.
What is meant by ‘Arilac’?
Answer:
The Immature lac insects produce a lac which is called ‘arilac’.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 39.
What is meant by sticklac?
Answer:
Lac cut from the host plant is called ‘stick lac’.

Question 40.
What is seed Lac?
Answer:
The Lac scraped collected grounded and the dust particles are removed to produce a lac called seedlac.

Question 41.
What is meant by Shellac?
Answer:
The seedlac is sundried and then melted to produce “Shellac”.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 42.
What is meant by aqua ponies?
Answer:
Aquaponics is a technique which is a combination of aquaculture and growing plants in non – soil media and nutrient-laden water.

Question 43.
What are the organisms farming through aqual culture?
Answer:
Fish molluscs crustaceans and aquatic plants are farming through aquaculture.

Question 44.
How aquaculture is classified on the basis of it source?
Answer:

  • Freshwater aquaculture
  • Brackish water aquaculture
  • Marine water aquaculture.

Question 45.
What is meant by Brackish water culture?
Answer:
Culturing of animals in the water having salinity range 0.5 – 30ppt are called brackish water cultures.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 46.
Name the fishes cultured through brackish water culture?
Answer:
Milkfish, Sea bass, Grey mullet Kari meen.

Question 47.
What is meant by metahaline culture?
Answer:
Culturing of animals in the salinity ranges from 36 – 40o% is called metahaline culture (eg) Artemia salina.

Question 48.
What are the organisms rearing through aquaculture?
Answer:

  1. Molluscs
  2. Aquatic plants
  3. Crustaceans

Question 49.
Give notes on fishes of brackish water?
Answer:
Brackish water fishes spend most of its life in river mouths backwaters mangrove swamps and coastal lagoons.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 50.
What is meant by mariculture?
Answer:
Culturing of animals in the water salinity ranges from 35- 35% is called mariculture.

Question 51.
Give short notes on Artemia salina?
Answer:
It is a metahaline organism. It lives in high saline waters because of its high osmoregulatory capacity.

Question 52.
What is meant by composite fish culture?
Answer:
Few selected fishes belonging to different species are stocked together in proper proportion in the pond is called composite culture.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 53.
What are the organisms cultured through composite fish culture?
Answer:

  • Catla Catla
  • Labeo rohita
  • Cirrhina mirgala.

Question 54.
What is meant by exotic fish culture?
Answer:
The fishes imported in to a country for fish culture are called exotic fishes and such fish culture is known as exotic fish culture.

Question 55.
Name the exotic fishes cultured in India?
Answer:

  • Cyprinus carpio
  • Oreochromis mossambicus.

Question 56.
What is meant by fish meal?
Answer:
Fish meal is prepared from fish waste after extracting oil from the fish.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 57.
What is meant by Ising glass?
Answer:

  • Ising glass is high-grade collagen produced from dried air bladder.
  • It is used for clarification of wine beer and vinegar.

Question 58.
What is meant by outbreeding?
Answer:
It is the breeding of unrelated animals. They do not have common ancestry for 4-6 generations.

Question 59.
What is the use of outbreeding?
Answer:
Outbreeding helps to produce hybrids with superior qualities and helps to create new breeds. New and favourable genes can be introduced into a population through outbreeding.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 60.
What is meant by outcrossing?
Answer:
It is the breeding between unrelated animals of the same breed but having no common ancertry.

Question 61.
What is meant by artificial insemination?
Answer:
Artificial insemination is a technique in which the semen collected from the male is injected to the reproductive tract of the selected female.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 62.
What is meant by recovery period?
Answer:
Nucleated oysters are attached with floating rafts suspended into a depth of 2 to 3 metres for about 6 to 7 days is called the recovery period.

Question 63.
What is the composition of pearl?
Answer:

  • Water-2-4%
  • Calcium carbonate-90%
  • Organic matter-3.5-5.9%
  • residue-0.1-0.8%

Question 64.
Name the species of prawn?
Answer:
Penaues indicus, Penaeus monodon, Metapenaeus dobsoni, Macrobrachium rosenbergil.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 65.
Where are pearl oysters cultured?
Answer:
Kanyakumari Bay of Kutch.

Question 66.
What is meant by Linga pearl or best quality pearl?
Answer:
The pearl oysters in habit the ridges of rock-forming extensive pearl banks. These pearl beds produce the best quality of pearl or Linga pearl.

Question 67.
What are the types of cultivable fish?
Answer:

  • Indigenous or native freshwater fish. (cg) Catla, Labeo
  • Saltwater fishes acclimatized for freshwater.
  • Exotic fishes or imported from other countries. (eg) Common Carps.

Question 68.
What is Hapa?
Answer:
Hatching hapas are rectangular through shaped tanks made up of mosquito net cloth supported by bampoo poles and fixed in the river.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 69.
What are the advantages of composite fish farming?
Answer:

  •  All available niches are fully utilized.
  • Compatible species do not harm each other.
  • No competition among different species.

Question 70.
What is meant by animal husbandry?
Answer:
Animal husbandry is the practise of breeding and raising livestock cattle like cows, buffaloes goats and birds that are useful to human beings.

Question 71.
What is meant by breed?
Answer:
A group of animals related by descent and with similar characters like general appearance features size etc as said to belong to a breed.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 72.
How can we classify cattle on the basis of their utility?
Answer:

  1. Milch breeds
  2. Draught purpose breeds
  3. Dual-purpose breeds.

Question 73.
What are characteristic features of healthy cattle?
Answer:

  • They appear bright
  • Alert
  • Active
  • Shiny coat.

Question 74.
What are the characteristic features of unhealthy cattle?
Answer:

  • They appear dull
  • Restless
  • Change posture frequently with a drop in milk yield.

Question 75.
Name the important cattle disease?
Answer:

  • Rinder pest
  • Cowpox
  • Anthrax
  • hemorrhagic fever.

Question 76.
What is meant by poultry?
Answer:
It is the rearing and propagation of chicken ducks turkeys geese quail and guinea fowls.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 77.
What are the types of chicken breeds based on their utility?
Answer:

  • They are egg layers
  • Broiler type
  • Dual type
  • Games and
  • ornamental types.

Question 78.
Name the native ducks.
Answer:

  • Indian Runner
  • Syhletmeta.

Question 79.
Name the exotic ducks.
Answer:

  • Muscari
  • Pekin
  • Aylesbury
  • Campbell

Question 80.
What are the three stages of sericulture?
Answer:

  1. Cultivation of food plants for the silkworm.
  2. rearing of silkworm.
  3. reeling and spinning of silk.

Question 81.
What is meant by apiculture?
Answer:
Care and management of honey bees on a commercial scale for the production of honey is called apiculture.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 82.
What is the importance of aquaponics?
Answer:
It maintains the ecosystem balance by recycling the waste and excretory products produced by the fish.

Question 83.
What is meant by aquaponics?
Answer:
Aquaponics is a technique which is a combination of aquaculture and growing plants in non-soil media and nutrient-laden water.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 84.
Based on the water resources where are aquatic organisms cultured? Give examples.
Answer:

  1. Freshwater culture
  2. Brackish water culture, Marine culture, Cultured organism, Fishes, Prawns, Crabs and oysters.

Question 85.
What are the objectives of animal breeding?
Answer:

  • To improve growth rate
  • enhancing the production of milk meat egg etc.
  • Increasing the quality of the animal products
  • Improved resistance to disease.
  • Increased reproductive rate.

3 marks

III. Short answers

Question 1.
What is meant by vermiculture?
Answer:
It is the process of using earthworm to decompose organic food waste into a nutrient-rich material capable of supplying necessary nutrients which help to sustain plant growth.

Question 2.
What is meant by worm casting?
Answer:
The worm castings are pure worm waste and nutrient-rich organic soil and composed of castings, bits of bedding, and other organic matter.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 3.
Why earthworms are called as ‘Farmers of friends’
Answer:

  • They support bacteria fungi which are essential for sustaining healthy soil.
  • The breakdown of organic matter by the activity of the earthworms.
  • It increases porosity aeration, drainage of the soil.

Question 4.
What are the three main components of sericulture?
Answer:

  1. Cultivation of food plants for the silkworms.
  2. Rearing of silkworms.
  3. Reeling and spinning of silk.

Question 5.
Name the predators of earthworms?
Answer:

  • Ants,
  • centipedes,
  • Slugs,
  • Birds,
  • Rats,
  • Snakes.

Question 6.
Name the honey bees used in apiculture.
Answer:

  • Apis dorsate,
  • Apis florea
  • Apis indica
  • Apis mellifera
  • Apisadamsoni

Question 7.
Whatisprobolis?
Answer:
The wax is masticated and mixed with the secretions of the cephalic glands to convert it into a plastic resinous substance called probolis.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 8.
What are the uses of silk?
Answer:
Uses of Silk:-
1. Silk fibers are utilized in preparing silk clothes. Silk fibers are now combined with other natural or synthetic fibers to manufacture clothes like Teri-Silk, Cot-Silk etc. Silk is dyed and printed to prepare ornamented fabrics. They are generally made from Eri-silk or spun silk.

2. Silk is used in industries and for military purposes.

3. It is used in the manufacture of fishing fibers, parachutes, cartridge bags, insulation coils for telephone, wireless receivers, tyres of racing cars, filter fibres, medical dressings, and suture materials.

Question 9.
Describe the structure of Beehive?
Answer:

  • The house of honey bees is a beehive.
  • The hive consists of hexagonal cells made up of wax secreted by the abdomen of a worker bee.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology 4

  • These hives are found hanging vertically from the rocks. building or branches of trees.
  • The young stages of honey bee accommodate the lower and central cells of the hive.
  • In the rock bees hives there are separate cells for queens, worker and drones.

Question 10.
Explain the structure of a beehive?
Answer:
Structure of a Bee Hive. The house of honey bees is termed a beehive or comb. The hive consists of hexagonal cells made up of wax secreted by the abdomen of worker bees arranged in opposite rows on a common base. These hives are found hanging vertically from the rocks, buildings or branches of trees. The young stages of honey bees accommodate the lower and central cells of the hive called the brood cells.

In Apis dorsata, the brood cells are similar in size and shape but in other species, brood cells are of three types viz., queen cell for queens, worker cell for workers, and drone cells for drones. The cells are intended for the storage of honey and pollen in the upper portion of the comb whereas the lower portions are for brood rearing.

Question 11.
What is meant by inbreeding? What are its effects?
Answer:
Breeding between animals of the same breed for 4 – 6 generations is called inbreeding.
Effects:

  1. It increases homozygosity.
  2. Exposes the harmful recessive genes.
  3. Reduces fertility.
  4. It produces inbreeding depression.

Question 12.
How animals are classified based on their economic importance.
Answer:

  • Animals for food and food products.
  • Economically beneficial animals.
  • Animals of aesthetic importance.
  • Animals for scientific research.

Question 13.
Give an account of earthworm based on their habitat.
Answer:
First group:

  • The humus formers dwell on the surface and feed on organic matter.
  • They are darker in colour.
  • These worms are used for vermicomposting.

Second group:
The humus feeders are burrowing worms that are useful in making the soil porous and mixing and distributing humus throughout the soil.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 14.
What are the uses of honey wax?
Answer:

  • It is used for making candles.
  • It is used for making waterproofing materials.
  • It is used for making home appliances polishes for leather.
  • It is used in pharmaceutical industries.

Question 15.
What is meant by Hyper parasitism?
Answer:
A condition in which a secondary parasite develops within a previously existing parasite.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 16.
What are the economic importance of Lac?
Answer:

  • It is used as sealing wax.
  • It is used as a good insulator.
  • It is used in preparations of shoe and leather polishes.
  • It is a protective coating of wood.
  • It is used in preparation of plastic moulded articles.
  • It is used as filling material for gold ornament.

Question 17.
Name the breeds of cattle?
Answer:

  • Milch breeds – Sindhi Jersey
  • Draught breeds – KangeyamMalvi
  • Dual-purpose breeds – Ongole Hariana

Question 18.
What is meant by Milch breed?
Answer:
They are high milk yielders with extended lactation. (eg) Sindhi, brown swiss.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 19.
What is Dual purpose?
Answer:
Cows are meant for yielding more milk and bullocks are used for better drought purpose, (eg) Ongole Hariana

Question 20.
What is draught purpose breeds?
Answer:
Bullocks are good for draught purposes (eg) Malvi.

Question 21.
What are the characteristic features of healthy cattle?
Answer:
A healthy animal eats drinks and sleeps well regularly.
Healthy cattle appear bright.
Alert and active in their movement with a shiny coat.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 22.
What are the external factors affecting fish culture?
Answer:

  1. Temperature,
  2. Light,
  3. Rain,
  4. Flood,
  5. Water current,
  6. Turbidity of water,
  7. pH

Question 23.
What is Aquaponics?
Answer:
Aquaponics is a technique which is a combination of aquaculture (growing fish)’ and hydroponics (growing plants in non-soil media and nutrient-laden water).

Question 24.
Name the species of prawn.
Answer:

  • Penaeus indicus,
  • Penaeus monodon,
  • Metapenaeus dobson,
  • Macrobrachium rosenbergii.

Question 25.
What are the three types of aquaculture on the basis of the source?
Answer:
On the basis of source, aquaculture can be classified into three categories. They are

  1. Freshwater aquaculture
  2. Brackish water aquaculture
  3. Marine water aquaculture.

Question 26.
What are the benefits of poultry farming?
Answer:

  • It does not require high capital for the construction and maintenance of poultry farming.
  • It does not require a big space.
  • It ensures the high return on investment.
  • It provides fresh and nutritious food and has a huge global demand.
  • It provides employment opportunities for the people.

Question 27.
What are the uses of dairy products?
Answer:

  • Milk is a rich source of vitamin A, B2, B1
  • It is a complete food for infants.
  • Dairy products such as yoghurt cheese butter ice cream condensed milk, milk powder are produced from milk.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 28.
What is the importance of meat?
Answer:

  • Meat is rich in protein.
  • It also contains minerals like iron zinc vitamins and selenium.

Question 29.
What is Mariculture?
Answer:
Culturing of animals in the water salinity ranges from 30 – 35% is called Mariculture. Some fishes like Chanos sp, Mugil cephalus are cultured here.

Question 30.
What are poultry diseases?
Answer:
Ranikhet, Coccidiosis, Fowl pox.

5 Marks

IV. Give Detailed Answers

Question 1.
How are vermicompost produced?
Answer:
Types of Movements:

  • Vermicompost is the compost produced by the action of earthworm in association with all other organisms in the compost unit.
  • Vermicompost bed may be selected on upland or an elevated level.
  • We have to construct a cement pit of 3 x 2 x 1m size over the ground surface using bricks.
  • The vermibed should not be exposed to direct sunlight.
  • The first layer of vermibed contains gravel at about 5 cm in height followed by coarses and to a thickness of 3.5 cm which will facilitate the draniage of excess water.
  • The unit can now be loaded with digested biomass or animal dung.
  • Earthworms such as periyonyx excavatus Eisenia fetida or Eudrilus eugeniae are introduced on the top.
  • Earthworms release their castings on the surface.
  • Vermiwash is a liquid collected after the passage of water through a column of vermibed. It is useful as a foliar spray to enhance plant growth.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology 5

Question 2.
Describe the life cycle of bombyx mon?
Answer:

  • This moth is unisexual.
  • Just after emergence male moth copulates with females for 2-3 hours.
  • Just after copulation female starts laying about 400-500 eggs.
  • The eggs after ten days of incubation hatch into larva called a caterpillar.
  • The newly hatched caterpillar is about 3mm in length and is pale yellowish-white colour.
  • The mandibulate type of mouthparts adapted to feed easily on the mulberry leaves.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology 6

  • After 1st, 2nd, 3rd and 4th moulting caterpillars get transformed into 2nd, 3rd, 4th and 5th instars respectively.
  • It develops salivary glands, stops feeding and undergoes pupation.
  • The cafter pillars stop feeding and moves towards the comer among the leaves and secrete a sticky fluid through their silk gland.
  • The secreted fluid comes out through spinnerret which hardens on exposure to air and is wrapped around the body of cater pillar in the forms of a covering called a cocoon.
  • The length of continous thread secreted a caterpillar for the formation of cocoon is about 1000 -1200 metres.
  • The pupal period lasts for 10-12 days and the pupae cut through the cocoon and emerge into adult moth.
  • In larvel stages the larvae moults for 3 or 4 times or 5 times and become a matured moth.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 3.
What are the uses of vermicompost?
Answer:

  • Vermicompost is rich in essential plant nutrients.
  • It improves soil structure texture aeration and water holding capacity and prevents soil erosion.
  • Vermicompost is rich in nutrients and an eco-friendly amendment soil for farming and terrace gardening.
  • It enhances seed germination and ensures good plant growth.

Question 4.
What are the reasons for culturing carps in India?
Answer:
Major carps have proved to be best suited for culture in India because the carps

  1. Feed on zooplankton and phytoplankton, decaying weeds, debris, and other aquatic plants.
  2. They can survive in turbid water with slightly higher temperatures.
  3. Can tolerate O2 variations in water.
  4. Can be transported from one place to another easily.
  5. They are highly nutritive and palatable.

Question 5.
What are the uses of silk?
Answer:

  • Silk fibres are utilized in preparing silk cloths.
  • Silk fibres are combined with natural or synthetic fibres to manufacture Teri – silk and cot silk.
  • Silk is dyed and printed to prepare ornamental fabrics.
  • Silk is used in industries and for military purposes.
  • It is used in the manufacturing of fishing fibres, parachutes insulation coils for telephones.
  • They are used in the preparation of tyre of racing cars, filter fibres in medical dressings and as suture materials.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 6.
Name the pests and diseases of the silkworm.
Answer:
1. Predators:
They feed on silkworms.

  • Birds,
  • ants,
  • crows,
  • kites,
  • rats.

2. Diseases:

  • Pebrin – It is a disease caused by protozoa Nosema bombycis.
  • Flacherie – It occurs in the mature larvae caused by bacteria like streptococcus and staphylococcus.
  • Grasserie – It is aviral disease caused by Bombyx mori nuclear polyhedrosis virus.
  • White Muscardine – It is caused by fungus Beauveria bassiana.

Question 7.
Describe the social organziation of honey bee.
Answer:

  • In honey bee a highly organized division of labour is found.
  • There are three type of honey bees seen in the colony.
  • There are one queen 10000 – 30000 workers and few hundred drones in a colony.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology 7

Queen bee:

  • It feeds on royal Jelly.
  • It is only function is to lay eggs throughout its life span.
  • During breeding season in winter, a unique flight takes place by the queen bee followed by several drones is called nuptial flight.
  • After mating the queen bee lays about 15 lakh eggs in two to four years.

Worker bee:

  • These are sterile females.
  • Worker bee lives in a worker well and it takes, about 21 days to develop from the egg to adult, and its life span is about six weeks.

Works:

  • It secretes royal Jelly.
  • Prepares bee – bread to feed the larvae.
  • Takes care of the queen and drones.
  • Secretes bee wax.
  • In last three weeks she searches and gathers the pollen nectar.

Drones:

  • The drone develops from an unfertilized egg.
  • It lives in a chamber called a drone cell.
  • The only duty of the drone is to fertilize the queen and it is called as the king of the colony.

Question 8.
Describe the structure of the Langstroth beehive?
Answer:

  • Stand – It is a basal part of the hive and are adjusted to make a slope for rainwater to drain.
  • Bottom board – It is situated above the stand. It has two gates one gate is an entrance the other acts as an exit.
  • Brood chamber – It is an important part of the hive. It is provided with 5 to 10 frames arranged one above the other through which the workers can easily pass.
  • The frame is composed of wax – sheet which is held in a vertical position up by a couple of wires.
  • It is strong that can be used repeatedly.
  • Super – It is a chamber without cover and base. It is provided with many frames to provide additional space for expansion of the hive.
  • Inner cover – It is a wooden piece used for covering the super with many holes for proper ventilation.
  • Top cover – It is meant for protecting the colonies from rains. It is covered with a sheet which is plain and sloping.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology 8

Question 9.
Give an account of equipments of beehives and its uses.
Answer:

  • Queen Excluder – It is utilized to prevent the entry of queen bee from the brood chamber into the super chamber.
  • Comb foundation – It is a sheet of bee wax.
  • Bee gloves – They are used by keepers for protecting their hands.
  • Bee veil – It is a device to protect the beekeeper from a bee sting.
  • Smoker – It is used to scare the bees during honey collecting.
  • Hive Tool – It helps in scraping excess propolis or wax.
  • Un capping knife – It helps in removing the cap from the combs.
  • Bee brush – It is used to brush off bees from honeycombs.
  • Queen introducing cage – It is made of wire nets used for keeping the queen for 24 hours with worker bees.
  • Feeder – It is a basin with sugar syrub covered by grass to feed the bees during the drought season.
  • Honey extractor – This spins the combs rapidly to extract honey.
  • Hive entrance guard – It is a device which prevents the escape of the queen during the warming season.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 10.
Describe the process of rearing silkworms?
Answer:

  • A typical rearing house 6 m x 4m x 3.5m is constructed on an elevated place under shade to accommodate 100 dfls.
  • The windows and ventilators should be covered with a nylon net to restrict the entry of uziflies and other insects.
  • The selected healthy silk moths are allowed to mate for 4 hours.
  • The female moth is kept in a dark plastic bed it lays about 400 eggs in 24 hours.
  • The small larvae hatch between 7 – 10 days.
  • The larvae are kept in trays at a temperature of about 20°C-25°C.
  • As the larvae grow they are transferred to fresh leaves on clean trays.
  • Their maturity is achieved in about 45 days.
  • At this stage the salivary glands start secreting silk to spin cocoons.

Question 11.
What is meant by aquaponics? Describe its methods?
Answer:
1. Deepwater culture – Aquaponics is a technique which is a combination of aquaculture and growing plants in non – soil media.

  • It is a raft-based method.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology 9

  • In this method, the raft floats in water plants are kept in the holes of the raft and the root floats in water. Fast-growing plants are cultivated.

2. Media-based method – It involves growing plants in inert planting media likely pellets or shales.
This method is applicable for home and hobby scale system. Large number of fruiting plants leafy green plants herbs can be cultivated.

3. Nutrient film technique – It involves the passage of nutrient-rich water through a narrow trough or pvc pipe.
Plants are kept in the holes of the pipe to allow the roots to be in free contact with the water stream.

4. Aquavertica or vertical aquaponics – Plants are stacked in top of each other in tower systems.
This method is suitable for growing leafy green, strawberries and crops that do not need supporting solid substratum to grow.

Question 12.
Describe the structure of honey bee hive?
Answer:

  • The house of honey bee is termedas bee hive or comb.
  • The hive consists of hexagonal cells made up of wax secreted by the abdomen of worker bee arranged in opposite rows on a common base.
  • These hives are found hanging vertically from the rocks building or branches of trees.
  • The young stages of honey bees accomodate the lower and central cells of the hive called the brood cells.
  • There are separate cells for queen. Drones and workers.
  • In the upper portion of the comb honey and pollen are stored.
  • In the lower portion are for brood rearing.

Question 13.
What is Natural breeding of fishes?
Answer:
Natural breeding (Bundh breeding): These are special types of ponds where natural riverine conditions or any natural water resources are managed for the breeding of culturable fishes. These bundhs are constructed in large low-lying areas that can accommodate large quantity of rainwater. The shallow area of such bundhs is used as a spawning ground.

Question 14.
What are the characteristic features of cultivable fishes.
Answer:

  • Fishes should have high growth rate in short period for culture.
  • They should accept a supplementary diet.
  • They should be hardly enough to resist some common diseases and infection of parasites.
  • Fishes proposed for polyculture should be able to live together without interferring or attaching other
    fishes.
  • They should have high conversion efficiency so that they can effectively utilize the food.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 15.
Why carps have proved to be best suited for culture in India?
Answer:

  • Feed on zooplanktons and phytoplanktons decaying weeds debris and other aquatic plants.
  • They can survive in turbid water with slightly higher temperatures.
  • Can tolerate O2 variations in water.
  • Can be transported from one place to another easily.
  • They are highly nutritive and palatable.

Question 16.
Give an account of induced breeding.
Answer:

  • To improve the quality of fish seed by the artificial method of fertilization is developed.
  • The gonadotrophin (FSH+ LH) secreted by the pituitary gland influences the maturation of gonads and spawning in fishes.
  • The pituitary gland is removed from a healthy mature fish.
  • The pituitary extract is prepared by homogenizing in 0.3% saline and centrifuged for 15 minutes at 8000rpm.
  • The supernatant is injected at the base of the caudal fin.
  • Male and Female fishes start to releasing gametes and are fertilized.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 17.
What are the types of prawn fishery?
Answer:

  1. Shallow water prawn fishery – This is located on the west coast restricted to shallow waters.
  2. Estuaries prawn fishery – In the backwater areas of the western coast, Ennur pulicat chilka lake and Estuaries of Ganga and Brahmaputra culture is done.
  3. Freshwater prawn fishery – Prawns are caught from the rivers and lakes throughout India.
  4. Marine prawn fishery – Prawn belongs to the family, penaeidae are caught along the Indian coast.

Question 18.
Give an account of the culture of freshwater prawns?
Answer:

  • Macrobrachium rosenbergii is seen in rivers fields and low – saline estuaries.
  • For fertilization, one pair of prawn are kept in a separate tank.
  • After mating the eggs are laid.
  • Temperature 24°C – 30°C and PH 7-8 should be maintained in the hatching tank.
  • The hatched larvae are supplied with artificial feed.
  • Young ones 5cm length can be reared in fresh or slightly brackish water ponds and harvesting of prawns can be done twice a year.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology 10

Question 19.
What are the methods of animal breeding?
Answer:
Methods of Animal breeding:
There are two methods of animal breeding, namely inbreeding and outbreeding:

1. Inbreeding: Breeding between animals of the same breed for 4-6 generations is called inbreeding. Inbreeding increases homozygosity and exposes the harmful recessive genes.

Continuous inbreeding reduces fertility and even productivity, resulting in “inbreeding depression”. This can be avoided by breeding selected animals of the breeding population and they should be mated with superior animals of the same breed but unrelated to the breeding population. It helps to restore fertility and yield.

2. Outbreeding: The breeding between unrelated animals is called outbreeding. Individuals produced do not have common ancestors for 4-6 generations.

Outbreeding helps to produce new and favourable traits, to produce hybrids, with superior qualities, and helps to create new breeds. New and favourable genes can be introduced into a population through outbreeding

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 20.
What are the types of cultivable fish Types of cultivable fishes?
Answer:
Types of Cultivable fishes:

  • Indigenous / Native freshwater fishes, (eg) Major Carps Catla Labeo Clarias.
  • Saltwater fishes acclimatized for freshwater. (eg)Chanos, Mullet
  • Exotic fishes. Imported from other countries, (eg) Common Carps.

Characteristic features of Carps:

  • Feed on Zooplanktons and phytoplanktons decaying weeds debris and other aquatic plants.
  • They can survive in turbid water with slightly higher temperatures.
  • Can tolerate 02 variations in water.
  • Can be transported from one place to other.
  • They are highly nutritive and palatable easily

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology 11

Question 21.
Give an account of the management of fish farms?
Answer:
To culture fish one should have an idea about different stages of fish culture such as topographic situation quality source physical-chemical and biological factors of water.
Stages of fish farming:
Breeding Pond:
The first step in fish culture is the breeding of fishes therefore for proper breeding special types of ponds are prepared called breeding ponds. These ponds are prepared near the rivers of natural water resources.
a) Natural breeding:
These bundhs are constructed in large low-lying areas that can accommodate a large quantity of rainwater.
b) Induced breeding:

  • This involves the removal of ova and sperm from female and male by artificial mechanical process and the eggs are fertilized.
  • The fertilized eggs are removed from the spawning place and kept in hatching hapas. Fish seeds: The fish seed is collected from breeding ponds and transferred to the hatching pits.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology 12

3. Hatching Pit:
The fertilized eggs are kept in hatching pits. The hatching pits should be nearer to the breeding grounds should be smaller in size with good quality water.
There are two types of hatching pits:

  1. Hatcheries: These are small-sized ponds in which unfertilized eggs are transferred and hatching happens.
  2. Hatching hapas: These are rectangular trough-shaped tanks made up of mosquito net cloth supported by bamboo poles and fixed in the river.

4. Nursery Pond:
The newly hatched fries are transported from the hatching happa to nursery ponds where they grow into fingerlings.

5. Rearing Pond:
This pond is long and narrow and this pond should be free from toxicants and predators. The fingerlings are transferred to the stocking ponds.

6. Stocking Ponds:

  • This pond should be devoid of weeds and predatory fishes.
  • Proper organic manuring should be done to the production with cow dung.

7. Harvesting:

  • Well-grown fishes are taken out for marketing is harvesting.
  • Small-sized fishes are again released into the stocking ponds for further growth.
  • The harvested fishes are preserved and then marketed.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 22.
a) What is meant by composite fish farming?
b) What are the significance?
c) What are the fishes cultured through composite fish farming.
Answer:
a. Composite fish farming: Few selected fishes belonging to different species are stocked together in proper proportion in a pond is called composite fish farming.

b. Merits :

  • All available niches are fully utilized.
  • Compatible species do not harm each other.
  • No competition among different species is found.

c. Fishes that are cultured :

  • Catla Catla
  • Labeo rohita
  • Cirrhinus mrigala

Question 23.
Give an account of the economic importance of fish.
Answer:
1. Fishes form a rich source of protein food the sardines, mackerel tuna herrings have high amino acid concentrations.
2. These fishes have histidine and omega falty acids.
3. Minerals such as calcium magnesium phosphorus potassium and copper and present.
a) Fish Oil:

  • It is an important fish product it is derived from fish liver and from the fish body.
  • This is rich in vitamin A and O and iodine.
  • It is used in the manufacture of laundry soap paints and cosmetics.

b) Fish Meal:

  • It is prepared from fish waste after extracting oil from the fish.
  • These dried wastes are used to prepare food for pig, poultry and cattle.
  • The wastes obtained during the preparation of fish meal are used as manure.

c) Ising glass:

  • It is high-grade collagen produced from dried air bladder of cat fish and carps.
  • It is used for clarification of wine beer and vinegar.

Question 24.
Give notes on
a) Pearl Culture
b) Formation of pearl.
Answer:
a) Pearl Culture:

  • Pearl is a white shining globular concretion found within the shell of an oyster.
  • In India it was cultured for the first time in 1973 at Thoothukudi.
  • High-quality pearls are obtained from Genus Pinctada that can be cultured in the salinity range of 30 ppt in racks raft and long-line method.
  • The pearl oysters in habit the ridges of rocks or dead coral forming the best quality pearl.

b) Pearl Formation:

  • When a foreign particle accidentally enters into the space between the mantle and shell of the oysters it adheres to the mantle.
  • The mantle epithelium encloses its likes sac and starts to secrete concentric layers of nacre around it as a defensive mechanism.
  • The repeated layers of calcium carbonate make the hard and glossy pearl that are separated and graded.

Question 25.
Give an account of artificial pearl culture?
Answer:

  • Oysters are caught by a special type of cages.
  • This cage is dipped into a sand cement mixture providing a rough surface to the cages and are suspended at a depth of 6 meters.

2. Rearing of oysters:

  • The collected oysters are placed into the culture cages for a period of 10 – 20 days.
  • These cages are protected from enemies like octopus, Eel and devil fishes.

3. Insertion of nucleus:
a) Fitness of oysters for operation:
The selected oysters for the insertion of nucleus should be healthy and strong enough to overcome the stress during operation.
b) Preparation of graft tissues:

  • The piece of tissue which is inserted inside the mantle is called as “graft” tissue.
  • It is essential to keep the outer surface in contact with the inserted nucleus as nacre secreting cells are found only on the outer surface.

c) Preparation of nucleus:

  • Any small particle may function as a nucleus to initiate pearl formation.
  • If it is calcareous the deposition of nacre was found to be more on the calcareous nucleus.

d) Insertion of the nucleus:
For the insertion of nucleus, oysters are fixed in a desk clamb and mantle folds are smoothly touched to expose the foot followed by an incision into the epithelium of the foot and the nucleus is inserted.

e) Post Operation Care:

  • Nucleated oysters are placed into cages and suspended into 2-3 metres of depth for 6-7 days.
  • These periods are known as “Recovery Period”.
  • These oysters are kept for 3-6 years undisturbed.

f) Harvesting of Pearl:
After the completion of 3 years pearl oysters are harvested. It is usually done during December to February.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology 13
g) Clearing of Pearls:
After taking out the pearls from the oyster’s shell. They are washed properly cleared with the soap solution.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 26.
What is inbreeding? What are its merits and demerits?
Answer:
Breeding between animals of the same breed for 4-6 generations is called inbreeding.
Merits:

  • It increases homozygosity.
  • It exposes the harmful recessive genes. Demerits:

1. Continuous inbreeding reduces fertility
2. And results in inbreeding depression. Avoiding inbreeding depression:
This can be avoided by breeding selected animals be mated with superior animals of the same breed but unrelated to the breeding population.

Question 27.
What is Dairying and Dairy Operation?
Answer:
Dairying is the production and marketing of milk and its products. The dairy operation consists of proper maintenance of cattle, the collection, and processing of milk, and its by-products.

Question 28.
What are the types of outbreeding?
Answer:
1. Out Crossing:
It is the breeding between unrelated animals of the same breed but having no common ancestry.
Out Cross: This method is suitable for breeding animals that are below average in productivity.

2. Crossbreeding:

  • Breeding between a superior male of one breed with a superior female of another breed.
  • The cross-breed progeny has superior traits. This is called hybrid vigour or heterosis.

3. Interspecific hybridization:

  • Mating between male and female of two different species.
  • The progeny obtained from such crosses are different from their parents.
  • Mule is produced by the crosses between male donkey and a female horse.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology 14

Question 29.
Give an account of Multiple Ovulation embryo transfer technology? MOET.
Answer:
MOET:

  • This method is applied when the success rate of crossing is low even after artificial insemination.
  • In this method, the follicle-stimulating hormone is administered to cows for inducing follicular maturation and superovulation.
  • Instead of one egg per cycle, 6-8 eggs can be produced.
  • The eggs are carefully recovered non-surgically from the genetic mother and fertilized artificially.
  • The embryos at the 8 – 32 celled stage are recovered and transferred to a surrogate mother.
  • This technology can be applied to cattle sheep and buffaloes.
  • It can produce high milk-yielding females and high-quality meat-yielding bulls in a short time.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 30.
a) What is meant by dairying?
b) Classify them on the basis of their utility.
c) Give an account of dairy products.
Answer
a) Dairying:

  • It is the production and marketing of milk and its products.
  • The dairy operation consists of maintenance of cattle the collection, processing of the milk, and its by-products.
  • These are 26 well-defined breeds of cattle and 6 breeds of buffaloes in India.

b) Classification of Cattle

  1. Dairy breeds: They are high milk yielder with extended lactation, (eg) Sindhi, Jersey Sahiwal
  2. Drought breed: Bullocks are good for draught purposes, (eg) Kangeyam Malvi.
  3. Dual-purpose breeds: Cows are meant for yielding more milk and bullocks are used for better drought purposes (eg) Ongole Hariana.

c) Uses of dairy product:
1. Milk: Milk is a rich source of vitamin A, B2, B and deficient in Vitamin C.
Dairy products such as yoghurt cheese butter ice cream condensed milk powder are produced from milk.
2. Meat: Meat is rich in protein and also contains minerals like iron zinc vitamins and selenium.
3. Land Management: Grazing of live stocks sometimes used as a way to control weeds.
4. Manure: Manure can be spread on agriculture fields to increase crop yields.

Question 31.
Describe the types of Chicken breeds?
Answer:
1. Egg layers: These are farmed mainly for the production of eggs.
Leghorn:

  • It is originated in Italy. They are small compact with a single comb.
  • They mature early and begin to lay eggs at the age of 5 or 6 months.

Chittagong:

  • They are good egg layers and are delicious.
  • They are found in West Bengal.

2. Selection of eggs for hatching:
Eggs should be fertile medium-sized dark brown shelled and freshly laid eggs are preferred for rearing.

3. Incubation and hatching:

  • The maintenance of newly laid eggs in optimum condition till hatching is called incubation.
  • The fully developed chick emerges out of egg after an incubation period of 21 – 22 days.
  • There are two types of incubation namely natural incubation and artificial incubation.
  • In the Natural incubation method, only a limited number of eggs can be incubated by a mother hen.
  • In artificial incubation, more eggs can be incubated.

4. Brooding:

  • Caring and management of young chicks for 4 – 6 weeks immediately after hatching is called brooding.
  • They are natural and artificial brooding. The housing of Poultry:
  • To protect the poultry from the sun.
  • Rain and predators it is necessary to provide housing to poultry.
  • Poultry house should be moisture-proof rat-proof and it should be easily cleanable and durable.
    5. Poultry feeding:
    The diet of chicks should contain an adequate amount of water carbohydrates proteins fats vitamins and minerals.

Poultry Products:

  • The main products of poultry farmings are eggs and meat.
  • The primary aim of poultry farming is to obtain eggs.

C. Poultry by-products:

  • The feathers: They are used for making pillows and quilts.
  • Droppings: The droppings are rich in nitrogen potash and phosphates.
  • The by-products of poultry are used as good sources of nutrients for meat-producing animals and poultry.
  • These by-products supply proteins fats Vitamins and minerals.
    Poultry diseases: Ranikhet coccidiosis Fowl Pox is a common poultry disease.

Merits:

  1. They can adapt themselves to all types of environmental conditions.
  2. And for the breed for feed efficiency.
  3. Growth rate and resistance to diseases.
  4. They are exhibited in poultry shows they are calm friendly and can be maintained as pets.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology

Question 32.
What are the types of poultry farming? What are the stages involved in rearing? What are the poultry by-products?
Answer:
Types:

  1. Organic method
  2. Yarding method
  3. Battery cage method
  4. Furnished cage method.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 12 Trends in Economic Zoology 15

Stages involved in rearing:
1. Selection of the best layer.

  • An active intelligent-looking bird with a bright comb not obese should be selected.
  • They are golden or light yellow coloured.

2. Broiler type :

  • White Plymouthrock is a fast-growing breed and soft quality meat.
  • They have white plumage throughout the body. This is an American breed. It is a fast-growing breed.

3. Dual Purpose breed:
It is known for its massive body having heavy bones. Well feathered and Peacomb is one of the important breed characters.

4. Game breeds:
Aseel:

  • The hens are not good egg layers but are good in the incubation of eggs.
  • Aseel is noted for its pugnacity high stamina majestic gait.
  • This breed is well known for its meat qualities.

5. Ornamental breeds:
Silkie:

  • They are reared as pets and for egg production and meat.
  • The chicken has a fluffy plumage which is said to feel like silk and satin.
  • It has black skin and bones blue ear lobes and five toes on each foot.

Question 33.
Write a note on milk products?
Answer:
Milk products:
Milk is produced by dairy animals which is an emulsion of fat and lactose. Milk also contains enzymes which are destroyed during pasteurization.

Milk is a rich source of vitamin A, B„ Bp and deficient in Vitamin C. Due to its high nutrition value, it serves as a complete food for infants. Dairy products such as yoghurt, cheese, butter, ice cream, condensed milk, curd, and milk powder processed from milk make dairy, a highly farming attraction.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Tamilnadu State Board New Syllabus Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Pdf Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons Text Book Back Questions and Answers, Notes.

Tamilnadu Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

11th Chemistry Guide Hydrocarbons Text Book Back Questions and Answers

Textbook Evaluation:

I. Choose the best answer:

Question 1.
The correct statement regarding the comparison of staggered and eclipsed conformations of ethane, is
a) The eclipsed conformation of ethane is more stable than staggered conformation even though the eclipsed conformation has torsional strain.
b) The staggered conformation of ethane is more stable than eclipsed conformation, because staggered conformation has no torsional strain.
c) The staggered conformation of ethane is less stable than eclipsed conformation, because staggered conformation has torsional strain.
d) The staggered conformation of ethane is less stable than eclipsed conformation, because staggered conformation has no torsional strain.
Answer:
b) The staggered conformation of ethane is more stable than eclipsed conformation, because staggered conformation has no torsional strain.

Question 2.
C2H5 Br + 2Na Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 1 C4H10 + 2NaBr.
The above reaction is an example of which of the following
a) Reimer Tiemann reaction
b) Wurtz reaction
c) Aldol condensation
d) Hoffmann reaction
Answer:
b) Wurtz reaction

Question 3.
An alkyl bromide (A) reacts with sodium in ether to form 4, 5 – diethyloctane, the compound (A) is
a) CH3(CH2)3Br

b) CH3(CH2)5Br

c) CH3(CH2)3 CH(Br)CH3

d) Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 2
Answer:
d) Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 2

Question 4.
The C – H bond and C – C bond in ethane are formed by which of the following types of overlap
a) sp3 – s and sp3 – sp3
b) sp2 – s and sp2 – sp2
c) sp – sp and sp – sp
d) p – s and p – p
Answer:
a) sp3 – s and sp3 – sp3

Question 5.
In the following reaction,
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 3

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 4
Answer:
c) Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 27

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 6.
Which of the following is optically active
a) 2 – methyl pentane
b) citric acid
c) Glycerol
d) none of these
Answer:
a) 2 – methyl pentane

Question 7.
The compound formed at anode in the electrolysis of an aqueous solution of potassium acetate are
a) CH4 and H2
b) CH4 and CO2
c) C2H6 and CO2
d) C2H4 and Cl2
Answer:
c) C2H6 and CO2

Question 8.
The general formula for cyclo alkanes
a) CnHn
b) CnH2n
C) CnH2n-2
d) CnH2n + 2
Answer:
b) CnH2n

Question 9.
The compound that will react most readily with gaseous bromine has the formula
a) C3H6
b) C2H2
c) C4H10
d) C2H4
Answer:
a) C3H6

Question 10.
Which of the following compounds shall not produce propene by reaction with HBr followed by elimination (or) only direct elimination reaction
a) Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 5
b) CH3 – CH2 – CH2 – OH
c) H2C = C = O
d) CH3 – CH2 – CH2Br
Answer:
c) H2C = C = O

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 11.
Which among the following alkenes on reductive ozonolysis produces only propanone?
a) 2 – Methyl propene
b) 2 – Methyl but – 2 – ene
c) 2, 3 – Dimethyl but – 1- ene
d) 2, 3 – Dimethyl but – 2 – ene
Answer:
d) 2, 3 – Dimethyl but – 2 – ene

Question 12.
The major product formed when 2 – bromo – 2 – methyl butane is refluxed with ethanolic KOH is
a) 2 – methylbut – 2- ene
b) 2 – methyl butan – 1 – ol
c) 2 – methyl but – 1 – ene
d) 2 – methyl butan – 2- ol
Answer:
a) 2 – methylbut – 2- ene

Question 13.
Major product of the below mentioned reaction is, (CH3)2 C = CH2 Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 6
a) 2 – chloro – 1 – iode – 2 – methyl propane
b) 1 – chloro – 2 – iodo – 2 – methyl propane
c) 1, 2 – dichloro – 2 – methyl propane
d) 1, 2 – diiodo – 2 – methyl propane
Answer:
a) 2 – chloro – 1 – iode – 2 – methyl propane

Question 14.
The IUPAC name of the following compound is
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 7
a) trans – 2- chloro – 3- iodo – 2- pentane
b) cis – 3- iodo – 4 chloro – 3 – pentane
c) trans – 3 – iodo – 4 – chloro – 3 – pentene
d) cis – 2 – chloro – 3 iodo – 2 – pentene
Answer:
a) trans – 2- chloro – 3- iodo – 2- pentane

Question 15.
Cis – 2- butene and trans – 2 – butene are
a) conformational isomers
b) structural isomers
c) configurational isomers
d) optical isomers
Answer:
c) configurational isomers

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 16.
Identify the compound (A) in the following reaction

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 8

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 9
Answer:
a) Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 28

Question 17.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 11Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 10 CH ≡ CH , where A is,
a) Zn
b) conc. H2SO4
c) alc. KOH
d) dil. H2SO4
Answer:
c) alc. KOH

Question 18.
Consider the nitration of benzene using mixed con H2SO4 and HNO3 if a large quantity of KHSO4 is added to the mixture, the rate of nitration will be
a) unchanged
b) doubled
c) faster
d) slower
Answer:
d) slower

Question 19.
In which of the following molecules, all atoms are co-planar
a) Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 12

b) Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 13

c) Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 14
d) both (a) and (b)
Answer:
d) both (a) and (b)

Question 20.
Propyne on passing through red hot iron tube gives
a) Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 15

b) Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 16

c) Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 17
d) none of these
Answer:
a) Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 15

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 21.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 18 is

a) Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 19

b) Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 20

c) both (a) and (b)

d) Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 21
Answer:
d) Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 21

Question 22.
Which one of the following is non aromatic?
a) Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 22

b) Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 23

c) Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 24

d) Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 25
Answer:
d) Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 25

Question 23.
Which of the following compounds will not undergo Friedal – crafts reaction easily?
a) Nitro benzene
b) Toluene
c) Cumene
d) Xylene
Answer:
a) Nitro benzene

Question 24.
Some meta-directing substituents in aromatic substitution are given. Which one is most deactivating?
a) – COOH
b) – NO2
c) -C ≡ N
d) -SO3H
Answer:
b) – NO2

Question 25.
Which of the following can be used as the halide component for friedal – crafts reaction?
a) Chloro benzene
b) Bromo benzene
c) Chloro ethene
d) Isopropyl chloride
Answer:
d) Isopropyl chloride

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 26.
An alkane isobtainedbydecarboxylation of sodium propionate. Same alkane can be prepared by
a) Catalytic hydrogenation of propene
b) action of sodium metal on iodomethane
c) reduction of 1 – chloro propane
d) reduction of bromomethane
Answer:
b) action of sodium metal on iodomethane

Question 27.
Which of the following is aliphatic saturated hydrocarbon
a) C8H18
b) C9H18
c) C8H14
d) All of these
Answer:
a) C8H18

Question 28.
Identify the compound ‘Z’ in the following reaction
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 26
a) Formaldehyde
b) Acetaldehyde
c) Formic acid
d) none of these
Answer:
a) Formaldehyde

Question 29.
Peroxide effect (Kharasch effect) can be studied in case of
a) Oct – 4 – ene
b) hex – 3 – ene
c) pent – 1 – ene
d) but – 2 – ene
Answer:
c) pent – 1 – ene

Question 30.
2 – butyne on chlorination gives
a) 1 – chloro butane
b) 1, 2 – dichloro butane
c) 1, 1, 2, 2 – tetrachlorobutane
d) 2, 2, 3, 3 – tetra chloro butane
Answer:
d) 2, 2, 3, 3 – tetra chloro butane

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

II. Write brief answer to the following questions:

Question 31.
Give IUPAC names for the following compounds
1) CH3 – CH = CH – CH = CH – C ≡ C – CH3

2) Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 29

3) (CH3)3 C – C ≡ C – CH(CH3)2

4) ethyl isopropyl acetylene

5) CH ≡ C – C ≡ C – C ≡ CH
Answer:
1) Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 30

2) Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 31

3) Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 32

4) ethyl isopropyl acetylene
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 33

5) Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 34

Question 32.
Identify the compound A, B, C and D in the following series of reactions
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 35
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 36

Question 33.
Write short notes on ortho, para directors in aromatic electrophilic substitution reactions.
Answer:
All the activating groups are ‘ortho-para’ directors.
Example: – OH, – NH2, -NHR, -NHCOCH3, -OCH3 -CH3 – C2H5 etc.
Let us consider the directive influences of phenolic (-OH) group. Phenol is the resonance hybrid of following structures.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 37

In these resonance structures, the (-) charge residue is present on ortho and para position of ring structure. It is quite evident that the lone pair of electron on the atom which is attached to the ring involves in resonance and makes the ring more electron rich than benzene. The electron density at ortho and para positions increases as compared to the meta position. Therefore phenolic group activates the benzene ring for electrophilic attack at ‘ortho’ and ‘para positions and hence -OH group is an ortho-para director and activator.

In aryl halides, the strong -I effect of the halogens (electron withdrawing tendency) decreases the electron density of benzene ring, thereby deactivating for electrophilic attack. However the presence of lone pair on halogens involved in the resonance with pi electrons of benzene ring, increases electron density at ortho and para position. Hence the halogen group is an ortho-para director and deactivator.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 34.
How is propyne prepared from an alkene dihalide?
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 38

Question 35.
An alkylhalide with molecular formula C6H13Br on dehydro halogenation gave two isomeric alkenes X and Y with molecular formula C6H12. On reductive ozonolysis, X and Y gave four compounds CH3COCH3, CH3CHO, CH3CH,CHO and (CH3)2 CHCHO. Find the alkyihalide.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 39

Question 36.
Describe the mechanism of Nitration of benzene.
Answer:
It is prepared by the action of a mixture of con. HNO3 and con. H2SO4 (nitrating mixture) on benzene maintaining the temperature below 333 K.
Nitration:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 40

Sulphuric acid generates the electrophile – NO2+, nitronium ion-from nitric acid. This is an example of aromatic electrophilic substitution reaction.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 41

The generation of nitronium ion
H2SO4 + HONO2Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 42 + HSO4
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 43

To the nitronium ion (being an electron deficient species) the π bond of benzene, donates a pair of electrons forming a 6-bond. A species with a + ve charge is formed as an intermediate. This is called ‘arenium ion’ and is stabilised by Resonance.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 44

In the last step, the hydrogen atom attached to the carbon carrying the nitro group is pulled out as a proton, by the Lewis base HSO4, so that stable aromatic system is formed.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 45

Question 37.
How does Huckel rule help to decide the aromatic character of a compound.
Answer:
In 1865, August Kekule suggested that benzene consists of a cyclic planar structure of six carbon with alternate single and double bonds.
There were two objections:
Benzene forms only one ortho disubstituted products whereas the Kekule’s structure predicts two o-di substituted products as shown below.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 46

Kekule’s structure failed to explain why benzene with three double bonds did not give addition reactions like other alkenes.To overcome this objection, Kekule suggested that benzene was mixture of two forms (1 and 2) which are in rapid equilibrium.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 47

Resonance description of benzene:
The phenomenon in which two or more structures can be written for a substance which has identical position of atoms is called resonance. The actual structure of the molecule is said to be resonance hybrid of various possible alternative structures. In benzene, Kekule’s structures I & II represented the resonance structure, and structure III is the resonance hybrid of structure I & II.
The structures 1 and 2 exist only in theory. The actual structure of benzene is the hybrid of two hypothetical resonance structures.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 48

Spectroscopic measurements:
Spectroscopic measurements show that benzene is planar and all of its carbon- carbon bonds are of equal length 1.40 Å. This value lies between carbon-carbon single bond length 1.54 Å and carbon- carbon double bond length 1.34 Å.

Molecular orbital structure:
The structure of benzene is best de¬scribed in terms of the molecular orbital theory. All the six carbon atoms of benzene are sp2 hybridized. Six sp2 hybrid orbitals of carbon linearly overlap with six 1 s orbitals of hydrogen atoms to form six C – H sigma bonds. Overlap between the remaining sp2 hybrid orbitals of carbon forms six C – C sigma bonds.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 49
Formation of Sigma bond in benzene

All the σ bonds in benzene lie in one plane with bond angle 120°. Each carbon atom in benzene possess an un hybridized p-orbital containing one electron. The lateral overlap of their p-orbital produces 3 π- bond. The six electrons of the p-orbitals cover all the six carbon atoms and are said to be delocalised. Due to delocalization, strong π-bond is formed which makes the molecule stable. Hence unlike alkenes and alkynes benzene undergoes substitution reactions rather addition reactions under normal conditions.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 50

All carbon atoms have the delocalized π MO is formed by p-orbitais the overlap of six p-orbitals.

Representation of benzene:
Hence, there are three ways in which benzene can be represented.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 51

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 38.
Suggest the route for the preparation of the following from benzene.
1) 3 – chloro nitrobenzene
2) 4 – chlorotoluene
3) Bromo benzene
4) m – dinitro benzene
Answer:
1) 3 – chloro nitrobenzene
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 52

2) 4 – chlorotoluene
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 53

3) Bromo benzene
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 54

4) m – dinitro benzene
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 55

Question 39.
Suggest a simple chemical test to distinguish propane and propene.
Answer:
Propene decolourises Br2/H2O it forms dibromo compound but propane does not react with Br2/ H2O.

Question 40.
What happens when Isobutylene is treated with acidified potassium permanganate?
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 56

Question 41.
How will you convert ethyl chloride into
(i) ethane
(ii) n – butane
Answer:
(i) ethane
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 57

(ii) n – butane
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 58

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 42.
Describe the conformers of n – butane.
Answer:
Conformations of n-Butane:
n-Butane may be considered as a derivative of ethane, as one hydrogen on each carbon is replaced by a methyl group

Eclipsed conformation:
In this conformation, the distance between the two methyl group is minimum. So there is maximum repulsion between them and it is the least stable conformer.

Anti or staggered form:
In this conformation, the distance between the two methyl groups is maximum and so there is minimum repulsion between them. And it is the most stable conformer.

The following potentially energy diagram shows the relative stabilities of various conformers of n-butane.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 59

Question 43.
Write the chemical equations for combustion of propane.
Answer:
C3H8(g) + 5O2(g) ) → 3CO2(g) + 4H2O(l)
propane

Question 44.
Explain Markovnikoff’s rule with suitable example.
Answer:
Markovnikoff ‘s rule:
“When an unsymmetrical alkene reacts with hydrogen halide, the hydrogen adds to the carbon that has more number of hydrogen and halogen add to the carbon having fewer hydrogen”. This rule can also be stated as in the addition reaction of alkene/alkyne, the most electro negative part of the reagent adds on to the least hydrogen attached doubly bonded carbon.

Addition of water: (Hydration of alkenes)
Normally, water does not react with alkenes. In the presence of concentrated sulphuric acid, alkenes react with water to form alcohols. This reaction follows carbocation mechanism and Markovnikoff’s rule.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 60

Question 45.
What happens when ethylene is passed ‘ through cold dilute alkaline potassium permanganate.
Answer:
CH2 = CH + H2O + (O) Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 61 CH2OH – CH2OH
Ethylene                                                                Ethylene glycol

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 46.
Write the structures of following alkanes.
1) 2, 3 – Dimethyl – 6 – (2 – methyl propyl) decane
2) 5 – (2 – Ethyl butyl ) – 3, 3, – dimethyldecane
3) 5 – (1, 2 – Dimethyl propyl) – 2 – methylnonane
Answer:
1) 2, 3 – Dimethyl – 6 – (2 – methyl propyl) decane
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 62

2) 5 – (2 – Ethyl butyl ) – 3, 3, – dimethyldecane
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 63

3) 5 – (1, 2 – Dimethyl propyl) – 2 – methylnonane
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 64

Question 47.
How will you prepare propane from a sodium salt of fatty acid?
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 65

Question 48.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 66
Identify A and B
Answer:
A) Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 67

b) Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 68

Question 49.
Complete the following :

i) 2 – butyne  Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 69

ii) CH2 = CH2 Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 70

iii) Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 71

iv) CaC2 Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 72
Answer:
i) 2 – butyne Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 69
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 73

ii) CH2 = CH2 Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 70
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 74

iii) Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 71
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 75

iv) CaC2 Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 72
CaC2 + 2H2O → Ca(OH)2 + C2H2
Calcium Carbide                  Acetylene

Question 50.
How will distinguish 1 – butyne and 2 – butyne?
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 76
1 – butyne reacts with ammoniacal AgNO3 solution it forms white precipitate of silver acetylide but, 2 – butyne doesnot reacts with ammoniacal AgNO3 solution.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

11th Chemistry Guide Hydrocarbons Additional Questions and Answers

I. Choose the best answer:

Question 1.
The IUPAC name of neopentane is
a) 2 – methyl butane
b) 2, 2 – dimethyl propane
c) 2 – methyl propane
d) 2, 2- dimethyl butane
Answer:
b) 2, 2 – dimethyl propane

Question 2.
Alkanes are also known as
a) olefins
b) unsaturated aliphatic hydrocarbons
c) saturated aromatic hydrocarbon
d) paraffins
Answer:
d) paraffins

Question 3.
The compressed gas available in cooking gas cylinders is a mixture of:
a) C6H6 + C6H5CH3
b) C2H4 + C2H2
c) C2H4 + CH4
d) C4H10 + C3H8
Answer:
d) C4H10 + C3H8

Question 4.
The gas supplied in cylinders for cooking is
a) marsh gas
b) LPG
c) mixture CH4 and C2H6
d) mixture of ethane and propane
Answer:
d) mixture of ethane and propane

Question 5.
Adam’s catalyst is:
a) platinum metal
b) palladium
c) nickel metal
d) PtO2
Answer:
d) PtO2

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 6.
Soda lime is
a) NaOH
b) NaOH + CaO
c) CaO
d) Na2CO3
Answer:
b) NaOH + CaO

Question 7.
Methyl bromide is converted into ethane by heating it in ether medium with
a) Al
b) Mg
c) Na
d) Cu
Answer:
c) Na

Question 8.
Hydrocarbon which is liquid at room temperature is
a) Pentane
b) Butane
c) Propane
d) Ethane
Answer:
a) Pentane

Question 9.
Pyrolysis of Methane and respectively are
a) Exothermic & Endothermic
b) Endothermic & Exothermic
c) Both are endothermic
d) Both are exothermic
Answer:
c) Both are endothermic

Question 10.
Select the correct statement about alkanes
a) they are polar in nature
b) they are soluble in water
c) they are non – combustible
d) their dipole moment is zero
Answer:
d) their dipole moment is zero

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 11.
Final products of complete oxidation of hydrocarbon is
a) Acid
b) Dihydric alcohol
c) Aldehyde
d) H2O + CO2
Answer:
d) H2O + CO2

Question 12.
Isomerisation in alkane can be brought by using
a) Al2O3
b) Fe2O3
c) Anh.AlCl3/ HCl at 200°C
d) Cone. H2SO4
Answer:
c) Anh.AlCl3/ HCl at 200°C

Question 13.
In aromatization of n – hexane, the catalyst used is
a) Cr2O3
b) V2O5
c) Mo2O3
d) All
Answer:
d) All

Question 14.
The most oxidized form of ethane is
a) CO2
b) HCHO
c) HCOOH
d) CH3COOH
Answer:
a) CO2

Question 15.
The following substance is used as anti knocking compound
a) TEL
b) Lead tetrachioride
c) Lead acetate
d) C2H2PbCl
Answer:
a) TEL

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 16.
Conformational isomers are due to
a) Free rotation about C – C single bond
b) Frozen rotation about C – C single bond
e) Frozen rotation about C – C double bond
d) Restricted rotation about C – C single bond
Answer:
a) Free rotation about C – C single bond

Question 17.
The most stable conformation of ethane is
a) Eclipsed
b) Skew
c) Staggered
d) All are equally stable
Answer:
c) Staggered

Question 18.
IUPAC name of the following compound
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 77
a) 3 – methyl hexane
b) 3 – Ethyl pentane
c) 2, 3 – dimethyl pentane
d) 2, 2 – dimethyl pentane
Answer:
a) 3 – methyl hexane

Question 19.
The number of sigma bonds formed in ethane by the overlapping of sp3 – sp3 orbitals
a) 7
b) 5
c) 1
d) 4
Answer:
c) 1

Question 20.
How many types of carbon atoms are present in 2, 2, 3 – trimethyl pentane
a) one
b) Two
c) Three
d) Four
Answer:
d) Four

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 21.
The correct IUPAC name of the following alkane is
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 78
a) 3, 6 – diethyl – 2- methyloctane
b) 5 – isopropyl – 3- ethyloctane
c) 3 – ethyl – 5- isopropyloctane
d) 3 – isopropyl – 6 – ethyloctane
Answer:
a) 3, 6 – diethyl – 2- methyloctane

Question 22.
In Wurtz reaction, n – hexane is obtained from
a) n – propyl chloride
b) n – butyl chloride
c) Ethyl chloride
d) isopropyl chloride
Answer:
a) n – propyl chloride

Question 23.
When sodium acetate is heated with sodalime the reaction is called
a) Dehydration
b) Decarboxylation
c) Dehydrogenation
d) Dehydrohalogenation
Answer:
b) Decarboxylation

Question 24.
The following substance reacts with water to give ethane
a) CH4
b) C2H5MgBr
c) C2H4OH
d) C2H5OC2H5
Answer:
b) C2H5MgBr

Question 25.
Reaction of ROH with R’ MgX produces
a) RH
b) R’H
c) R – R
d) R’ – R”
Answer:
b) R’H

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 26.
The solvent used in Wurtz reacton is
a) C2H5OH(aq)
b) CH3COOH
c) H2O
d) C2H5OC2H5(dry)
Answer:
d) C2H5OC2H5(dry)

Question 27.
Arrange the following in the decreasing order of their boiling points
i) n – butane
ii) 2 – methylbutane
iii) n – pentane
iv) 2 – methylbutane
a) i > ii > iii > iv
b) ii > iii > iv > i
c) iv > iii > ii > i
d) iii > ii > iv > i
Answer:
d) iii > ii > iv > i

Question 28.
The compound with the highest boiling point is
a) n – Hexane
b) n – Pentane
c) 2, 2 – dimethyl propane
d) 2 – methyl butane
Answer:
a) n – Hexane

Question 29.
The increasing order of reduction of alkyl halides with zinc and dilute HCl is
a) R – Cl < R – I < R – Br
b) R – Cl < R – Br < R – I
c) R – I < R – Br < R – Cl
d) R – Br < R – I < R – Cl
Answer:
b) R – Cl < R – Br < R – I

Question 30.
The volume of oxygen required for the complete combustion of 4 lit of ethane is
a) 4 lit
b) 8 lit
c) 12 lit
d) 14 lit
Answer:
d) 14 lit

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 31.
The dihedral angle between the hydrogen atoms of 2 methyl groups in staggered conformation of ethane is
a) 0°
b) 60°
c) 120°
d) 240°
Answer:
b) 60°

Question 32.
The distances between the hydrogen nuclei in staggered and eclipsed form in ethane respectively are
a) 2.55 Å & 2.29 Å
b) 1.54 Å & 1.34 Å
c) 3.5 Å & 2.5 Å
d) 2.29 Å & 2.55 Å
Answer:
a) 2.55 Å & 2.29 Å

Question 33.
Energy barrier between staggered and eclipsed form in ethane is
a) 0.6 kcal / mole
b) 2.9 kcal / mole
c) 12 kcal / mole
d) 14 cal / mole
Answer:
b) 2.9 kcal / mole

Question 34.
IUPAC name of the following compound
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 79
a) 3 – Ethyl, 5 – methyl heptane
b) 5 – Ethyl, 3 – methyl heptane
c) 2 – Ethyl, 5 – methyl heptane
d) 4 – Ethyl, 5 – methyl heptane
Answer:
a) 3 – Ethyl, 5 – methyl heptane

Question 35.
Ethylene is converted to ethane in the presence of Ni at 300°C. In this reaction the hybridization of carbon changes from
a) sp to sp2
b) sp2 to sp3
c) sp3 to sp
d) sp to sp3
Answer:
b) sp2 to sp3

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 36.
In which of the following reactions in the preparation of ethane a new C – C bond is formed
a) Sabatier – Senderen’s reaction
b) Reduction of ethyl iodide
c) Decarboxylation
d) Kolbe’s electrolysis
Answer:
d) Kolbe’s electrolysis

Question 37.
Select the correct statements
a) eclipsed and staggered ethanes give different products on reaction with chlorine in presence of light
b) the conformational isomers can be isolated at room temperature
c) torsional strain is minimum in ethane at dihedral angles 60°, 180° and 300°
d) steric strain is minimum in gauche form of n – butane
Answer:
c) torsional strain is minimum in ethane at dihedral angles 60°, 180° and 300°

Question 38.
The fully eclipsed conformation of n – butane is least stable due to the presence of
a) bond opposition strain only
b) steric strain only
c) bond opposition strain as well as steric strain
d) no strain is present in the molecule
Answer:
c) bond opposition strain as well as steric strain

Question 39.
Vinyl group among the following is
a) (CH3)2 CH –
b) HC ≡ C –
c) H2C = CH – CH2
d) CH2 = CH –
Answer:
d) CH2 = CH –

Question 40.
The alkene that exhibits geometrical isomerism is
a) propene
b) 2 – methyl propene
c) 2 – butene
d) 2 – methyl – 2 – butene
Answer:
c) 2 – butene

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 41.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 80
a) 5 – methylocta – 1, 3, 5, 7 – tetraene
b) 4 – methylocta – 1, 3, 5, 7 – tetraene
c) 4 – butenylocta -1, 3- diene
d) octa – 1, 5 – diene
Answer:
b) 4 – methylocta – 1, 3, 5, 7 – tetraene

Question 42.
CH2 = C (CH2CH2CH3)2
a) 2 – Propyl pent – 1 – ene
b) 2 – Propyl pent – 2- ene
c) 2 – Propyl pent – 3 – ene
d) 3 – Propyl pent – 1- ene
Answer:
a) 2 – Propyl pent – 1 – ene

Question 43.
The number of sigma (σ) and pi (π) bonds in the following structure are
a) σ bonds – 33 π bonds – 2
b) σ bonds – 22 π bonds – 2
c) σ bonds – 42 π bonds – 2
d) σ bonds – 40 π bonds – 3
Answer:
a) σ bonds – 33 π bonds – 2

Question 44.
In dehydrohalogenation, hydrogen and halogen are removed from
a) the same carbon atom
b) from adjacent carbon atoms
c) from isolate carbon atoms
d) from any two carbon atoms
Answer:
b) from adjacent carbon atoms

Question 45.
Ethylene readily undergoes the following type of reaction.
a) Elimination
b) Addition
c) Rearrangement
d) Substitution
Answer:
b) Addition

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 46.
Baeyer’s reagent is
a) Aqueous bromine solution
b) Neutral permanganate solution
c) Acidified permanganate solution
d) Alkaline potassium permanganate solution
Answer:
d) Alkaline potassium permanganate solution

Question 47.
Baeyer’s reagent oxidizes ethylene to
a) Ethylene chlorohydrin
b) Ethyl alcohol
c) CO2 and H2O
d) Ethane – 1, 2 – diol
Answer:
d) Ethane – 1, 2 – diol

Question 48.
On reductive ozonolysis ethylene gives
a) Aldehyde
b) Ketone
c) Carboxylic acid
d) Ether
Answer:
a) Aldehyde

Question 49.
Polythene is obtained by the polymerization of
a) Styrene
b) A mixture of ethylene and styrene
c) Acetylene
d) Ethene
Answer:
c) Acetylene

Question 50.
Polytetrafluoroethylene is commercially known as
a) Teflon
b) Freon
c) Lewisite
d) Westron
Answer:
a) Teflon

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 51.
Polythens is
a) (- H2C = CH2 -)n
b) (- HC = CH – )n
c) (- H3C – CH3 – )n
d) (- H2C – CH2 -)n
Answer:
d) (- H2C – CH2 -)n

Question 52.
When ethanol vapours are passed over alumina heated at 350°C, the main product obtained is
a) C2H6
b) C2H4
c) C2H2
d) C2H5OC2H5
Answer:
b) C2H4

Question 53.
Dehydrohalogenation of ethyl chloride in presence of ale. KOH produces the following
a) HC ≡ CH + KCl + H2O
b) CH4 + KCl + H2O
c) CH2 = CH2 + KCl + H2O
d) C2H4 + HCl
Answer:
c) CH2 = CH2 + KCl + H2O

Question 54.
Ethylene is prepared by
a) Dehalogenation of chloroform
b) Pyrolysis of ethane at 450°C
c) Dehydration of methanol with Al2O3 / 350°C
d) Methyl chloride on reduction
Answer:
b) Pyrolysis of ethane at 450°C

Question 55.
The peroxide effect involves
a) Ionic mechanism
b) Free – radical mechanism
c) Heterolytic fission of double bond
d) Homolytic fission of double bond
Answer:
b) Free – radical mechanism

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 56.
In which of the following will Kharasch effect operate?
a) CH3 – CH2 – CH = CH2 + HCl
b) CH3 – CH2 – CH = CH2 + HBr
c) CH3 – CH = CH – CH3 + HBr
d) CH3 – CH2 – CH = CH2 + HI
Answer:
b) CH3 – CH2 – CH = CH2 + HBr

Question 57.
Anti Markownikoff addition of HBr is not observed in
a) Propene
b) Butene – 1
c) Butene – 2
d) pentene – 2
Answer:
c) Butene – 2

Question 58.
Conditions used for the formation of ethylene glycol from ethylene
a) bromine water
b) cold alkaline KMnO4
c) dil H2SO4, 60°C
d) Ag / 200°C
Answer:
b) cold alkaline KMnO4

Question 59.
The olefin which on ozonolysis gives CH3CH2CHO and CH3CHO is
a) 1 – butene
b) 2 – butene
c) 1 – pentene
d) 2 – pentene
Answer:
d) 2 – pentene

Question 60.
In the following reaction, A and B respectively are,
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 81
a) C2H4 and alcoholic KOH / ∆
b) C2H5Cl and aqueous KOH / ∆
c) C2H5OH and aq KOH / ∆
d) C2H2 and Br2
Answer:
a) C2H4 and alcoholic KOH / ∆

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 61.
The number of possible alkynes with molecular formula C5H8 is
a) 3
b) 4
c) 5
d) 6
Answer:
a) 3

Question 62.
The number of open chain structural isomers possible with molecular formula C5H8 is
a) 7
b) 6
c) 5
d) 4
Answer:
a) 7

Question 63.
Alkynes exhibit.
a) Chain isomerism
b) Position isomerism
c) Functional isomerism
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 64.
The IUPAC name of the compound having the formula CH ≡ C – CH = CH2
a) Butene – 2 – ye
b) But – 2- yne – 3 – ene
c) 3 – butane 1 – ene
d) But – 1 – ene – 3 – yne
Answer:
d) But – 1 – ene – 3 – yne

Question 65.
Acetylene can be obtained by the electrolysis of the following compound
a) Potassium fumerate
b) Potassium succinate
c) Potassium acetate
d) Potassium formate
Answer:
a) Potassium fumerate

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 66.
The gas obtained when ethylene chloride reacts with alcoholic potash and sodamide is
a) C2H4
b) C2H6
c) C2H2
d) C2H5Cl
Answer:
c) C2H2

Question 67.
PVC is the polymer of the following
a) Ethyl chloride
b) Vinyl Chloride
c) Allyl Chloride
d) Ethynyl chloride
Answer:
b) Vinyl Chloride

Question 68.
Which of the following possess acidic hydrogen
a) C2H6
b) C2H4
c) C2H2
d) CH4
Answer:
c) C2H2

Question 69.
Hydrocarbon which gives oxyacetylene flame
a) ethane
b) ethene
c) ethyne
d) ethanol
Answer:
c) ethyne

Question 70.
The isomer of propyne
a) Allene
b) Propene
c) Cyclo propane
d) Propane
Answer:
a) Allene

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 71.
Bond angle between C – C in alkyne
a) 109°.28′
b) 120°
c) 180°
d) 60°
Answer:
c) 180°

Question 72.
The molecule having linear structure is
a) Methane
b) Ethylene
c) Acetylene
d) Water
Answer:
c) Acetylene

Question 73.
The C – C bond length is shortest in
a) C2H6
b) C3H8
c) C6H6
d) C2H4
Answer:
b) C3H8

Question 74.
The hydrolysis of Mg2C3 produces
a) acetylene
b) propyne
c) butyne
d) ethylene
Answer:
b) propyne

Question 75.
1 – pentyne and 2 – pentyne can be distinguished by
a) Silver mirror test
b) Iodoform test
c) Addition of H2
d) Baeyers test
Answer:
a) Silver mirror test

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 76.
Acetylene on reaction with silver nitrate shows
a) Oxidizing property
b) Reducing property
c) Basic nature
d) Acidic nature
Answer:
d) Acidic nature

Question 77.
The acidic nature of hydrogens in acetylene cannot be explained by the reaction with
a) Sodium metal
b) Ammonical cuprous chloride solution
c) Ammonical silver nitrate solution
d) HCN
Answer:
d) HCN

Question 78.
Westron is the solvent obtained by the reaction of chlorine with
a) Ethylene
b) Ethyne
c) Ethane
d) Methane
Answer:
b) Ethyne

Question 79.
CH ≡ CHSamacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 82 is
a) CH2 = CH – CH = CH2
b) HC ≡ C – CH3
c) CH2 = CH – CH3
d) CH3 – CH2 – CH3
Answer:
b) HC ≡ C – CH3

Question 80.
Hydration of ethyne to ethanal takes place through the formation of
a) CH3CH(OH)2
b) CH2 = CHOH
c) CH2 = CHO
d) CH ≡ C
Answer:
b) CH2 = CHOH

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 81.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 83 B is
a) Acetylene
b) Acetaldehyde
c) Acetone
d) Acetic acid
Answer:
b) Acetaldehyde

Question 82.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 84 is
a) Ethyl chloride
b) 1, 2 dichloro ethene
c) Vinyl chloride
d) Ethylidine chloride
Answer:
c) Vinyl chloride

Question 83.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 85 The Polymer ‘B’ is
a) orlon
b) PVC
c) nylon
d) Teflon
Answer:
b) PVC

Question 84.
Benzene is ______ molecule.
a) Tetrahedral
b) Planar
c) Trigonal
d) Square planar
Answer:
b) Planar

Question 85.
Bond length of C – C in benzene.
a) 1.34 Å
b) 1.39 Å
c) 1.54 Å
d) 1.20 Å
Answer:
c) 1.54 Å

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 86.
The resonance energy Benzene is
a) 36 kcal / mol
b) 85.8 kJ / mole
c) 150.48 kJ / mole
d) Both (a) and (c)
Answer:
d) Both (a) and (c)

Question 87.
In Huckel’s (4n + 2) π rule for aromaticity, ‘n’ represents
a) Number of carbon atoms
b) Number of rings
c) Whole number
d) Fractional number (or) integer (or) zero
Answer:
c) Whole number

Question 88.
Coal tar is obtained as a by product during
a) Destructive distillation of wood
b) Destructive distillation of coal
c) Destructive distillation of bones
d) steam distillation of light oil
Answer:
b) Destructive distillation of coal

Question 89.
Gammaxene is ________ isomer of benzene hexa chloride.
a) α
b) β
c) γ
d) δ
Answer:
c) γ

Question 90.
The empirical formula of benzene and acetylene is/are
a) CH2, CH
b) CH2, CH2
c) CH, CH
d) CH3, CH3
Answer:
c) CH, CH

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 91.
Chemical name of the insecticide gammaxene is
a) DDT
b) Benzene hexa chloride
c) Chloral
d) Hexa chloro ethane
Answer:
b) Benzene hexa chloride

Question 92.
Which is non benzenoidal aromatic compound?
a) Benzene
b) Pyridine
c) Toluene
d) Phenol
Answer:
b) Pyridine

Question 93.
Benzene is purified by
a) distillation
b) fractional distillation
c) Evaporation
d) sublimation
Answer:
b) fractional distillation

Question 94.
Preparation of benzene from phenol is
a) Reduction
b) Oxidation
c) Addition
d) Dehydrogenation
Answer:
a) Reduction

Question 95.
The true statement about benzene is
a) Because of unsaturation benzene easily undergoes addition reactions
b) There are two types C – C bonds in benzene molecule
c) There is a cyclic delocalization of pi – electrons in benzene
d) Mono substitution of benzene gives three isomeric products
Answer:
c) There is a cyclic delocalization of pi – electrons in benzene

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 96.
– COOH group in electrophilic substitution directs the incoming group to
a) o – position
b) p – position
c) m – position
d) o – and p – position
Answer:
c) m – position

Question 97.
Which of the following is not meta directing group?
a) -SO3H
b) – NO2
c) – CN
d) – NH2
Answer:
d) – NH2

Question 98.
Which among the following is very strong o – , p – directing group?
a) – Cl
b) – OR
c) – NH2
d) – NHR
Answer:
d) – NHR

Question 99.
Cyclo butadiene is said to be
a) Aromatic
b) Aliphatic
c) anti aromatic
d) heterocyclic
Answer:
c) anti aromatic

Question 100.
In the reaction Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 86
the attacking species is
a) Cl2
b) Cl+
c) Cl
d) FeCl4
Answer:
b) Cl+

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 101.
The electrophile in Acetylation of Benzene
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 87
Answer:
b) Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 88

Question 102.
The ratio of sigma and pi bonds in benzene is
a) 4 : 1
b) 2 : 3
c) 6 : 1
d) 1 : 1
Answer:
a) 4 : 1

Question 103.
Benzene reacts with _______ to yield acetophenone.
a) CH3COCl + AlCl3
b) C6H5COCl + AlCl3
c) RCOCl + AlCl3
d) C2H5COCl + AlCl3
Answer:
a) CH3COCl + AlCl3

Question 104.
The order of activites of the various O and P director is
a) – O > – OH > – OCOCH3 > – COCH3
b) – OH > – O > – OCOCH3 > – COCH3
c) – OH > – O > – COCH3 > – OCOCH3
d) -O > – COCH3 > -OCOCH3 > -OH
Answer:
a) – O > – OH > – OCOCH3 > – COCH3

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

II. Very short question and answers (2 Marks):

Question 1.
What are alkanes? Give example.
Answer:
Alkanes are saturated hydrocarbons represented by the general formula CnH2n + 2 where ‘n’ is the number of carbon atoms in the molecule. Methane CH4, is- the first member of alkane family. The successive members are ethane C2H6, propane C3H8,butane C4H10, pentane C5H12 and so on. It is evident that each member differs from its proceeding or succeeding member by a -CH2 group.

Question 2.
Give the IUPAC name of the following alkane.
a) Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 89

b) Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 90
Answer:
a) Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 91

b) eer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 92

Question 3.
Draw the structural formula for 4,5 – diethyl – 3, 4, 5 – trimethyl octane.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 93

Question 4.
How is methane prepared from sodium acetate?
Answer:
When a mixture of sodium salt of carboxylic acid and soda lime (sodium hydroxide + calcium oxide) is heated, alkane is formed. The alkane formed has one carbon atom less than carboxylic acid. This process of eliminating carboxylic
group is known as decarboxylation.
CH3COONa + NaOH Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 94 CH4 + Na2CO3
Sodium acetate                            Methane

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 5.
Write a short note on Kolbe’s Electrolytic method.
Answer:
When sodium or potassium salt of carboxylic acid is electrolyzed, a higher alkane is formed. The decarboxylative dimerization of two carboxylic acid occurs. This method is suitable for preparing symmetrical alkanes(R-R).
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 95

Question 6.
How will you convert chloro propane into propane?
Answer:
When chloro propane is reduced with Zn / HCl it gives propane.
Example:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 96

Question 7.
Explain the combustion reaction of alkane with suitable example.
Answer:
A combustion reaction is a chemical reaction between a substances and oxygen with evolution of heat and light (usually as a flame). In the presence of sufficient oxygen, alkanes undergoes combustion when ignited and produces carbondioxide and water.

The combustion reaction is expressed as follows.
Example:
CH4 + 2O2 → CO2 + 2H2O
∆H° = -890.4 KJ

When alkanes burn in insufficient supply of oxygen, they form carbonmonoxide and carbon black.
2CH4 + 3O2 Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 97 2CO + 4H2O
CH4 + O2 → C + 2H2O

Question 8.
How are the following compound prepared by Aromatisation method?
(i) Benzene
(ii) Toluene
Answer:
(i) Benzene
n-Hexane passed over Cr2O3 supported on alumina at 873 k gives benzene.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 98

(ii) Toluene
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 99Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 100

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 9.
What happens when methane reacts with steam?
Answer:
Methane reacts with steam at 1273K in the presence of Nickel and decomposes to form carbon monoxide and hydrogen gas.
CH4(g) + H2O(g) Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 100 CO(g) + 3H2
Production of H2 gas from methane is known as steam reforming process and it is a well-established industrial process for the production of H2 gas from hydrocarbons.

Question 10.
Explain the Isomerisation reaction with suitable example.
Answer:
Isomerisation is a chemical process by which a compound is transformed into any its isomeric forms. Normal alkanes can be converted into branched alkanes in the presence of AlCl3 and HCl at 298 k.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 101
This process is of great industrial importance. The quality of gasoline is improved by isomerising its components.

Question 11.
What are alkenes? Give example.
Answer:
Alkenes are unsaturated hydrocarbons that contain carbon-carbon double bond. They are represented by the general formulae CnH2n where ‘n’ stands for number of carbon atoms in the molecule. Alkenes are also known as olefins (in Latin – oil maker) because the first member ethene combines with chlorine gas to form an oily liquid as a product.
Example:
Ethylene (C2H4)

Question 12.
Explain the Geometrical isomerism of alkene with suitable example.
Answer:
It is a type of stereoisomerism and it is also called cis-trans isomerism. Such type of isomerism results due to the restricted rotation of doubly bounded carbon atoms.
If the similar groups lie on the same side, then the geometrical isomers are called Cis-isomers. When the similar groups lie on the opposite side, it is called a Trans isomer.
Example:
The geometrical isomers of 2-Butene is expressed as follows
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 102

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 13.
Write the test for Alkene.
Answer:
Bromine in water is reddish brown colour. When small about of bromine water is added to an alkene, the solution is decolourised as it forms dibromo compound. So, this is the characteristic test for unsaturated compounds.
Example:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 103

Question 14.
Mention uses of Alkenes.
Answer:

  • Alkenes find many diverse applications in industry. They are used as starting materials in the synthesis of alcohols, plastics, liquors, detergents and fuels
  • Ethene is the most important organic feed stock in the polymer industry. E.g,’ PVC, Sarans and polyethylene. These polymer are used in the manufacture of floor tiles, shoe soles, synthetic fibres,raincoats, pipes etc.

Question 15.
How is propyne prepared from propylidine chloride?
Answer:

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 104

Question 16.
How is ethyne prepared from CaC2?
Answer:
Ethyne can be manufactured in large scale
by action of calcium carbide with water.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 105
Calcium carbide needed for this reaction is prepared by heating quick lime and coke in an electric furance at 3273 K
CaO + 3C Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 106 CaC2 + CO

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 17.
Write the reaction of propyne using Br2.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 107
When Br2 in CCl4 (Reddishbrown) is added to an aikyne, the colour is decolounsed. This is the test for unsaturation.

Question 18.
Mention the uses of alkynes.
Answer:

  1. Acetylene is used in oxy acetylene torch used for welding and cutting metals.
  2. It is used for manufacture of PVC, polyvinyl acetate, polyvinyl ether, orlon and neoprene rubbers.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

III. Short question and answers (3 Marks):

Question 1.
How are the following conversions carried out?
(i) propene → propane
(ii) ethene → ethane
(iii) prop – 1 – yne → propane
Answer:
(i) propene → propane
CH3 – CH = CH2 + H2 Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 108 CH3 – CH2 – CH3
propene                                     propane

(ii) ethene → ethane
CH2 = CH2 + H2 Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 109 CH3 – CH3
ethene                               ethane

(iii) prop – 1 – yne → propane
CH3 – C ≡ CH + 2H2 Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 108 CH3 – CH2 – CH3
prop – 1 – yne                            propane

Question 2.
write the IUPAC name of the following compounds.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 110
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 111

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 3.
Write the structural formula for the following compounds.
(i) 3 – Ethyl – 4, 5 – dipropyl octane
(ii) 2, 3 – Dimethyl pentane
(iii) 4 – Ethyl – 2,7 – Dimethyl octane
Answer:
(i) 3 – Ethyl – 4, 5 – dipropyl octane
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 112

(ii) 2, 3 – Dimethyl pentane
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 113

(iii) 4 – Ethyl – 2,7 – Dimethyl octane
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 114

Question 4.
Write a short note on
(i) Wurtz reaction
(ii) Corey – House Mechanism
Answer:
(i) Wurtz reaction:
When a solution of halo alkanes in dry ether is treated with sodium metal, higher alkanes are produced. This reaction is used to prepare higher alkanes with even number of carbon atoms.
Example:
CH3 – Br + 2Na + Br – CH3 Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 115 CH3 – CH3 + NaBr
methyl bromide                                        ethane

(ii)Corey-House Mechanism:
An alkyl halide and lithium di alkyl cuprate are reacted to give higher alkane.
Example:
CH3CH2Br + (CH3)2LiCu → CH3CH2CH3 + CH3Cu + LiBr
Ethyl bromide

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 5.
How is methane prepared from Grignard reagent?
Answer:
Methyl chloride reacts with magnesium in presence of dry ether gives methyl magnesium chloride. Then methyl magnesium chloride reacts with water to give methane.
CH3 – Cl + Mg Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 116 CH3MgCl
chloromethane                 methyl magnesium chloride

CH3MgCl + H2O → CH4 + Mg(OH)Cl
methane

Question 6.
What is meant by pyrolysis? Explain the pyrolysis reaction of Ethane and propane.
Answer:
Pyrolysis is defined as the thermal decomposition of organic compound into smaller fragments in the absence of air through the application of heat. ‘Pyro’ means ‘fire’ and ‘lysis’ means ‘separating’. Pyrolysis of alkanes also named as cracking.

In the absence of air, when alkane vapours are passed through red-hot metal it breaks down into simpler hydrocarbons.

1) Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 204

2) 2CH3 – CH3 Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 117  CH2 = CH2 + 2CH4
Ethane                                 Ethylene

Question 7.
Mention the uses of alkanes.
Answer:
The exothermic nature of alkane combustion reaction explains the extensive use of alkanes as fuels. Methane present in natural gas is used in home heating. Mixture of propane and butane are known as LPG gas which is used for domestic cooking purpose. GASOLINE is a complex mixture of many hydrocarbons used as a fuel for internal combustion engines.

Carbon black is used in the manufacture of ink, printer ink and black pigments. It is also used s fillers.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 118

Question 8.
Write all possible structural isomers with the molecular formula C4H10 and name them.
Answer:
(i) CH3 – CH = CH – CH3 2 – butene
(ii) CH2 = CH – CH2 – CH3 1 – butene
(iii) Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 119 2 – mehyl – 1 – propene
structures (i) 8s (ii) are position isomers, structures (i) & (iii), (ii) 8s (iii) are chain isomers.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 9.
How is ethene prepared by Kolbe’s electrolytic method?
Answer:
When an aqueous solution of potassium succinate is electrolyzed between two platinum electrodes, ethene is produced at the anode.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 120

Question 10.
How are the following compounds prepared by ozonolysis method?
(i) Formaldehyde
(ii) Acetaldehyde
Answer:
(i) Formaldehyde:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 121

(ii) Acetaldehyde:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 122

Question 11.
How ozone reacts with 2 – methyl propene?
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 123
When 2 – methyl propene reacts with ozone to give ozonoid. Ozonide is treated with Zn/H2O gives acetone.

Question 12.
How is acetylene prepared from ethylene?
Answer:
This process involves two steps:
(i) Halogenation of alkenes to form vicinal dihalides
(ii) Dehalogenation of vicinal dihalides to form alkynes.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 124

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 13.
How is acetylene prepared by Kolbe’s electrolytic method?
Answer:
Electrolysis of sodium or potassium salt of maleic or fumaric acid yields alkynes.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 125

Question 14.
Write Ozonolysis reaction of Propyne?
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 126

Question 15.
How is BHC prepared? Give its uses.
Answer:
Chlorination of Benzene:
Benzene reacts with three molecules of Cl2 in the presence of sun light or UV light to yield Benzene Hexa Chloride (BHC) C6H6Cl6. This is known as gammaxane or Lindane which is a powerful insecticide.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 127

Question 16.
How propane is prepared form 1, 2 – dichloro propane?
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 128

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 17.
Explain the polymerization reaction of alkenes.
Answer:
A polymer is a large molecule formed by the combination of larger number of small molecules. The process is known as polymensation. Alkenes undergo polymerisation at high temperature and pressure, in the presence of a catalyst.
Example:
red hot
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 129

Question 18.
Write a note on acidic nature of Alkynes.
Answer:
An alkyne shows acidic nature only if it contains terminal hydrogen. This can be explained by considering sp hybrid orbitals of carbon atom in alkynes. The percentage of S-character of sp hybrid orbital (50%) is more than sp2 hybrid orbital of alkene (33%) and sp3 hybrid orbital of alkane (25%). Because of this, Carbon becomes more electronegative facilitating donation of H+ ions to bases. So hydrogen attached to triply bonded carbon atoms is acidic but not the others.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 130

Question 19.
Write a short note on
(i) Wurtz – Fittig reactions
(ii) Friedel Craft’s reaction
Answer:
(i) Wurtz – Fittig reactions:
When a solution of bromo benzene and iodo methane in dry ether is treated with metallic sodium, toluene is formed.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 131

(ii) Friedel Craft’s reaction:
When benzene is treated with methyl chloride in the presence of anhydrous aluminium chloride, toluene is formed.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 132

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

IV. Long Question and answers (5 Marks):

Question 1.
How to draw structural formula for given IUPAC name with suitable example.
Answer:
After you learn the rules for naming alkanes, it is relatively easy to reverse the procedure and translate the name of an alkane into a structural formula. The example below show how this is done.
Let us draw the structural formula for
3 – ethyl – 2, 3 – dimethyl pentane
Step 1:
The parent hydrocarbon is pentane. Draw the chain of five carbon atoms and number it. .
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 133

Step 2:
Complete the carbon skeleton by attaching the alkyl group as they are specified in the name. An ethyl group is attached to carbon 3 and two methyl groups are attached to carbon 2 and 3.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 134

Step 3:
Add hydrogen atoms to the carbon skeleton so that each carbon atoms has four bonds.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 135

Question 2.
Explain the conformations of ethane.
Answer:
The two tetrahedral methyl groups can rotate about the carbon – carbon bond axis yielding several arrangements called conformers. The extreme conformations are staggered and eclipsed conformation. There can be number of other arrangements between staggered and eclipsed forms and their arrangements are known as skew forms.
Eclipsed conformation:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 136

In this conformation, the hydrogen’s of one carbon are directly behind those of the other. The repulsion between the atoms is maximum and it is the least stable conformer.

Staggered conformation:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 137

In this conformation, the hydrogen’s of both the carbon atoms are far apart from each other. The repulsion between the atoms is minimum and it is the most stable conformation.

Skew conformation:

The infinite numbers of possible intermediate conformations between the two extreme conformations are referred as skew conformations. The stabilities of various conformations of ethane are:
Staggered > Skew > Eclipsed
The potential energy difference between the staggered and eclipsed conformation of ethane is around 12.5 kJmol-1. The various conformations can be represented by new man projection formula.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 138

Eclipsed Skew Staggered newmann projection formula for Ethane.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 3.
Explain the steps involved in the mechanism of halogenations of alkane.
Halogenation:
A Halogenation reaction is the chemical reaction between an alkane and halogen in which one or more hydrogen atoms are substituted by the halogens.

Chlorination and Bromination are two widely used halogenation reactions. Fluorination is too quick and iodination too slow. Methane reacts with chlorine in the presence of light or when heated as follows.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 139

Mechanism:
The reaction proceeds through the free radical chain mechanism. This mechanism is characterized by three steps initiation, propagation and termination.

(i) Chain Initiation:
The chain is initiated by UV light leading to homolytic fission of chlorine molecules into free radicals (chlorine atoms).
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 140

Here we choose Cl – Cl bond for fission because C – C & C – H bonds are stronger than Cl – Cl.

ii) Propagation:
It proceeds as follows
a) Chlorine free radial attacks the methane molecule and breaks the C – H bond resulting in the generation of methyl free radical
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 141

b) The methyl free radical thus obtained attacks the second molecule of chlorine to give chloromethane (CH3Cl) and a chlorine free radical as follows.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 142

c) This chlorine free radical then cycles back to step a) and both step a) and b) are repeated many times and thus chain of reaction is set up.

iii) Chain termination:
After sometimes, the reactions stops due to consumption of reactant and the chain is terminated by the combination of free radicals.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 143

Question 4.
Write the IUPAC name of the following compounds.
1) CH3 – CH = CH2
2) CH3 – CH = CH – CH3
3) Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 144
4) Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 145
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 146

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 5.
Write the IUPAC name of the following compounds.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 147
Answer:
1) Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 148

2) Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 149

3) Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 150

4) Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 151

Question 6.
Draw the structures for the following alkenes.
(i) 6 – Bromo – 2, 3 – dimethyl – 2 – hexene
(ii) 5 – Bromo – 4 – chloro – 1 -heptene
(iii) 2, 5 – dimethyl – 4 – octene
(iv) 4 – Methyl – 2 – pentene
Answer:
(i) 6- Bromo – 2, 3-dimethyl – 2 -hexene
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 152

(ii) 5 – Bromo – 4 – chloro – 1 -heptene
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 153

(iii) 2, 5 – dimethyl – 4 – octene
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 154

(iv) 4 – Methyl – 2 – pentene
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 155

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 7.
Draw the structure and write down the IUPAC name for the isomerism exhibited by the molecular formulae:
(i) C5H12 – Pentene (3 isomers)
(ii) C6H14 – Hexene (5 isomers)
(iii) C5H12 – Pentene (3 isomers)
Answer:
(i) C5H12 – Pentene
a) CH3 – CH2 – CH2 – CH = CH2
1 – Pentene

b) Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 156
2 – methyl – 2 – butene

c) CH3CH = CH – CH2CH3
2 – pentene

(ii) C6H14 – Hexene
a) CH3 – CH2 – CH2 – CH2 – CH = CH2
1 – hexane

b) CH3 – CH2 – CH2 – CH = CH – CH3
2 – hexane

c) CH3 – CH2 – CH = CH – CH3 – CH2
3 – hexane

d) Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 157

e) Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 158

Question 8.
How are the following conversions carried out?
(i) ethanol → ethene
(ii) 2- butyne cis → 2 – butene and trans – 2 – butane
(iii) 1 – bromopropane → prop – 1 – ene
(iv) 1 – 2 – dibromoethane – ethene
Answer:
1) ethanol → ethene
C2H5OH Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 159 H2C = H2C
ethanol ethane

(ii) 2 – butyne → cis – 2 – butene
H3C – C ≡ C – CH3 + H2 Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 160

2 – butane → trans – 2 – butane
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 161

(iii) 1 – bromopropane → prop – 1 – ene
H3C – CH2 – CH2 – Br Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 162 H3C – CH = CH2 + KBr + H2O
1 – bromopropane → prop – 1 – ene

(iv) 1 – 2 – dibromoethane – ethene
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 163
1 – 2 – dibromoethane – ethene

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 9.
Write the mechanism involved in the addition of HBr to alkene in the presence of organic peroxide.
Answer:
Anti-Markovnikoff’s Rule (Or) Peroxide Effect (Or) KharaschAddition:
The addition of HBr to an alkene in the presence of organic peroxide takes place in the direction opposite to that predicted by Markovnikoff’s rule.
CH3 – CH = CH2 + HBr Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 164 CH3 – CH2 – CH3 – CH2 – CH2 – Br
prop – 1 – ene                                                          1 – bromopropane

Mechanism:
The reaction proceeds via free radical mechanism.

Step 1:
The week O – O single bond linkages of peroxides undergoes homolytic cleavage to generate free radical.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 165

Step 2:
The radicals abstract H from HBr thus generating bromine radical.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 166

Step 3:
The Bromine radical adds to the double bond in the way to form more stable alkyl free radical.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 167

Step 4:
Addition of HBr to secondary free radical
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 168

Step 5:
Addition of HBr to primary free radical
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 169

Question 10.
How are the following conversions carried out?
Answer:
(i) Propene → 2 – Propanol
(ii) ethene → ethylene glycol
(iii) 2 – butene → Acetic acid
(iv) 2 – methyl – 1 – propene → Acetone
Answer:
(i) Propene → 2 – Propanol
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 170

(ii) ethene → ethylene glycol
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 171

(iii) 2 – butene → Acetic acid
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 172

(iv) 2 – methyl – 1 – propene → Acetone
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 173 Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 174

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 11.
An organic compound (A) C2H4 decolourises bromine water. (A) on reaction with chlorine gives (B) A reacts with HBr to give (C). Identity (A), (B), (C). Explain th. reactions.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 175
Result:
(A) – ethylene
(B) – 1, 2 – dichloroethane
(C) – ethyl bromide

Question 12.
How are the following conversions carried out?
(i) 2 – butyne → 2, 2 – dichlorobutane
(ii) 1 – butyne → 2, 2 – dibromobutane
(iii) ethyne → acetaldehyde
(iv) Propyne → propan – 2 – one
Answer:
(i) 2 – butyne → 2, 2 – dichlorobutane
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 176

(ii) 1 – butyne → 2, 2 – dibromobutane
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 177

(iii) ethyne → acetaldehyde
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 178

(iv) Propyne → propan – 2 – one
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 179

Question 13.
How are the following compounds prepared from ethyne?
(i) Formic acid
(ii) Vinyl ethylene
(iii) Benzene
Answer:
(i) Formic acid
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 180

(ii) Vinyl ethylene
2CH ≡ CH Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 181 CH2 = CH – C ≡ CH (Vinyl ethylene)

(iii) Benzene
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 182

Question 14.
Explain the Huckel’s rule of Aromaticity.
Answer:
Huckel proposed that aromaticity is a function of electronic structure. A compound may be aromatic, if it obeys the following rules (Huckel’s rule)
i) The molecule must be co-planar
ii) Complete delocalization of n electron in the ring
iii) Presence of (4n+2) n electrons in the ring where n is an integer (n = 0,1,2….)
This is known as Huckle’s rule.
Some of the examples which obey Huckel rule.

1. The benzene ring is planar with delocalized π electrons (6)
It obeys Huckel’s rule because 4n + 2 = (4 × 1) + 2 = 6π electrons.
Hence, it is an aromatic compound
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 183

2. It has planar ring structure with delocalized π electrons (10).
Applying Huckle’s rule (4 × 2) + 2 = 10π electrons.
Hence it is an aromatic compound
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 184
Naphthalene

3. It has a planar ring structure with delocalized π electrons(14).
Applying Huckle’s rule (4 × 3) + 2 = 14π electrons.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 185

4. It has planar ring structure but the π electrons are not delocalized.
Applying Huckle’s rule (4 × 1) + 2 = 6π electrons.
But it has only 4electrons. So it is not an aromatic compound
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 186

5. It has a tub shaped ring structure. It does not obey Huckel’s rule.
Applying Huckle’s rule 4n + 2 = 8π electrons if n = 2
So it is not an aromatic compound.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 187

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 15.
Explain the Kekule’s structure of benzene.
Answer:
In 1865, August Kekule suggested that benzene consists of a cyclic planar structure of six carbon with alternate single and double bonds.
There were two objections:
(i) Benzene forms only one orthodisubstituted products whereas the Kekule’s structure predicts two o-di substituted products as shown below.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 188
Presence of double bond between the substituents

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 189
Presence of single bond between the substituents

(ii) Kekule’s structure failed to explain why benzene with three double bonds did not give addition reactions like other alkenes.To overcome this objection, Kekule suggested that benzene was mixture of two forms (1 and 2) in rapid equilibrium.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 190

Question 16.
Explain the resonance in benzene.
Answer:
The phenomenon in which two or more structures can be written for a substance which has identical portions of atoms in called resonance. The actual structure of the molecule is said to be resonance hybrid of various possible alter nature structures. In benzene, Kekule’s structures I & II represented the resonance structure, and structure III is the resonance hybrid of structure I & II.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 191

The structures 1 and 2 exist only in theory. The actual structure of benzene is the hybrid of two hypothetical resonance structures.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 17.
Write the industrial preparation of benzene from coal tar.
Answer:
Coal tar is a viscous liquid obtained by the pyrolysis of coal. During fractional distillation, coal tar is heated and distills away its volatile compounds namely benzene, toluene, xylene in the temperature range of 350 to 443 K. These vapours are collected at the upper part of the fractionating column
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 192

Question 18.
How is benzene prepared from
(i) Acetylene
(ii) Decarboxylation
(iii) Phenol
Answer:
(i) From acetylene
Acetylene on passing through a red -hot tube trimerises to give benzene. We havealready studied this concept in polymerization of alkynes.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 193

(ii) Decarboxylation of aromatic acid.
When sodium benzonate is heated with sodalime, benzene vapours distil over.
C6H5COONa + NaOH Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 194 C6H6 + Na2CO3

(iii) Preparation of benzene from Phenol
When phenol vapours are passed over zinc dust, then it is reduced to benzene.
C6H6OH + Zn Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 195 C6H6 + ZnO

Question 19.
Explain Electrophilic substitution reaction of benzene.
Answer:
(i) nitration:
When benzene is heated at 330K with a nitrating mixture (Con. HNO3 + Con. H2SO4), nitro benzene is formed by replacing of hydrogen atom by nitronium ion NO2+ (electrophile).
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 196
Concentrated H2SO4 is added to produce nitronium ion NO2+.

(ii) Halogenation:
Benzene reacts with halogens (X2 = Cl2, Br2,) in the presence of Lewis acid such as FeCl3, FeBr3 orAlCl3 and give corresponding halo benzene.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 197

(iii) Sulphonation:
Benzene reacts with fuming sulphuric acid (Con. H2SO4 + SO3) and gives benzene sulphonic acid. The electrophile SO3 is a molecule.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 198

(iv) Friedel craft’s alkylation: (methylation)
When benzene is treated with a alkyl halide in the presence of only AlCl3, alkyl benzene is formed.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 199

(v) Friedel craft’s acylatlon: (Acetylation)
When benzene is treated with acetyichioride in the presence of AlCl3, acyl benzene is formed.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 200

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons

Question 20.
How is benzene converted into
a) Cyclo hezane
b) maleic anhydride
c) 1, 4 cyclo hexadiene
Answer:
a) Cyclo hexane:
Benzene reacts with hydrogen in the presence of Platinum or Palladium to yield Cyclohexane. This is known as hydrogenation.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 201

b) maleic anhydride:
Although benzene is very stable to strong oxidizing agents, it quickly undergoes vapour phase oxidation by passing its vapour mixed with oxygen over V2O5 at 773k. The ring breaks to give maleic anhydride.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 202

c) 1, 4 cyclo hexadiene:
Benzene can be reduced to non- conjugated dienes 1, 4 – cyclohexadiene by treatment with Na or Li in a mixture of liquid ammonia and alcohol. It is the convenient method to prepare cyclicdienes.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 13 Hydrocarbons 203

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Book Answers Solutions

Subject Matter Experts at SamacheerKalvi.Guide have created Tamil Nadu State Board Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Book Answers Solutions Guide Pdf Free Download of Volume 1 and Volume 2 in English Medium and Tamil Medium are part of Samacheer Kalvi 11th Books Solutions.

Let us look at these TN State Board New Syllabus Samacheer Kalvi 11th Std Computer Science Guide Pdf of Text Book Back Questions and Answers, Notes, Chapter Wise Important Questions, Model Question Papers with Answers, Study Material, Question Bank and revise our understanding of the subject.

Students can also read Tamil Nadu 11th Computer Science Model Question Papers 2020-2021 English & Tamil Medium.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Book Solutions Answers Guide

Tamilnadu State Board Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Book Back Answers Solutions Guide Volume 1 and Volume 2.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Book Back Answers

Unit 1 Fundamentals of Computer and Working with a Typical Operating Systems (Windows & Linux)

Unit 2 Algorithmic Problem Solving

Unit 3 Introduction to C++

Unit 4 Object Oriented Programming with C++

Unit 5  Computer Ethics and Cyber Security

We hope these Tamilnadu State Board Samacheer Kalvi Class 11th Computer Science Book Solutions Answers Guide Volume 1 and Volume 2 Pdf Free Download in English Medium and Tamil Medium will help you get through your subjective questions in the exam.

Let us know if you have any concerns regarding TN State Board New Syllabus Samacheer Kalvi 11th Standard Computer Science Guide Pdf of Text Book Back Questions and Answers, Notes, Chapter Wise Important Questions, Model Question Papers with Answers, Study Material, Question Bank, drop a comment below and we will get back to you as soon as possible.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 11 Chemical Coordination and Integration

Tamilnadu State Board New Syllabus Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Pdf Chapter 11 Chemical Coordination and Integration Text Book Back Questions and Answers, Notes.

Tamilnadu Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter Chapter 11 Chemical Coordination and Integration

11th Bio Zoology Guide Chemical Coordination and Integration Text Book Back Questions and Answers

Part I

Question 1.
The maintenance of a constant internal environment is referred as
a) Regulation
b) homeostasis
c) Co-ordination
d) hormonal control
Answer:
b) homeostasis

Question 2.
Which of the following are exclusive endocrine glands?
a) Thymus and testis
b) adrenal and ovary
c) parathyroid and adrenal
d) pancreas and parathyroid
Answer:
c) parathyroid and adrenal

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 11 Chemical Coordination and Integration

Question 3.
Which of the following hormone is not secreted under the influence of the pituitary gland?
a) thyroxine
b) insulin
c) oestrogen
d) glucocorticoids
Answer:
b) insulin

Question 4.
Spermatogenesis in mammalian testes is controlled by
a) Luteinising hormone
b) Follicle-stimulating Hormone
c) FSH and prolactin
d) GH and prolactin
Answer:
b) Follicle-stimulating Hormone

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 11 Chemical Coordination and Integration

Question 5.
Serum calcium level is regulated by
a) Thyroxine
b) FSH
c) Pancreas
d) Thyroid and parathyroid
Answer:
d) Thyroid and parathyroid

Question 6.
Iodised salt is essential to prevent
a) rickets
b) scurvy
c) goiter
d) acromegaly
Answer:
c) goiter

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 11 Chemical Coordination and Integration

Question 7.
Which of the following gland is related to immunity?
a) Pineal gland
b) adrenal gland
c) thymus
d) parathyroid gland
Answer:
c) thymus

Question 8.
Which of the following statement about sex hormones is correct?
a) Testosterone is produced by Leydig ceils under the influence of the luteinizing hormone
b) Progesterone is secreted by corpus luteum and softens pelvic ligaments during childbirth
c) Oestrogen is secreted by both sertoli cells and corpus luteum
d) Progesterone produced by corpus luteum is biologically different from the one produced by the placenta.
Answer:
a) Testosterone is produced by Leydig cells under the influence of luteinizing hormone

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 11 Chemical Coordination and Integration

Question 9.
Hypersecretion of GH in children leads to
a) Cretinism
b) Gigantism
c) Graves disease
d) Tetany
Answer:
b) Gigantism

Question 10.
A pregnant female delivers a baby who suffers from stunted growth, mental retardation, low intelligence quotient, and abnormal skin. This is the result of
a) Low secretion of growth hormone
b) Cancer of the thyroid gland
c) Over secretion of pars distalis
d) Deficiency of iodine in the diet
Answer:
a) Low secretion of growth hormone

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 11 Chemical Coordination and Integration

Question 11.
The structure which connects the hypothalamus with the anterior lobe of the pituitary gland is the
a) Dendrites of the neurohypophysis
b) Axons of neuro hypophysis
c) Bands of white fibers from the cerebellar region
d) Hypophysial portal system
Answer:
d) Hypophysial portal system

Question 12.
Comment on homeostasis.
Answer:

  • Maintenance of constant internal environment of the body by the different co-ordinating system.
  • The maintenance of the constant internal environment of the body is due to the functioning of the endocrine system and nervous system.
    Endocrine gland.

1. a) If the calcium level in the blood decreases the parathyroid gland secretes parathyroid hormones and increases the calcium level in the blood.
b) If there is more calcium in the blood the other hormone secreted by the parathyroid gland called calcitonin acts against the parathormone and reduces calcium level.

2. a) The adrenalin secreted by the adrenal gland in emergency increases heartbeat rate and blood pressure.
b) The other hormone secreted by the adrenal is nor-adrenalin which reduces heartbeat rate and blood pressure.

Nervous system:
1. a) The sympathetic nervous system at the time of shock induces tear glands to secrete tears,
b) The parasympathetic nerve at the time of shock and emotion reduces the tear secretion.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 11 Chemical Coordination and Integration

Question 13.
Which one of the following statement is correct
a) Calcitonin and thymosin are thyroid hormones
b) Pepsin and prolactin are secreted in the stomach
c) Secretin and rhodopsin are polypeptide hormones
d) Cortisol and aldosterone are steroid hormones
Answer:
d) Cortisol and aldosterone are steroid hormones

Question 14.
Which of the given option shows all wrong statements for thyroid gland Statements?
i) It inhibits the process of RBC formation
ii) It helps in the maintenance of water and electrolytes
iii) It’s more secretion can reduce blood pressure
iv) It stimulates osteoblast
(a) (i) and (ii)
(b) (iii) and (iv)
(c) (i) and (iv)
(d) (i) and (iii)
Answer:
(d) (i) and (iii)

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 11 Chemical Coordination and Integration

Question 15.
Hormones are known as a chemical messengers. Justify.
Answer:
Hormones are released into the bloodstream and circulated as chemical signals. These act specifically on certain organs or tissues called target organs or tissues. These speed up or slow down or alter the activity of target tissues or organs. Hence they are known as chemical messengers.

Question 16.
Write the role of t-oestrogen in ovulation.
Answer:

  • Oestrogen hormones promote the growth of the ovarian follicle
  • While the follicles are growing it secretes the hormone oestrogen which in turn promotes the ovum to develop.
  • The shedding up of ovum at the Luteal phase takes place by the influence of the Luteinizing hormone.

Question 17.
Comment on Acini of the thyroid gland.
Answer:
The thyroid gland is a bilobed endocrine gland. Each lobe is made up of many lobules. The lobules consist of follicles called acini. Each acinus is lined with glandular, cuboidal, or squamous epithelial cells. The lumen of the acinus is filled with colloid, a thick glycoprotein mixture consisting of thyroglobulin molecules.

Question 18.
Write the causes for diabetes mellitus and diabetes insipidus.
Answer:

  • Diabetes emeritus: If the insulin is not secreted sufficiently the liver and muscles are unable to convert the glucose into glycogen. As a result, more glucose enters into the bloodstream raising the blood sugar level leads to diabetes mellitus.
  • Diabetes Insipidus: The hormone antidiuretic hormone is secreted by the neurohypophysis, which promotes reabsorption of water and thus reduces the loss of water through urine ADH deficiency induces the production of large amounts of urine leads to diabetes insipidus.

Question 19.
Specify the symptoms of acromegaly.
Answer:
Acromegaly is caused due to excessive secretion of growth hormone in adults. The symptoms of acromegaly are an overgrowth of hand bones, feet bones, jawbones malfunctioning of gonads. enlargement of viscera, tongue, lungs, heart, liver, spleen, and endocrine glands like thyroid, or adrenal glands.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 11 Chemical Coordination and Integration

Question 20.
Write the symptoms of cretinism.
Answer:
Decreased secretion of the thyroid (Hypothyroidism) causes cretinism. The cretins show retarded skeletal growth, absence of sexual maturity retarded mental ability thick wrinkled skin, protruded enlarged tongue bloated face, thick and short limbs occurs. The other symptoms are low BMR slow pulse rate, subnormal body temperature, and elevated blood cholesterol level.

Question 21.
Briefly explain the structure of the thyroid gland.
Answer:
The thyroid gland is butterfly-shaped, bilobed situated below the larynx on each side of the upper trachea. The two lobes are connected by a median tissue mass called isthmus. Each lobe is made up of many lobules. The lobules consist of follicles called acini. Each acinus is lined with glandular, cuboidal, or squamous epithelial cells.

The lumen of acini is filled with colloid, a thick glycoprotein mixture consisting of thyroglobulin molecules. The thyroid gland secretes Tri-iodothyronine (T,) and tetra-iodothyronine (T4) or thyroxine hormones. These are concerned with metabolism.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 11 Chemical Coordination and Integration 1

Question 22.
Name the layers of adrenal cortex and mention their secretions.
Answer:

  • The adrenal cortex has three layers namely Zona glomerulosa, Zona fasciculate and Zona reticulate. Zona glomerulosa which constitutes 15% of cortex is a thin outer layer secretes minerals corticoids
  • Zona fasciculate the middle widest layer constitutes 75% cortex and secretes gluco corticosteroids such as cortisol, corticosterone and small amount of adrenal androgen and oestrogen.
  • Zona reticulata an inner layer of adrenal cortex constitute about 19% of cortex and secretes adrenal androgen and small amount of estrogen and glucocorticoids.

Question 23.
Differentiate hyperglycemia from hypoglycemia.
Answer:
Hyper glycemia:
Hyperglycemia is condition in which there is increased blood glucose level, it may be due to the reduced secretion of insulin.

Hypo glycemia:
Hypoglycemia is a condition in which the blood glucose level decreases. It may be due to increased secretion of insulin there by reducing blood glucose level.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 11 Chemical Coordination and Integration

Question 24.
Write the functions of (CCK)- Cholecystokinin.
Answer:
CholecystokininCholecystokinin is secreted by duodenum in response to the presence of fat and acid in the diet. It acts on the gall bladder to release bile into duodenum and stimulates the secretion of pancreatic enzymes and its discharge.

Question 25.
Growth hormone is important for normal growth. Justify the statement.
Answer:
Growth hormone promotes growth of all the tissues and metabolic process of the cell. The growth hormone stimulates the growth in the following ways

  • It influences the metabolism of carbohydrate proteins and lipids.
  • It increases the rate of protein biosynthesis.
  • It stimulates cartilage formation of condrogenesis.
  • It stimulates bone formation osteogenesis.
  • It helps in the retention of minerals like nitrogen, potassium, phosphorous sodium in the body.
  • It increases the release of fatty acid from adipose tissue.
  • It decreases the rate of glucose utilization for energy by the cell, by which it conserves glucose for glucose dependent tissues such as the brain.

Question 26.
Pineal gland is an endocrine gland, write its role.
Answer:
The pineal gland or epiphysis cerebri or conarium is located behind the third ventricle of brain. It is formed of paranchymal cells and interstitial cells. It secretes the hormone, melatonin.

It plays a central role in the regulation of circadian rhythm of our body and maintains normal sleep-wake cycle. It also regulates the timing of sexual maturation of gonads. It also influences metabolism, pigmentation, menstrual cycle and defence mechanism of our body.

Question 27.
Comment on the functions of adrenalin.
Answer:

  • Adrenalin increases liver glycogen breakdown into glucose and increases the release of fatty acids from fat cells.
  • During emergency it increases heart beat rate and blood pressure.
  • It stimulates the smooth muscles of cutaneous and visceral arteries to decrease blood flow.
  • It increases blood flow to the skeletal muscles there by increases the metabolic rate of skeletal muscles cardiac muscles and nervous tissues.

Question 28.
Predict the effects of removal of Pancreas from the human body.
Answer:
Pancreas is both exocrine and endocrine gland. It is located just below the stomach as a leaf like structure. It secretes digestive enzymes and hormones like insulin and glucogon.

The digestive enzymes digest carbohydrates, proteins and fats. Insulin and glucose regulate blood sugar level. If pancreas is removed from the body, digestion and main’taince of blood sugar level gets afftected.

Question 29.
Enumerate the role of kidney as an endocrine gland.
Answer:

  • Kidney is a partial endocrine gland. Kidney secretes hormones such as renin, erythropoietin and calcitriol.
  • Renin is secreted by Juxta glomerular cells (JG) which increase blood pressure when angiotensin is formed in blood.
  • Erythropoietin is also secreted by JGA cells of the kidney and stimulates the formation of RBC in bone marrow known as erythropoiesis.
  • Calcitriol is secreated by proximal tubules of nephron, it is an active form of vitamin D3 which promotes calcium and phosphorus absorption from intestine and accelerates bone formation.

Part – II.

11th Bio Zoology Guide Chemical Coordination and Integration Additional Important Questions and Answers

I. Choose The Correct Answer

Question 1.
Where is hormones released ifito?
a) Mouth
b) Blood
c) Digestive system
d) Kidney
Answer:
b) Blood

Question 2.
Find out the endocrine glands from the following.
a) Sebaceous gland
b) Sweat glands
c) Salivary glands
d) Thyroid gland
Answer:
d) Thyroid gland

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 11 Chemical Coordination and Integration

Question 3.
Which is called as master endocrine glands?
a) Hypothalamus
b) Pituitary gland
c) Thyroid gland
d) Thymus
Answer:
b) Pituitary gland

Question 4.
Where is pituitary situated?
a) On the ethmoid bone
b) On sella turcica
c) On the foramen of Monro
d) On the Rathkes packet
Answer:
b) On sella turcica

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 11 Chemical Coordination and Integration

Question 5.
The retention of nitrogen is due to this hormone.
a) TSH
b) GH
c) FSH
d) ACTH
Answer:
b) GH

Question 6.
Find out the wrong statement related with growth hormone.
1. a) It stimulates cartilage formation
2. b) It releases the fattyacid from adipose tissue
3. c) It increases the glucose utilization in the cells
4. d) It stimulates the carbohydrate synthesis
Answer:
4. d) It stimulates the carbohydrate synthesis

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 11 Chemical Coordination and Integration

Question 7.
A male child is born to a parents as he grown if FSH and LH is not properly secreted what happens to the male child.
a) He grows as a normal male child
b) He grows and he shows stunted growth
c) Secondary sexual characters are not developed properly
d) He grows as a mentally depressed male
Answer:
c) Secondary sexual characters are not developed properly

Question 8.
These hormones are collectively known as Gonodotropins?
a) Oxytocin and ADH
b) Oestrogen and Progestron
c) Testosteron and androgens
d) FSH and LH
Answer:
d) FSH and LH

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 11 Chemical Coordination and Integration

Question 9.
The day and night rhythm is controlled by this hormone.
a) Melonocytes
b) Melanin
c) Melotonin
d) Thyroxine
Answer:
c) Melotonin

Question 10.
Prabhu is working in a MNC Company. He has to do night shift once in every fifteen days.
Aftern a few years he is suffering from sleeplessness (in somnia) What may be the cause of his problem.
a) It may be becauses of his nature of work
b) More work pressure
c) The sleepwake cycle is disturbed due to the irregular synthesis of melotonin hormone
d) Due to the metabolic disturbances
Answer:
c) The sleepwake cycle is disturbed due to the irregular synthesis of melotonin hormone

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 11 Chemical Coordination and Integration

Question 11.
Name the structure that connects the lobes of thyroid gland?
a) Acinus
b) Ischium
c) Isthmus
d) bridge tissue
Answer:
c) Isthmus

Question 12.
Name the element helps in the synthesis of thyroxine.
a) Iron
b) Calcium
c) Iodine
d) Sodium
Answer:
c) Iodine

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 11 Chemical Coordination and Integration

Question 13.
Assertion: The Oxyphil cells of parathyroid secrete parathormone
Reason: The chief cells of parathyroid regulates the synthesis of parathormone
a) Assertion and Reason are correct
b) Assertion incorrect and reason is wrong
c) The assertion is true. The reason is false
d) Both the assertion and reason are false.
Answer:
d) Both the assertion and reason are false.

Question 14.
Which of the functional features of hormone is not correctly matched with its description?
a) Thyroid gland hormones often called the major metabolic hormones.
b) Thyro calcitonin increases the blood calcium level
c) The adrenalin is the emergency hormone.
d) The functions of oxyphil cells are not known.
Answer:
b) Thyro calcitonin increases the blood calcium level

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 11 Chemical Coordination and Integration

Question 15.
Which of the following option shows the with its action matched hormones
(given in column I) (given in column II)

Column I Column II
A Pituitary i) Partial endocrine gland
B Thyroid ii) Secretes steroid hormone oestrogen
C Ovary iii) Thyroxine regulates basal metabolic rate
D Thymus iv) Anterior lobe of pituitary originate from Rathke’s pouch

a) A – ii; B – iv; C – i; D – iii
b) A – iv ; B – iii; C – ii; D – i
c) A – iii; B – ii; C – iv; D – i
d) A – iv; B – i; C – iii; D – ii
Answer:
b) A – iv ; B – iii; C – ii; D – i

Question 16.
These are known as supra-renal glands.
a) Thymus gland
b) Pancreas
c) Adrenal gland
d) Ovary
Answer:
c) Adrenal gland

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 11 Chemical Coordination and Integration

Question 17.
Find out the hormone which are catecholamines.
a) Thyroxine
b) Insulin
c) Adrenalin
d) Glucagon
Answer:
c) Adrenalin

Question 18.
Why there is an accumulation of ketone bodies in blood of diabetic melitus patients?
a) due to the excessive consumption of liquids
b) break down of fat in to glucose
c) conversion of glucose from protein
c) due to excessive in take of food
Answer:
b) break down of fat in to glucose

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 11 Chemical Coordination and Integration

Question 19.
This hormone promotes the activation of Vitamin D thus by absorbing calcium?
a) Calcitonin
b) Thymosin
c) Parathormone
d) Thyroxine
Answer:
c) Parathormone

Question 20.
Which part of pancreas is act as a exocrine gland?
a) Globules
b) islets of Langerhans
c) Acinus
d) Globlets
Answer:
c) Acinus

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 11 Chemical Coordination and Integration

Question 21.
Name the cells that secrete somatostatin
a) a cells
b) b cells
c) Lampda cells
d) delta cells
Answer:
d) delta cells

Question 22.
Why is insulin tablet not advisable for chronic diabetic mellitus patients?
a) It takes more time to act
b) The insulin find it difficult to reach the substrate
c) Insulin is easily digested by the digestive enzymes
d) The insulin is not a effective one.
Answer:
c) Insulin is easily digested by the digestive enzymes

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 11 Chemical Coordination and Integration

Question 23.
This hormone is involved in the cyclic changes of menstruation.
a) Testosterone
b) Pitocin
c) Oestrogen
d) Progesterone
Answer:
c) Oestrogen

Question 24.
Contraction of uterus leads to miscarriages in a pregnant womens.
What would be administered to evacuate the embryo?
a) ADH
b) Vasopressin
c) Androgen
d) Oxytocin
Answer:
d) Oxytocin

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 11 Chemical Coordination and Integration

Question 25.
In the case of thyrotecdomic patients what is advisable to given along with the thyroxine?
a) Insulin
b) Thyroglobulin
c) Parathormone
d) Adrenalin
Answer:
c) Parathormone

Question 26.
If a doctor finds a high level of atrial natriuretic factor in the blood of a patient what he will suspect?
a) A patient is suffering from in sufficient oxygen supply
b) A patient will have a heart attack due to high blood pressure
c) Suspecting depression problem
d) Many develop thrombosis
Answer:
b) A patient will have a heart attack due to high blood pressure

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 11 Chemical Coordination and Integration

Question 27.
Name the hormone that stimulates the synthesis of HCl.
a) Enterokinase
b) Pepsinogen
c) Gastrin
d) Secretin
Answer:
c) Gastrin

Question 28.
What is the other name for type I diabetes?
a) Insulin dependent diabetes
b) Non-insulin dependent diabetes
c) Sensitive diabetes
d) Dependent types
Answer:
a) Insulin dependent diabetes

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 11 Chemical Coordination and Integration

Question 29.
Which is called as second messenger.
a) Receptor cells
b) CAMP
c) Adenylate
d) Substrate
Answer:
b) CAMP

Question 30.
In the following diagram what are the parts A, B, C and D representing?
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 11 Chemical Coordination and Integration 2
I) A) Pineal body B) Anterior tube C) Capillary bed D) Infundibulum
II) A) Hypophyseal vein B) Optic chiasma C) Endocrine cells D) Artery
III) A) Infundibuim B) Posterior C) Hypophyseal vein D) Endocrine cells
IV) A) Endocrine cells B) Infundibulum C) Paradisaical D) Pineal body
Answer:
III) A) Infundibuim B) Posterior C) Hypophyseal vein D) Endocrine cells

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 11 Chemical Coordination and Integration

Question 31.
Find out the true and false statements from the following and on that basis find the correct answer.
i) ADH causes blood vessels to dialate
ii) The ‘c’ cells of thyroid gland secretes calcitonin
iii) Zona fasciculate secretes cortisol
iv) Minerals corticoids regulate water balance
i) a) True b) False c) True
ii) a) False b) True c) False
iii) a) False b) True c) False
iv) a) False b) False c) True
Answer:
iv) a) False b) False c) True

Question 32.
Which part interlinks both the nervous system and endocrine system?
a) Receptor molecules
b) Target tissue
c) Hypothalamus
d) Infundibulum
Answer:
c) Hypothalamus

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 11 Chemical Coordination and Integration

Question 33.
Which of the following disease is not caused by iodine or thyroxine deficiency?
a) Sporodic goitre
b) Exophthalmic goitre
c) Simple goitre
d) Myxodema
Answer:
a) Sporodic goitre

Question 34.
Which is the correct location of the receptors of the hormones?
a) Extracellular matrix
b) Blood
c) Plasma membrane
d) Nucleus
Answer:
c) Plasma membrane

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 11 Chemical Coordination and Integration

Question 35.
The primary target of the hormones of hypothalamus is
a) pineal gland
b) thymus
c) testis
d) pituitary
Answer:
d) pituitary

Question 36.
Functionally the adenohypophysis of pituitary gland includes
a) anterior lobe
b) Posterior lobe
c) intermediate lobe
d) both (a) and (c)
Answer:
d) both (a) and (c)

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 11 Chemical Coordination and Integration

Question 37.
An outgrowth of hypothalamus from the base of the brain develops into
a) pars nervosa
b) pars intermedia
c) pars distalis
d) pars intermedia
Answer:
a) pars nervosa

Question 38.
The hormone secreted by neurohypophysis is
a) ACTH
b) ADH
c) GH
d) TSH
Answer:
b) ADH

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 11 Chemical Coordination and Integration

Question 39.
Among the following hormones which is the peptide hormone.
a) GH
b) TSH
c) FSH
d) LH
Answer:
a) GH

Question 40.
Among the following which is not a glycoprotein hormone.
a) TSH
b) LTH
c) LH
d) FSH
Answer:
b) LTH

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 11 Chemical Coordination and Integration

Question 41.
Find out the protein hormone from the following.
a) LTH
b) FSH
c) TSH
d) ACTH
Answer:
a) LTH

Question 42.
Which is the pituitary hormone that is present in other vertebrates?
a) MSH
b) ACTH
c) TSH
d) GH
Answer:
a) MSH

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 11 Chemical Coordination and Integration

Question 43.
Find out the wrong statement about vasopressin or ADH
a) It promotes re-absorption of water and electrolytes by distal tubules of nephron.
b) Causes constriction of blood vessels
c) It stimulates vigorous contraction of smooth muscles of uterus during child birth
d) It is a peptide hormone
Answer:
c) It stimulates vigorous contraction of smooth muscles of uterus during child birth

Question 44.
The growth hormone releasing hormone stimulates the
a) Thymus to release the hormone
b) Pituitary for synthesis and release of growth hormone
c) Testis to release gonadotropin
d) Adrenal to release growth hormone
Answer:
b) Pituitary for synthesis and release of growth hormone

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 11 Chemical Coordination and Integration

Question 45.
Posterior pituitary secretion is controlled by
a) hypothalamic hypophyseal portal blood vessel
b) neuro endocrine gland
c) hypophysis
d) hypothalamic hypophyseal axis
Answer:
d) hypothalamic hypophyseal axis

Assertion and Reason:- Directions: In the following questions a statement of Assertion is followed by a statement of reason. Mark the correct choice as;
a) If both Assertion and reason are true and reason is the correct explanation of assertion
b) If both Assertion and reason and true but reason is not the correct explanation of Assertion.
c) If assertion is true but reason is false
d) If both Assertion and reason are false

Question 46.
Assertion: Adrenalin nor-adrenalin, melatonin and thyroid hormones are proteins
Reason: Derived from cholesterol mostly water soluble
Answer:
d) If both Assertion and reason are false

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 11 Chemical Coordination and Integration

Question 47.
Assertion: Growth hormone stimulates chondrogenesis and osteogenesis
Reason: Growth hormones promote growth of all tissues and metabolic process of the body.
Answer:
a) If both Assertion and reason are true and reason is the correct explanation of assertion

Question 48.
Assertion: Adrenal medulla hormones are referred as 3F hormones fight, flight and hormones.
Reason: During emergency it increases heart beat rate and blood pressure
Answer:
a) If both Assertion and reason are true and reason is the correct explanation of assertion

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 11 Chemical Coordination and Integration

Question 49.
Assertion: The effects of aldosterone, oestrogen FSH are long lived as they alter the amount of m- RNA and protein in a cell
Reason: The action of cAMP are terminated by phosphodiesterases
Answer:
b) If both Assertion and reason and true but reason is not the correct explanation of Assertion.

Question 50.
Assertion: The immunity of old age people, becomes week and causes sickness.
Reason: Due to degeneration of pineal gland thymosin level decreases
Answer:
c) If assertion is true but reason is false

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 11 Chemical Coordination and Integration

Question 51.
Assertion: JGA cells of the kidney stimulates erythropoiesis or formation of RBC
Reason: JGA cells also secrete Erythropoietin
Answer:
a) If both Assertion and reason are true and reason is the correct explanation of assertion

Question 52.
Assertion: Diabetes inspidus is marked by production of large amount of urine.
Reason: Hypo secretion of ADH leads to a condition of reduced water absorption. Thus the urine becomes diluted without sugar or glucose
Answer:
a) If both Assertion and reason are true and reason is the correct explanation of assertion

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 11 Chemical Coordination and Integration

Question 53.
The Luteinizing hormone in males is
a) Testosterone
b) ICSH
c) FSH
d) LTH
Answer:
b) ICSH

Question 54.
The cells that secrete parathyroid hormone is knows as
a) chief cells
b) oxyphil cells
c) goblet
d) both b and c cells
Answer:
a) chief cells

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 11 Chemical Coordination and Integration

Question 55.
Find out the correct statement about pineal gland.
a) Stimulates the production and release of sperms.
b) Increases blood pressure.
c) It plays a central role and the regulation of circadian rhythm of our body and maintains the normal sleep wake cycle.
d) It is about 1cm in diameter and 0.5gm.
Answer:
c) It plays a central role and the regulation of circadian rhythm of our body and maintains the normal sleep wake cycle.

Question 56.
The BMR is regulated by
a) Parathormone
b) Thyrocalcitonin
c) Adrenalin
d) Thyroxine
Answer:
d) Thyroxine

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 11 Chemical Coordination and Integration

Question 57.
The primary function of thymus gland is
a) regulation of body temperature
b) regulation of body growth
c) immunological functions
d) Secretion of thyrotropin
Answer:
c) immunological functions

Question 58.
A hormone secreted by adrenal gland and called life-saving hormone is
a) adrenaline
b) cortisone
c) aldosterone
d) Cortisol
Answer:
d) Cortisol

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 11 Chemical Coordination and Integration

Question 59.
Which of the following condition is not linked to a deficiency of thyroid hormone?
a) cretinism
b) goitre
c) Myxoedema
d) Exophthalmia
Answer:
d) Exophthalmia

Question 60.
Androgens are sex corticoids secreted from
a) Zona reticulate
b) Adrenal medulla
c) Zona glomerulosa
d) Acini
Answer:
a) Zona reticulate

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 11 Chemical Coordination and Integration

Question 61.
A gland which is well developed in newborn child and produce lymphocytes
a) Thyroid gland
b) Thymus
c) Parathyroid gland
d) Pineal gland
Answer:
b) Thymus

Question 62.
Which one reduces the blood calcium level and shows an opposite effect to parathormone?
a) ADH
b) Insulin
c) Thyrocalcitonin
d) Thyroxine
Answer:
c) Thyrocalcitonin

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 11 Chemical Coordination and Integration

Question 63.
Secretion of HCl and pepsinogen is controlled by
a) Cholecystokinin
b) Gastrin
c) Calcitriol
d) Renin
Answer:
b) Gastrin

Question 64.
A man has an IQ equivalent to that of a boy 5 years old this is due to the deficiency of which hormone?
a) Thyroxine
b) Adrenaline
c) Aldosterone
d) Somatotropin
Answer:
a) Thyroxine

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 11 Chemical Coordination and Integration

Question 65.
Which of the following option shows the correct matching of disorder’s and causes.
A) Addison’s disease -(i) Hypo secretion of thyroid
B) Cushing’s syndrome – (ii) Hyper secretion of parathyroid hormone
C) Softening of bone – (iii) Hypo secretion of gluco corticoids
D) Gull’s disease (in adults) – (iv) Excess secretion of cortisol
Codes:
a) A – (ii); B – (i); C – (iii); D – (iv)
b) A – (iii); B – (iv); C – (ii); D – (i)
c) A – (iii); B – (ii); C – (i); D – (iv)
d) A – (iv); B – (iii); C – (iv); D – (ii)
Answer:
b) A – (iii); B – (iv); C – (ii); D – (i)

Question 66.
A person is having problems with calcium and phosphorous metabolism in his body.
Which one of the following glands may not be functioning.
a) Parathyroid
c) Pancreas
b) Parotid
d) Thyroid
Answer:
a) Parathyroid

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 11 Chemical Coordination and Integration

Question 67.
Presence of fat and acid in the diet induces the secretion of
a) Gastrin
b) Secretion
c) Cholecystokinin
d) Calcitrol
Answer:
c) Cholecystokinin

Question 68.
Which is an amino acid derivative hormone?
a) Epinephrine
c) Progesterone
b) Oestrogen
d) Relaxin
Answer:
a) Epinephrine

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 11 Chemical Coordination and Integration

Question 69.
Which of the following is a mineralococticoid?
a) Testosterone
b) Cortisol
c) Adrenalin
d) Aldosterone
Answer:
d) Aldosterone

Question 70.
Which hormone increases the rate of protein biosynthesis chondrogenesis and osteogenesis and helps in the retention of minerals?
a) Prolactin
b) Somatotrophic hormone
c) Thyrotropin
d) Glucagon
Answer:
b) Somatotrophic hormone

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 11 Chemical Coordination and Integration

Question 71.
The male sex hormones are secreted by
a) Zona glomerulosa
b) Fat cells
c) Lay-dig cells
d) Acini
Answer:
c) Lay-dig cells

Question 72.
Which of the following pituitary hormone is secreted without the involvement of a releasing hormone?
a) Thyrotropin
b) Follicle stimulating hormone
c) Oxytocin
d) Prolactin
Answer:
c) Oxytocin

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 11 Chemical Coordination and Integration

Question 73.
Match the following columns.

Column I Column II
A Melatonin 1. T-lymphocyte formation
B Thymus 2. Formation of RBC
C Insulin 3. Sleep wake cycle
D Trythropoietin 4. Hypoglycemic hormone

Code:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 11 Chemical Coordination and Integration 3
Answer:
b) A -3,B-1,C-4,D-2

Question 74.
Which hormones can easily pass through the cell membrane and bind to their receptors and alter gene function?
a) Peptide hormones
b) Amino acid derived hormones
c) Neuro hormones
d) Steroid hormones
Answer:
d) Steroid hormones

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 11 Chemical Coordination and Integration

Question 75.
The hormone which helps to find out conception is
a) FSH
b) Oestrogen
c) HCG
d) LH
Answer:
c) HCG

Question 76.
Gigantism and Acromegaly are due to
a) Hypothyroidism
b) Hyperthyroidism
c) Hypopituitarism
d) Hyper pitituitarism
Answer:
d) Hyper pitituitarism

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 11 Chemical Coordination and Integration

Question 77.
After performing the functions in the target organs how hormones are inactivated and excreted?
a) By intestine
b) By lungs and skin
c) By liver and Kidney
d) Both a and b
Answer:
c) By liver and Kidney

Question 78.
The half life period of insulin is
a) 6 minutes
b) 8 minutes
c) 15 minutes
d) 7 minutes
Answer:
a) 6 minutes

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 11 Chemical Coordination and Integration

Question 79.
The time taken by insulin to be cleared from circulation is
a) 10 -20 minutes
b) 10-15 minutes
c) 5 – 10 minutes
d) 2-10 minutes
Answer:
b) 10-15 minutes

(2 Marks)

II. Very Short Answer.

Question 1.
What is the causes of bone cyst formation?
Answer:
Hyper para thyrodism causes demineralisation of bone causes bone cyst makes the bone fragile and soft.

Question 2.
Why is the hypothalamus considered a neuroendocrine gland?
Answer:
The hypothalamus alone with its neural function produces hormones. Hence it is considered a neuroendocrine gland.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 11 Chemical Coordination and Integration

Question 3.
What is the meaning of the word hormone?
Answer:
Hormone means to excite.

Question 4.
Write on the origin of the pituitary gland?
Answer:
The anterior lobe of the pituitary gland originates from the embryonic invagination of the pharyngeal epithelium called Rathke’s pouch. The posterior lobe originates from the base of the brain as an outgrowth of the hypothalamus.

Question 5.
What is meant by Homeostasis?
Answer:
Maintenance of constant internal environment of the body by the different co-ordinating system is homeostasis.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 11 Chemical Coordination and Integration

Question 6.
What is Pars nervosa?
Answer:
The neurohypophysis of the pituitary gland is known as pars nervosa.

Question 7.
Give example for partial endocrine glands.
Answer:
Pancreas, gastrointestinal tract epithelium kidney, heart gonads and placenta.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 11 Chemical Coordination and Integration

Question 8.
Write a paragraph on the Growth Hormone?
Answer:
Growth hormone (GH):
It is also known as somatotropic hormone (STH) or Somatotropin. It is a peptide hormone Growth hormone promotes the growth of all the tissues and metabolic processes of the body. It influences the metabolism of carbohydrates, proteins, and lipids and increases the rate of protein biosynthesis in the cells.

It stimulates chondrogenesis (cartilage formation), osteogenesis (bone formation) and helps in the retention of minerals like nitrogen, potassium, phosphorus, sodium, etc., in the body. GH increases the release of fatty acid from adipose tissue and decreases the rate of glucose utilization for energy by the cells. Thus it conserves glucose for glucose-dependent tissues, such as the brain.

Question 9.
Name the hormone of peptide nature?
Answer:
Insulin, glucagon and pituitary hormone which are water soluble.

Question 10.
What are steroid hormones.
Answer:
They are derived from cholesterol and are lipid soluble.
Ex. Cortisol aldosterone testosterone oestrogen progesterone.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 11 Chemical Coordination and Integration

Question 11.
What is the role of Follicle stimulating hormone in man?
Answer:
In male FSH acts on the germinal epithelium of semi niferous tubules and stimulates the production and release of sperms.

Question 12.
What is the function of LH in female?
Answer:
LH induces ovulation maintains the corpus luteum and promotes the synthesis and release of ovarian hormones.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 11 Chemical Coordination and Integration

Question 13.
Why there is a short life span for hormone-like insulin?
Answer:
Insulin hormone is usually short lived as it has to work through second messenger (cAMP) system.

Question 14.
Why the hormones steroid may be long-lived?
Answer:
The effect of steroid hormones are long lived as they alter the amount of mRNA and protein in a cell.
Ex. Aldosterone oestrogen FSH.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 11 Chemical Coordination and Integration

Question 15.
How do the hormones reach and act on the specific target organs?
Answer:

  • The hormones are released into the blood and circulated as chemical signals
  • The target organs contain receptor molecules either on the surface or within the cell.
  • The cells that contain the receptor molecules specific for the hormone are physiologically activated.
  • Where as other hormones that come in contact can not be activated.

Question 16.
Name the three zones which are present in the Adrenal gland.
Answer:

  1. Zona glomerulosa
  2. Zona fasciculata
  3. Zona reticularis

Question 17.
Differentiate amines and steroid hormones
Answer:

Amines Steroids
A. Small water soluble 1. Mostly lipid soluble
B. Derived from tyrosine or tryptophan 2. Derived from Cholesterol
C. Examples are Adrenalin Nor adrenalin, Melatonin and thyroid hormone 3. Examples are cortisol, aldosterone, testosterone, oestrogen and progesterone

Question 18.
Differentiate exocrine glands from endocrine glands.
Answer:

Exocrine glands Endocrine glands
1. They have ducts to carry their substances to the membrane surfaces 1. These lack ducts and so release their hormone to the surrounding tissue fluid
2. They secrete enzymes, saliva and sweat 2. Their secretions are collectively termed as hormones.
3. Eg. Salivary gland, Sweat gland and Gastric glands 3. Eg. Pituitary, Thyroid Pineal, Adrenal Parathyroid

Question 19.
How endocrine glands be classified based on their secretary function?
Answer:

  • Exclusive endocrine glands, e.g. Pituitary thyroid, Parathyroid, Pineal, Adrenal
  • Neuro endocrine gland – Hypothalamus
  • Partial endocrine glands, e.g. Pancreas, gastro intestinal tract epithelium, kidney, heart gonads and placenta – have endocrine tissues.

Question 20.
Pituitary gland is known as master endocrine glands. Justify the statement.
Answer:

  • Pituitary gland is known as master endocrine gland, but it is in turn controlled by the hypothalamus and so the statement may not be totally applicable.
  • The hypothalamus with its neuro secretary cells produces neuro transmitters which regulate the secretions of the pituitary.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 11 Chemical Coordination and Integration

Question 21.
Write about the location and dimension of pituitary gland.
Answer:

  • The pituitary gland is located in the bony cavity of the sphenoid bone the sella tursica at the base of brain so is also called hypothalamus cerebri
  • it is about one centimeter in diameter and 0.5gm in weight.

Question 22.
What is infundibulum?
Answer:
The pituitary gland is connected to the hypothalamic region of the brain by a stalk called infundibulum.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 11 Chemical Coordination and Integration

Question 23.
What is Rathke’s pouch?
Answer:
The anterior lobe of pituitary originates the embryonic invagination of pharyngeal epithelium called Rathke’s pouch.

Question 24.
Comment on MSH or Melanocyte stimulating hormone.
Answer:

  • In mammals role of Pass intermedia is insignificant.
  • In other vertebrates pass intermedia secretes melanocyte stimulating hormone or MSH.
  • It induces pigmentation in the skin.

Question 25.
What are the functions of pineal gland?
Answer:
In human, the pineal gland or epiphysis cerebri or conarium is located behind the third ventricle of brain and is formed of parenchymal cells and interstitial cells.

It secretes the hormone, melatonin, which plays a central role in the regulation of circadian rhythm of our body and maintains the normal sleep-wake cycle. It also regulates the timing of sexual maturation of gonads. In addition, melatonin also influences metabolism, pigmentation, menstrual cycle and defence mechanism of our body.

Question 26.
What are the other names of Luteotropic hormone?
Answer:

  1. Luteotropin
  2. Lactogenic hormone
  3. Proloctein
  4. Mammotropin

Question 27.
Name the hormones that their secretions are regulated by negative feed back mechanisms?
Answer:

  • Thyroid stimulating hormone TSH or Thyrotropin
  • Adreno corticotropic hormone or ACTH

Question 28.
Give the meanings of the word pituitary oxytocin and Hormone?
Answer:

  1. Pituitary means “to grow under”.
  2. Oxytocin means “quick birth”.
  3. Hormone means “to excite”.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 11 Chemical Coordination and Integration

Question 29.
Mention the importance of Luteotropic hormone in females?
Answer:
It stimulates milk secretion after the child birth.

Question 30.
Why prolactin is called luteotropic hormone?
Answer:

  • High prolactin secretion during lactation
  • Since it induces the corpus luteum hence named as luteotropic hormone.

Question 31.
Point out the role of oxytocin in females?
Answer:

  • It stimulates vigorous contraction of the smooth muscles of uterus during child birth.
  • Ejection of milk from the mammary glands after child birth.

Question 32.
Name the hormones that play a key role in milk secretion?
Answer:

  • Prolactin or lactogenic hormone or mammotropin or luteotropic hormone.
  • Oxytocin.

Question 33.
Name the hormone of pituitary that act on bloodvessels?
Answer:
The vasopressin causes constriction of blood vessels when released in large amount and in-creases blood pressure.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 11 Chemical Coordination and Integration

Question 34.
Which gland is located behind the third ventricle of brain?
Answer:
The pineal gland or epiphysis cerebri or conarium.

Question 35.
Which is the largest endocrine in the body and where it is located?
Answer:

  • The thyroid gland is the largest gland.
  • It is a bibbed gland located below the larynx on each side of upper trachea.

Question 36.
Name the hormones secreted by thyroid gland.
Answer:

  • Tri-iodo thyronine or T3
  • Tetra-iodo thyromne or T4 or Thyroxine
  • Thyrocalcitonin

Question 37.
What are parafollicular cells or ‘C’ cells?
Answer:

  • These are the cells in the thyroid gland.
  • These cells secrete a hormone called thyrocalcitonin.

Question 38.
What element is important for synthesis of thyroid hormones? In what quantity it is essential?
Answer:

  • Iodine is essential for the normal synthesis of thyroid hormones.
  • About 1m. a week of Iodine is required.

Question 39.
Mention the normal glucose level in prepandial and postpandial test for glucose?
Answer:

  1. Prepandial- 70-100 mg/dl (Fasting)
  2. Post pandial (About 2 hours after food) – 110 – 140mg/ dl.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 11 Chemical Coordination and Integration

Question 40.
Is it advisable to take alcohol frequently? What ill effects does it cause over the body?
Answer:

  • Alcohol consumption has widespread effect on endocrine system.
  • It impairs the regulation of blood glucose level.
  • More over it reduces the testosterone level
  • Increases the risk of osteoporosis.

Question 41.
What is the injection administered to diabetic patients? Why is it given as injection and not as oral pills?
Answer:

  • Humiline-N is administered to diabetic patients.
  • Human insulin is administered as injection and not by oral consumption.
  • The reason is if it is administered by oral consumption it may be digested by digestive enzymes.

Question 42.
What is sporadic goiter?
Answer:

  • It is a genetic disease
  • It is not caused by iodine or thyroxine deficiency.

Question 43.
Why laughing is good for health?
Answer:
It reduces the secretion of stress hormone, adrenalin and makes us to relax.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 11 Chemical Coordination and Integration

Question 44.
Define circadian rhythm.
Answer:
It is the 24-hour cycle of biological activities associated with natural periods of light and darkness.
Eg. Sleep wake cycle, body temperature, appetite etc.

(3 Marks)

III. Short Answer

Question 1.
What is simple goiter? What are its symptoms?
Answer:

  • Simple goitre is otherwise known as endemic goitre.
  • It is due to the hypo secretion of thyroxine.
  • The symptoms are Enlargement of thyroid gland, Fall in serum thyroxine level, Increased TSH secretion.

Question 2.
What is tetany?
Answer:

  • The hyposecretion of parathyroid hormones leads to a decrease in calcium level and increase in phosphate level, it causes.
  • convulsion in muscle, locking of jaws, increased heart beat rate increased body temperature muscular spasm lead to tetany.

Question 3.
What is cushing’s syndrome? What are its symptoms?
Answer:
The excess secretion of cortisol causes cushing’s syndrome. The symptoms are obesity of the face and trunk.

  1. Redness of face hand and feet.
  2. Thick skin.
  3. Excessive hair growth
  4. Loss of mineral from bone
  5. Systolic hypertension

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 11 Chemical Coordination and Integration

Question 4.
What is the cause of dwarfism?
Answer:
It is due to the hypo-secretion of growth hormone in children in which skeletal growth and sexual maturity is arrested. They attain a maximum height of 4 feet only.

Question 5.
What is Gigantism?
Answer:

  • Due to the hyper-secretion of growth hormone in children there is a over growth of skeletal
  • structure may occur up to 8 feet height. The visceral growth is not appropriate with that of limbs.

Question 6.
You are walking on the road, suddenly a man with a knife in his hand comes in front of you. What would be your reaction?
Answer:
I will get bimple goose due to the Surge of vasodielation on the arector pili muscle and though, i am very much frightened, i will fight with that man. i will get that energy by the action of the hormone adrenalin.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 11 Chemical Coordination and Integration

Question 7.
Why oxytocin is considered as quick or rapid birth?
Answer:
Oxytocin stimulates the contraction of the smooth muscles of uterus during child birth which helps in the expulsion of foetus, hence it is called as quick birth.

Question 8.
Why thymus is considered as a lymphoid organ?
Answer:
Thy lymphocytes that comes to thymus is educated to become immuno competent T lymphocytes and provides cell mediated immunity. Hence thymus is a lymphoid organ.

Question 9.
Why is gluco corticoids considered in the life saving activity?
Answer:
During the period of emergency the gluco corticoids stimulate the synthesis of glucose from lipid and protein by lipolysis and proteolysis and releases energy to meet that emergency situation.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 11 Chemical Coordination and Integration

Question 10.
Why cortisol works as a stress combat hormone?
Answer:

  • Cortisone involved in maintaining cardio vascular and kidney functions. It produces anti inflammatory reactions and suppresses the immune response, it stimulates the RBC production.
  • Hence it is known as stress combat hormone.

Question 11.
How do the hormones act in the target tissue?
Answer:

  • The hormones are released into the blood and circulated as chemical signals and act on specific target organs.
  • Hormones may speed up or slow down or alter the activity of the target organs.
  • The hormones secreted do not remain permanently in the blood.
  • They are converted by the liver into inactive compound and excreted by kidneys.

Question 12.
What is a limbic system?
Answer:

  • It is a collection of special structures located in the middle of the brain.
  • It is also known as paleo mammalian brain.
  • It controls emotions, behavior, motivation of long term memory and olfaction.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 11 Chemical Coordination and Integration

Question 13.
What are exocrine glands? Give examples
Answer:

  • The exocrine glands have ducts to carry their secretion to the membrane surfaces.
  • They secrete enzymes, saliva arid sweat.
  • Examples are salivary gland, gastric gland.

Question 14.
Write down the functions of hypothalamus.
Answer:

  1. Hypothalamic hormones control anterior pituitary secretion through hypothalamic hypophyseal portal blood vessel.
  2. The nerve signal produced by the hypothalamic hypophyseal axis control the posterior pituitary secretion.
  3. Hypothalamus maintains homeostasis.
  4. Blood pressure
  5. Body temperature.
  6. Cardio and fluid electrolyte balance of the
  7. As the part of limbic system it influences various emotional responses.

Question 15.
Draw the diagram of the hypothalamus and pituitary gland and label the following parts.
Answer:
A. Anterior lobe
B. Posterior lobe
C. Hypothalamus
D. Interior Hypophyseal artery
E. Endocrine cells
F. Hypophyseal vein
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 11 Chemical Coordination and Integration 4

Question 16.
Draw the diagram of thyroid gland and label the following parts
Answer:
A Thyroid cartilage
B. Thyroid gland
C. Trachea
D.Isthumus
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 11 Chemical Coordination and Integration 5

Question 17.
Draw the diagram of thyroid gland and label the following parts
A. Capsule
B. Cortex
C. Medulla
D. Blood Vessels
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 11 Chemical Coordination and Integration 6

Question 18.
Explain the role of leuteinizing hormone (LH) in male and females.
Answer:

  • It is a glycoprotein hormone
  • It is also known as Interstitial cell stimulating hormone (ICSH) in males.
  • The ICSH hormones acts on the interstitial cells of testis to produce the male sex hormone testosterone.
  • In females along with FSH matures the ovarian follicles.
  • LH independently induces ovulation, maintains the corpus luteum and promotes synthesis and release of ovarian.
  • FSH and LH secretion starts only during pre pubertal period.
  • FSH and LH are collectively referred as gonadotropins.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 11 Chemical Coordination and Integration

Question 19.
Compare the structural difference of vasopressin and oxytocin. Vasopressin Oxytocin
Answer:

Exocrine glands Endocrine glands
1. Composed of a amino acids 1. Composed of a amino acids
2. Amino acid sequence is cysteine – tyrosine – Phenyl alanine – glutamine arspargine – cysteine – proline – argirune – glycine. 2. Amino acid sequence is – cysteine – tyrosine –
Isoleucine – Glutamine – aspargine – cysteine –
proline – leucine – glycine.

Question 20.
How does the posterior lobe of the pituitary help in osmoregulation?
Answer:

  • ADH is a peptide hormone
  • It promotes absorption of water and electrolytes by distal tubules of nephron and there by reduces loss of water through urine.
  • Hence it is called as anti diuretic hormone.
  • ADH deficiency causes Diabetes insipidus which induces the production of large amount of urine.
  • This is how it helps in osmoregulation.
  • ADH when released in large amount causes constriction of blood vessels and increases blood pressure.

Question 21.
Explain the role of melatonin in our body.
Answer:

  • It is secreted by pineal gland.
  • It plays a central role in the regulation of circadium rhythm of our body
  • Maintains the normal sleep wake cycle.
  • It also regulates the timing of sexual maturation of gonads.
  • In addition it also influences metabolism, pigmentation, menstrual cycle and defence mechanism of our body.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 11 Chemical Coordination and Integration

Question 22.
List out the role of thyroxine or tetra iodo thyronine (T4) in our body.
Answer:

  • It regulates the Basal Metabolic Rate (BMR) and body heat production.
  • It stimulates protein synthesis and promotes growth
  • It is essential for the development of skeletal and nervous system.
  • It plays an important role in maintaining blood pressure
  • It reduces serum cholesterol levels.
  • Optimum levels of thyroxine in the blood are necessary for gonadial functions.

Question 23.
Which hormone is called hypercalcemic hormone? Explain its role.
Answer:

  • The parathyroid hormone (PTH) is the hypercalcemic hormone.
  • It is a peptide hormone.
  • It involves in controlling the calcium and phosphate homeostasis.
  • The secretes or PTH is controlled by calcium level in the blood.
  • It increases the blood calcium level by stimulating osteoclasts to dissolve the bone matrix.
  • As a result calcium and phosphate are released into the blood.
  • PTH enhances the re-absorption of calcium and exertion of phosphates by the renal tubules.
  • It promotes activation of vitamin D to increase calcium absorption by intestinal mucosal cells.

Question 24.
Explain the role of heart as a partial endocrine gland.
Answer:
1. In the heart, cardiocytes on the atrial walls secretes an important peptide hormone called Atrial Natriuretic Factor (ANF)
2. When blood pressure is increased ANF is secreted and causes dilation of the blood vessels to reduce the blood pressure.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 11 Chemical Coordination and Integration

Question 25.
Is it good to take synthetic soft drinks? Why?
Answer:

  • It is not good to take synthetic soft drinks.
  • The branded soft drinks damage our endocrine system.
  • While consuming soft drinks the sugar level increases in blood. Which leads to elevated insulin secretion
    to reduce the blood glucose level.
  • The elevated insulin level diminishes immunity.
  • It causes obesity, cardio-vascular disorders etc.

Question 26.
The doctors avoid prescribing steroid tablets most often. Why?
Answer:
The abuse of steroids can cause serious health problems such as.

  • HighB.P.
  • Heart diseases.
  • Liver damage
  • Cancer
  • Stroke
  • Blood clotsa

Side effects such as

  1. Nausea
  2. V omiting
  3. Ligament and tendon injuries
  4. Head ache
  5. JointPain
  6. Muscle cramps
  7. Diarrhoea
  8. Sleep problem

Question 27.
if para-thyroid gland shows hyper-secretion. What will be the symptoms of this disorder?
Answer:

  • The excess secretion of parathyroid gland is known as hyperparathyroidism
  • Symptoms are Demineralisation of bone.
  • Cyst formation
  • Softening of bone
  • Loss of muscletone
  • General weakness
  • Renal disorders.

Question 28.
Differentiate Glycogenolysis from gluconeogenesis.
Answer:

  • Glycogenolysis is breakdown of glycogen to glucose
  • This process is carried out in the liver by the Glucagon hormone.
  • Glucagon thus releases glucose from the liver cells increasing Gluconeogenesis.
  • it is the synthesis of glucose from lactic acid and from non-carbohvdrate molecules is called Gluconeogenesis. this increases the blood glucose levels.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 11 Chemical Coordination and Integration

Question 29.
Mention the symptoms of diabetes mellitus.
Answer:

  • Poly urea – Excessive urination
  • Polyphagia – Excessive intake of food
  • Polydipsia – Excessive consumption of liquids due to thirst.
  • Ketosis – Breakdown of fat into glucose results in accumulation of ketone bodies.

Question 30.
Give a short account on hypothalamus.
Answer:

  • Hypothalamus is a small cone shaped structure that projects downward from the brain ending into the pituitary stalk.
  • It interlinks both the nervous system and endocrine system.
  • Pituitary gland is controlled by the hypothalamus.
  • It produces neuro transmitters which act either as a releasing hormone or as an inhibitory hormone.
  • Hypothalamus contains groups of neuro secretory cells which produces neuro transmitters which regulate the secretions of the pituitary gland.

Question 31.
Comment on pineal gland.
Answer:

  • It is located behind the third ventricle of brain.
  • In human it is called epiphysis cerebri conarium.
  • It is formed of parenchymal cells and interstitial cells.
  • It secretes the hormone melatonin.
  • It plays a central role in the regulation of circadian rhythm of our body and maintains the normal sleep wake cycle.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 11 Chemical Coordination and Integration

Question 32.
Write down the functions of thyrocalcitonin.
Answer:

  1. It is a polypeptide hormone.
  2. It regulates the blood calcium and phosphate levels.
  3. It reduces the blood calcium level and oppose the effects of parathyroid hormone.

Question 33.
Give a brief account on parathyroid gland.
Answer:

  • In man, four tiny parathyroid glands are found in the posterior wall of the thyroid glands.
  • It composed of two types of cells. The chief cells and oxyphil cells.
  • The chief cells secrete parathyroid hormone.
  • The functions of oxyphil cells are not known.

Question 34.
Write short notes on thymus gland.
Answer:

  • Thymus gland is partially an endocrine and partially a lymphoid gland.
  • It is a bi-lobed structure located just above the heart and aorta behind the sternum.
  • It is covered by a fibrous capsule.
  • Anatomically it is divisible into an outer cortex and an inner medulla.
  • It secretes four hormones such as thymulin, thymosin, thymopoietin and thymic humoral factor (THF).
  • The primary function is the production of immuno competent T lymphocytes which provides cell mediated immunity.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 11 Chemical Coordination and Integration 7

Question 35.
Write about Acromegaly.
Answer:
Acromegaly is due to excessive secretion of growth hormone in adults.
Symptoms:-

  • Over growth of hand bones, feet bones, jaw bones
  • Malfunctioning of gonads
  • Enlargement of viscera, tongue, lungs, heart, liver, spleen and endocrine gland like thyroid adrenal.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 11 Chemical Coordination and Integration

Question 36.
What is hyperparathyroidism? Write down its symptoms.
Answer:
1. Hyperparathyroidism is caused due to excess parathyroid hormone in blood.
Symptoms:-

  • Demineralisation of bones
  • Cyst formation, softening of bone.
  • Loss of muscle tone
  • General weakness
  • Renal disorders.

Question 37.
Comment on Addison’s disease.
Answer:
Addison’s disease is caused due to hyposecretion of glucocorticoids and mineralocorticoids from the adrenal cortex.
Symptoms:-

  • Muscular weakness, Low BP
  • Loss of appetite, vomiting
  • Hyper pigmentation of the skin
  • Low metabolic rate, subnormal temperature.
  • Weight loss reduced blood volume.
  • Low aldosterone level increases urinary excretion of NaCl and water and decreases potassium excretion leading to dehydration.

Question 38.
Give reasons for Diabetes insipidus and point out its symptoms.
Answer:
Diabetes insipidus is caused due to hypo secretion of vasopressin.
Symptoms:-

  • Polyurea-frequent urination
  • Polydipsia – excessive consumption of liquids due to thirst.

Question 39.
Define BMR.
Answer:
The amount of energy needed to keep the body at rest.

Question 40.
Write down the general function of adrenalin hormone and its nature of secretion?
Answer:
Function:- The general function of nor adrenalin is to mobilize the brain and body for action. Nature of secretion: Its secretion is less during sleep, more during wakefulness and reaches much higher levels during stress situations. This response is known as ‘fight or flight’ response.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 11 Chemical Coordination and Integration

Question 41.
Old age people are sick often why?
Answer:
Due to degeneration of thymus gland, thymosin level decreases as a result the immunity of old age people becomes weak and causes sickness.

Question 42.
What is the role of pass intermedia in mammals and in other vertebrates?
Answer:

  • In mammals the role of pass intermedia is insignificant.
  • In other vertebrates it secretes melanocyte stimulating hormone (MSH)
  • It induces pigmentation in skin.

(5 Marks)

IV. Brief Answers

Question 1.
Describe the mechanism of peptide hormone action with a diagram.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 11 Chemical Coordination and Integration 8

  • Peptide hormones cannot cross the phospholipid cell membrane and bind to the receptors on the exterior cell surface.
  • They are transported to the golgi which is the site of modification.
  • It acts as a first messenger in the cell.
  • Hormones generate a second messenger like cyclic AMP (cAMP) that regulates cellular metabolism. This cAMP is catalyzed by the adenylate cyclase ezyme.
  • The interaction between the hormone surface and the effect of cAMP within the cell is known as a signaling cascade. There may be amplication at each step.
  • One hormone molecule may bind to multiple receptor molecules before it is degraded.
  • Each receptor activates to form more cAMP and produces more signals.

Question 2.
Describe the mechanism of action of steroid hormone.
Answer:

  • Steroid hormones can easily cross the cell membrane and bind their receptors which may be intracellular or intercellular.
  • Then they pair up with another receptor and form a receptor-hormone complex. This can bind to DNA and alter its transcription.
  • As it changes the mRNA and protein the effect will be with stand for a long time. Eg. Estrogen

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 11 Chemical Coordination and Integration 9

Question 3.
What is typical about Addison’s disease.
Answer:

  • There is a hyper pigmentation of the skin. It is caused due to hypo secretion of glucocorticoids from the adrenal cortex.
  • Muscular weakness low BP, loss of appetite vomiting, low metabolic rate subnormal temperature reduced blood volume and weight are the other symptoms of Addison’s disease.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 11 Chemical Coordination and Integration

Question 4.
What is the cause of cretinism? What are the symptoms?
Answer:

  • Hypothyroidism is the cause of cretinism in infants. There is a retarded skeletal growth absence of sexual maturity, retarded mental ability, thick wrinkled skin protruded enlarged tongue bloated face thick and short limbs.
  • There is low BMR, slow pulse rate subnormal body temperature and elevated blood cholesterol levels.

Question 5.
What are the hormones responsible for maintaining blood glucose levels?
Answer:
Insulin and glucagon are the hormones secreted by Islets of Langerhans of the pancreas:-
Insulin:
Insulin is a peptide hormone and plays an important role in glucose homeostasis. Its main effect is to lower blood glucose levels by increasing the uptake of glucose into the body cells, especially muscle and fat cells. Insulin also inhibits the breakdown of glycogen to glucose, the conversion of amino acids or fats to glucose, so insulin is rightly called a hypoglycemic hormone.

Glucagon:
Glucagon is a polypeptide hormone. It is a potent hyperglycaemic hormone that acts on the liver and promotes the breakdown of glycogen to glucose (Glycogenolysis), synthesis of glucose from lactic acid and from non-carbohydrate molecules (gluconeogenesis).

Releases glucose from the liver cells, increasing the blood glucose levels. Since glucagon reduces the cellular uptake and utilisation of glucose it is called a hyperglycemic hormone. Prolonged hyperglycemia leads to the disorder called diabetes mellitus.

Question 6.
What is an exophthalmic goiter? What are its symptoms?
Answer:
This disease is caused due to hyper secretion of the thyroid.
Symptoms:

  • Enlargement of the thyroid gland
  • Increased BMR.
  • Elevated respiratory and excretory rates
  • Increased heart beat
  • High blood pressure
  • Increased body temperature
  • Protection of eye ball (Exophthalmic)
  • The weakness of eye muscles
  • Weight loss.

Question 7.
What is meant by negative feedback mechanism? Explain with an example.
Answer:
When the thyroxine level in the blood decreases it is sensed by the hypothalamus to release the thyroid releasing factor that induces the pituitary to secrete thyroid stimulating hormone that stimulates the thyroid to release thyroxine – when the thyroxine level in the blood increases TTH acts on both the pituitary and hypothalamus to inhibit TSH secretion. This is meant by negative feedback mechanism.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 11 Chemical Coordination and Integration 10

Question 8.
Why parathormone is considered as a hypercalcemic hormone.
Answer:

  • It increases the blood calcium level by stimulating osteo clasts to dissolve the bone matrix.
  • It enhances the reabsorption of calcium and also increases calcium adsorption by intestinal mucosal cells.
  • By all these action it increases the blood calcium level. Hence it is known as hypercalcemic hormone.

Question 9.
Write on Hyperthyroidism and Hypothyroidism?
Answer:
In infants, hypothyroidism causes cretinism. A cretin shows retarded skeletal growth, absence of sexual maturity, retarded mental ability, thick wrinkled skin, protruded enlarged tongue, bloated face, thick and short limbs occurs. The other symptoms are low BMR, slow pulse rate, subnormal body temperature and elevated blood cholesterol level.

Hyposecretion of the thyroid in adults causes myxoedema. It is otherwise called Gull’s disease. This disease is characterised by decreased mental activity, memory loss, slowness of movement, speech, and general weakness of body, dry coarse skin, scarce hair, puffy appearance, disturbed sexual function, low BMR, poor appetite, and subnormal body temperature.

Grave’s disease also called thyrotoxicosis or exophthalmic goiter. This disease is caused due to hypersecretion of the thyroid. It is characterised by enlargement of the thyroid gland, increases BMR (50% -100%), elevated respiratory and excretory rates, increased heartbeat, high BP, increases body temperature, protrusion of eyeball, and weakness of eye muscles and weight loss.

Simple goitre is also known as Endemic goitre. It is caused due to hyposecretion of thyroxine. The symptoms include enlargement of thyroid gland, fall in serum thyroxine level, increases TSH secretion.

Question 10.
Give an account of the actions of insulin.
Answer:

  • Insulin lowers the blood glucose level by increasing the uptake of glucose into the body cells.
  • It inhibits the conversion of amino acids or fat to glucose.
  • Insulin is called a hypoglycemic hormone.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 11 Chemical Coordination and Integration

Question 11.
Write on the disorders associated with parathryroid gland?
Answer:
Tetany is caused due to the hyposecretion of parathyroid hormone (PTH). Due to hyposecretion of PTH serum calcium level decreases (Hypocalcemia), as a result serum phosphate level increases. Calcium and phosphate excretion level decreses. Generalized convulsion, locking of jaws increased heart beat rate, increases body temperature, muscular spasm are the major symptoms of tetany. Hyperparathyroidism is caused due to excess PTH in blood. Demineralisation of bone, loss of muscle tone, general weakness, renal disorders are the symptoms of hyperparathyroidism.

Question 12.
a) What are the systems that regulate and co-ordinate the physiological functions of our body?
b) Give the meaning of the word “Hormone”.
c) What are the general characters of hormone?
Answer:
a) The systems that regulate and co-ordinate the physiological functions of our body are

  • Nervous or neural system
  • Endocrine system

b) The meaning of the word “Hormone”is “to excite”
c) General characters of hormones:

  • The endocrine system influences the metabolic activities through the hormones
  • These are chemical messengers released in to the blood and acts specifically on certain target organs or target tissues.
  • Hormones may speed up or slow down or alter the activity of the target organs.
  • Hormones secreted do not remain permanently in the blood.
  • After their function they are converted by the liver into inactive compounds and excreted by the kidneys.

Question 13.
Write a paragraph on different types of diabetes mellitus?
Answer:
Hyperglycaemia is otherwise known as Diabetes mellitus. Is caused due to reduced secretion of insulin. As the result, the blood glucose level is elevated. Diabetes mellitus is of two types, Type! Diabetes and Type II Diabetes. Type I diabetes is also known as Insulin-dependent diabetes, caused by the lack of insulin secretion due to illness or viral infections. Type II diabetes is also known as Non-Insulin dependent diabetes, caused due to reduced sensitivity to insulin, often called insulin resistance.

Symptoms of diabetes include polyuria (excessive urination), polyphagia (excessive intake of food), polydipsia (excessive consumption of liquids due to thirst), ketosis (the breakdown of fat into glucose results in accumulation of ketone bodies) in blood. Gluconeogenesis (Conversion of non-carbohydrate) also occurs in diabetes.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 11 Chemical Coordination and Integration

Question 14.
Give a diagrammatic sketch of the glandular system.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 11 Chemical Coordination and Integration 11

Question 15.
Tabulate the major hypothalamic hormones and their functions.
Answer:

Hormones Functions
1. Thyrotropin-releasing hormone (TRH) Stimulates the secretion of TSH
2. Gonadotropin-releasing hormone(GnJRH) Stimulates the secretion of FSH
3. Corticotropin-releasing hormone (CRH) Stimulates the secretion of ACTH
4. Growth hormone-releasing hormone (GHRH) Stimulates the secretion of GH
5. Prolactin releasing hormone (PRH) Stimulates the secretion of Prolactin
6. Luteinizing hormone-releasing hormone (LHRH) Stimulates the secretion of LH
7. MSH releasing hormone Stimulates the secretion of MSH
8.Growth hormone-inhibiting hormone(GHIH) Inhibits the secretion of GH
9. Prolactin inhibiting hormone (PIEI) Inhibits the secretion of Prolactin
10. MSH inhibiting hormone Inhibits the secretion of MSH

Question 16.
Discuss the role of the hypothalamus and pituitary as a coordinated unit in maintaining the physiological process.
Answer:

  • Hypothalamus is a small cone-shaped structure that projects downward from the brain ending into the pituitary stalk.
  • It interlinks both the nervous system and endocrine system.
  • Hypothalamus contains a group of neuro secretary cells and it produces neuro transmitters which regulate the secretions of the pituitary.
  • The hormones produced by the hypothalamus act either as a releasing hormone or as an inhibitory hormone.
  • Though the pituitary gland is known as the master endocrine glands really it is in turn controlled by the hypothalamus.
  • The hypothalamus and pituitary gland are anatomically different they are interlinked and functioning as a co-ordinated unit in maintaining the physiological process. They can not functions as a separated unit.
  • The hypothalamic hypophyseal portal blood vessel allows hypothalamic hormones to control the anterior pituitary.
  • The nerve signal produced by the hypothalamic hypophyseal axis (nerve bundle) controls the posterior pituitary secretion.
  • Hypothalamus maintains homeostasis.
  • Maintains blood pressure, body temperature cardio, and fluid-electrolyte balance of the body it influences emotional responses.
  • The pituitary gland through its hormones performs various functions.

Question 17.
Give the classification of hormones based on their chemical nature?
Answer:

Class Chemical properties Example
Amines Small, water-soluble derived from tyrosine or tryptophan Adrenalin, nor adrenalin, melatonin, and thyroid hormone
Protein/ Peptides Water-soluble Insulin, glucagon, and pituitary hormones
Steroids Derived from cholesterol mostly lipid-soluble Cortisol, aldosterone, testosterone, oestrogen, progesterone.

Question 18.
Explain the structure of Testis?
Answer:

  • A pair of the testis is present in the scrotal sac of males.
  • The testis functions as a sex organ and also as an endocrine gland.
  • Testis composed of seminiferous tubules and Ley dig cells.
  • Lay dig cells secrete several male sex hormones collectively called Androgens.
  • The main male sex hormone is Testosterone.

Functions of Testosterone:

  1. Under the influence of FSH and LH, testosterone initiates the maturation of the male reproductive organ.
  2. The appearance of secondary sexual characters. Eg. Muscular growth, growth of facial and axillary hair, masculine voice, and male sexual behaviour.
  3. It enhances the total bone matrix and stimulating the process of spermatogenesis.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 11 Chemical Coordination and Integration

Question 19.
Give a brief account of the ovary.
Answer:

  • Females have a pair of ovaries located in the pelvic region of the abdomen.
  • It is composed of ovarian follicles and stromal tissue.
  • It produces the egg or ova.
  • It secretes the steroid hormones oestrogen and progesterone.

Functions:

  1. Oestrogen is responsible for the maturation of reproductive organs and the development of secondary sexual characters at puberty.
  2. Along with progesterone, oestrogen promotes breast development and initiates the menstrual cycle.
  3. Progesterone prepares the uterus for implantation of the fertilized ovum.
  4. It decreases the uterine contraction during pregnancy and stimulates the development of mammary glands and milk secretion.
  5. It is responsible for premenstrual changes in the uterus and for the formation of the placenta.

Question 20.
Explain the functions of hormones of the heart and kidney.
Answer:
Heart: The cardiocytes on the atrial walls secrete an important peptide hormone called atrial natriuretic factor (ANF)

Function: When blood pressure is increased ANF is secreted and causes dilation of the blood vessels to reduce the blood pressure.

Kidney: Three hormones are secreted by the kidneys. They are Renin, erythropoietin, and calcitriol.

Renin:

  • It is secreted by Juxta glomerular Cells (JGA).
  • It increases blood pressure when angiotensin is formed in the blood.

Erythropoietin:

  • It is also secreted by JGA.
  • Stimulates erythropoiesis ie formation of RBC in bone mawow.

Calcitriol:

  • It is secreted by proximal tubules of the nephron.
  • It is an active form of vitamin D3.
  • It promotes calcium and phosphorus absorption from the intestine and accelerates bone formation.

Question 21.
If you happen to see a man/lady with short stature how will you identify him?
Differentiate and give a reason for that disorder.
Answer:
The person may be suffering from either cretinism or Dwarfism.
The following symptoms may be observed in cretinism. It is due to the hypo-secretion of Thyroxine.

  • A cretin shows retarded skeletal growth.
  • Absence of sexual maturity.
  • Retarded mental ability.
  • Thick wrinkled skin.
  • Protruded enlarged tongue.
  • Bloated face.
  • Thick and short limb occur
  • Low BMR
  • Slow pulse rate.
  • Subnormal body temperature
  • Elevated blood cholesterol levels.

If the person shows the following symptom, he may have Dwarfism, it is due to hyposecretion of growth hormone.

  1. Skeletal growth and sexual maturity is arrested.
  2. They attain a maximum height of 4 feet only.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 11 Chemical Coordination and Integration

Question 22.
(i) Describe the structure of the pancreas.
(ii) Draw the diagram and marced it parts
(iii) How insulin controls blood sugar?
(iv) What is the role of glucagon in our body?
Answer:
i) Structure of pancreas:

  • Pancreas is a composite gland which performs both endocrine and exocrine functions.
  • It is located just below the stomach as a leaf-like structure.
  • It is composed of two major tissues such as acme and islets of Langerhans
  • Acme secretes digestive enzymes and the islets of Langerhans secretes hormones like insulin and glucagon.
  • Human pancreas has 1 -2 million islets of Langerhans.
  • In each islet about 60% cells are beta cells 25% cells are alpha cells and 10% are delta cells.
  • The alpha cells secrete glucagon the beta cells secrete insulin and delta cells secrete somatostatin.

ii) Structure of Islets of Langerhans (pancreas)
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 11 Chemical Coordination and Integration 12

iii) Insulin control-blood sugar:-

  • Insulin is a peptide hormone and plays an important role in glucose homeostasis.
  • Its main effect is to lower blood glucose levels by increasing the uptake of glucose into the body cells
  • especially muscle and fat cells.
  • Insulin also inhibits the breakdown of glycogen to glucose, the conversion of amino acids or fats to glucose.
  • So insulin is rightly called a hypoglycemic hormone.
  • Reduced secretion of insulin leads to diabetes mellitus. As a result glucose level is elevated.
  • It is of two types. Type I. Diabetes and Type II Diabetes. Type I Diabetes is caused by lack of secretion of insulin due to illness or viral infection. Type II or Non-insulin-dependent diabetes caused due to reduced sensitivity to insulin.

iv) Role of Glucagon:

  • Glucagon is a polypeptide hormone.
  • It is a potent hyper glycemic hormone.
  • It acts on the liver and promotes the break down of glycogen to glucose (glycogenolysis)
  • It also promotes synthesis of glucose from lactic acid and from non-carbohydrate molecules is called Gluconeogenesis.
  • Glucogon releases glucose from the liver cell increasing the blood glucose levels.
  • Since glucagon reduces the cellular uptake and utilisation of glucose it is called a hyperglycemic hormone. Prolonged hyperglycemia leads to the disorder called diabetes mellitus.

Question 23.
Symptoms of diabetes
Answer:

  • Polyurea – excessive urination
  • Polyphagia – excessive intake of food
  • Poly dispsia – excessive consumption of liquids due to thirst.
  • Ketosis – breakdown of fat into glucose results in accumulation of ketone bodies in blood.
  • Gluconeogenesis also occur ie conversion of the non-carbohydrate form like amino acids and fat into glucose.

Question 24.
a) Write down the location and dimension of the pituitary gland?
b) Explain the internal structure of the pituitary gland?
c) Draw the diagram of the pituitary gland and label the parts.
Answer:
a. Location of pituitary gland:-

  • It is located in a depression called sella tursica a bony cavity of the sphenoid bone below the brain.
  • The pituitary gland means “to grow under”.
  • It is connected to the brain by a stalk called the infundibulum
  • Dimension:- It is about 1cm in diameter and 0. 5gm in weight.

b. Internal structure:-

  • The pituitary consists of two lobes, anterior glandular adenohypophysis and posterior neural neuro hypophysis.
  • Anatomically the anterior lobe or adenohypophysis has three lebesor zones namely pass intermedia, pass distalis and pass tuberalis.
  • The neurohypophysis is otherwise known as pars nervosa.
  • Embryonic origin:- The anterior lobe originates from the Embryonic invagination of pharyngeal epithelia called Rathke’s pouch.
  • The posterior lobe originates from the base of the brain as an outgrowth of the hypothalamus.

c. Hypothalamus and pituitary gland
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 11 Chemical Coordination and Integration 13

Question 25.
Give a brief account of the hormones of the adenohypophysis.
Answer:
It secretes six hormones.
1. Growth Hormone:-

  • It is also known as somatotropic hormone (STH) or somatotropin
  • It is a peptide hormone.
  • It promotes the growth of all the tissues and metabolic processes of the body.
  • It influences the metabolism of carbohydrates, proteins, and lipids and increases the rate of biosynthesis in the cells.
  • It stimulates chondrogenesis (cartilage formation), osteogenesis (bone formation).
  • It helps in the retention of minerals like nitrogen and potassium, phosphorous, sodium, etc. in the body.

2. Thyroid Stimulating Hormone TSH or Thyrotropin:-

  • It is a glycoprotein.
  • It stimulates the thyroid gland to secrete Tri-iodothyronine (T3) and Thyroxine (T4).
  • TSH secretion is regulated by a negative feedback mechanism.
  • Its release from the anterior pituitary is induced by the thyrotropin-releasing hormone (TRH).
  • When thyroxine level in the blood increases TRH acts on both the pituitary and hypothalamus to inhibit TSH secretion.

3. Adreno Corticotropic Hormone (ACTH):-

  • It is a peptide hormone.
  • It stimulates the adrenal cortex to secrete glucocorticoids and mineral corticoids.
  • It stimulates melanin synthesis in melanocytes induces the release of fatty acids from adipose tissues and stimulates insulin secretion.
  • its secretion is regulated by a negative feedback mechanism.

4. Follicle Stimulating Hormone (FSH):-

  • It is a glycoprotein hormone.
  • It regulates the functions of the gonads.
  • In males, FSH along with androgens act on the germinal epithelium of seminiferous tubules and stimulates the production and release of sperms (Spermatogenesis).
  • In females, it acts on the ovaries and brings about the development and maturation of graffian follicles.

5. Luteinizing hormone (LH):-

  • It is a glycoprotein hormone.
  • It is also known as interstitial cell-stimulating hormone.
  • In females LH, along with FSH matures the ovarian follicles.
  • LH independently induces ovulation, maintains the corpus luteum and promotes synthesis and release of ovarian hormones.
  • In males, ICSH acts on interstitial cells of testes to produce the male sex hormone testosterone.

6. Luteo Tropic Hormone (LTH):-

  • It is a protein hormone.
  • It is also called luteotropin or lactogenic hormone or prolactin or mammotropin.
  • It stimulates milk secretion after childbirth.
  • Since it induces the corpus luteum hence named as a luteotropic hormone.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 11 Chemical Coordination and Integration

Question 26.
a) Name the hormones secreted by the neuro hypophysis?
b) Give a brief account of its functions?
Answer:
a. Neuro hypophysis secretes two hormones.

  1. Vasopressin or anti-diuretic hormone
  2. Oxytocin.

Vasopressin or Anti diuretic Hormone (ADH):-

  • It is a peptide hormone.
  • it promotes reabsorption of water and electrolytes by distal tubules of the nephron and thereby reduces the loss of water through urine.
  • Hence it is called an anti-diuretic hormone.
  • When released in large amounts it causes constriction of blood vessels and increases blood pressure.
  • ADH deficiency causes Diabetes insipidus which induces the production of a large amount of urine.

Oxytocin:-

  • It means quick birth.
  • It is a peptide hormone.

3. It stimulates vigorous contraction of the smooth muscles of the uterus during childbirth.
4. And it also stimulates the ejection of milk from the mammary glands.

b. Chemical nature:

  • The insulin hormone is a peptide hormone with 51 amino acids.
  • The molecular weight of insulin hormone is 5734 Dalton.
  • It consists of two chains A and B which are linked together by disulphide bridges formed between cystine residues.

Role of Insulin:

  • It increases uptake of glucose into body cells especially muscle and fat cells.
  • It inhibits the breakdown of glycogen to glucose, the conversion of amino acids or fats to glucose.
    Thus it decreases the blood glucose level and so insulin is rightly called as a hypoglycemic hormone.

c. How can this condition be reversed?

  • maintenance of normal body weight through adoption of nutritional habits ie. balanced diet and physical exercise.
  • Correction of over nutrition and obesity may reduce the risk of diabetes and its complications.
  • Alcohol and smoking should be avoided.
  • Control of high blood pressure elevated cholesterol and high triglyceride levels.

Question 27.
a) Why hormones are called chemical messengers?
b) Explain how the target organs are specifically fit for the action of hormones?
Answer:
a) Hormones are chemical messengers because they act as organic catalysts and co-enzymes to perform specific functions in the target organs.

b) Special features of target organs:

  • The target organs contain receptor molecules either on the surface or within the cell.
  • Although different hormones come in contact, only the cells that contain receptor molecules specific to the hormone are physiologically activated.
  • A single hormone may have multiple effects on a single target tissue or on different target tissues.
  • Many hormones exhibit long-term changes like growth, puberty, and pregnancy.
  • Serious deficiency or excess secretion of hormones leads to disorders.
  • Hormones coordinate different physiological mental activities and maintain homeostasis.

Question 28.
Draw the Endocrine gland is our body.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 11 Chemical Coordination and Integration 14

Question 29.
Give an account on parathyroid hormones its hypo and hyper secretion deficiencies.
Answer:

  • Four tiny parathyroid glands are found in the posterior wall of the thyroid gland.
  • It is composed of Chief cells and oxyphil cell.
  • The chief cells secrete parathyroid hormone and the function of oxyphill cell are not known

Functions

  • It involves in calcium and phosphate.
  • It promotes the activation of vitamin D to increase calcium absorption by intestine.

Hyper secretion

  • Hyper parathyroidism causes demineral isation of calcium in bones.
  • Thus increasing the calcium and phosphate level in the blood.
  • PTH enhances the reabsorption of calcium and excretion of phosphate by the renal tubules.

Hypo secretion

  • Due to the hyposecretion of PTH serum calcium level decreases and the serum phosphate level increases.
  • Generalised convulsion occurs.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 11 Chemical Coordination and Integration

Question 30.
a. Give an account of position of adrenal gland and it’s internal structure, b. List out the function of adrenal hormone.
Answer:
a) Position
A pair of adrenal glands are located at the anterior end of the kidney. Hence called supra renal glands.
b) Structure
The adrenal gland is composed of the outer cortex and an inner medulla.
The cortex consists of

  1. zona glomerulosa
  2. zona fasciculata
  3. zona reticularis.

1. zona glomerulosa
– secretes minerals corticoids

2. zona fasciculata
– secretes gluco corticoids

3. zona reticularis.
– secretes androgen and oestrogen.

b) Functions

  • Gluco corticoids stimulate gluco neogenesis.
  • Cortisolies involved in maintaining cardio vascular and kidney functions.
  • Cortisol stimulates RBC production.
  • Mineralocorticoids regulated the water and electrolyte balance of our body.
  • Androgen plays a role in hair growth in the axial region pubis and face during Puberty.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination

Tamilnadu State Board New Syllabus Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Pdf Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination Text Book Back Questions and Answers, Notes.

Tamilnadu Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination

11th Bio Zoology Guide Neural Control and Coordination Text Book Back Questions and Answers

 

Part -I.

I. Choose The Best Options

Question 1.
Which structure in the ear converts pressure waves to action potentials?
a) Tympanic membrane
b) Organ of Corti
c) Oval window
d) Semicircular canal
Answer:
b) Organ of Corti

Question 2.
Which of the following pairings is correct
a) Sensory nerve – afferent
b) Motor nerve – afferent
c) Sensory nerve – ventral
d) Motor nerve – dorsal
Answer:
a) Sensory nerve – afferent

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination

Question 3.
During synaptic transmission of nerve impulse, neurotransmitter (P) is released from synaptic vesicles by the action of ions
(Q). Choose the correct P and Q.
a) P = Acetylcholine, Q = Ca++
b) P = Acetylcholine, Q = Na+
c) P = GABA, Q = Na+
d) P = Cholinesterase, Q = Ca++
Answer:
a) P = Acetylcholine, Q = Ca++

Question 4.
Examine the diagram of the two cell types A and B given below and select the correct option.
a) Cell – A is the rod cell found evenly all over retina
b) Cell – A is the cone cell more concentrated in the fovea centralis
c) Cell – B is concerned with colour vision in bright light
d) Cell – A is sensitive to bright light intensities
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination 1
Answer:
c) Cell – B is concerned with colour vision in bright light

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination

Question 5.
Assertion- The imbalance in concentration of Na+, K+ and proteins generates action potential.
Reason: To maintain the unequal distribution of Na+ and K+ , the neurons use electrical energy.
a) Both Assertion and Reason are true and Reason is the correct explanation of the Assertion.
b) Both Assertion and Reason are true but the Reason is not the correct explanations of Assertion.
c) Assertion is true, but Reason is false.
d) Both Assertion and Reason are false.
Answer:
a) Both Assertion and Reason are true and Reason is the correct explanation of the Assertion.

Question 6.
Which part of the human brain is concerned with the regulation of body temperature?
a) Cerebellum
b) Cerebrum
c) Medulla oblongata
d) Hypothalamus
Answer:
d) Hypothalamus

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination

Question 7.
The respiratory centre is present in the
a) Medulla oblongata
b) Hypothalamus
c) Cerebellum
d) Thalamus
Answer:
a) Medulla oblongata

Question 8.
Match the following human spinal nerves in column I with their respective number in column II and choose the correct option
Column I Column 11
(P) Cervical nerves
(Q) Thoracic nerve
(R) Lumbar nerve
(S) Coccygeal nerve
(i) 5 pairs
(ii) 1 pair
(iii) 12 pairs
(iv) 8 pairs
a) (P-iv), (Q-iii), (R-i), (S-ii)
b) (P-iii), (Q-i), (R-ii), (S-iv)
c) (P-iv), (Q-i), (R-ii), (S-iii)
d) (P-ii), (Q-iv), (R-i), (S-iii)
Answer:
a) (P-iv), (Q-iii), (R-i), (S-ii)

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination

Question 9.
Which of the following cranial nerve controls the movement of eye ball?
a) Trochlear nerve
b) Optic nerve
c) Olfactory nerve
d) Vagus nerve
Answer:
a) Trochlear nerve

Question 10.
The abundant intracellular cation is
a) H+
b) K+
c) Na+
d) Ca++
Answer:
b) K+

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination

Question 11.
Which of the following statements is wrong regarding conduction of nerve impulse.
a) In a resting neuron, the axonal membrane is more permeable to K+ ions and nearly impermeable to Na+ ions.
b) Fluid outside the axon has a high concentration of Na+ ions and low concentration of K+, in a resting neuron.
c) Ionic gradient s are maintained by Na+ K+ pumps across the resting membrane, which transport 3 Na ions outwards for 2K+ into the cell.
d) A neuron is polarized only when the outer surface of the axonal membrane possess a negative charge and its inner surface is positively charged.
Answer:
b) Fluid outside the axon has a high concentration of Na+ ions and low concentration of K+, in a resting neuron.

Question 12.
All of the following are associated with the myeline sheath except
a) Faster conduction of nerve impulses
b) Nodes of Ranvier forming gaps along the axon
c) Increased energy output for nerve impulse conduction
d) Saltatory conduction of action potential
Answer:
c) Increased energy output for nerve impulse conduction

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination

Question 13.
Several statements are given here in reference to cone cells which of the following option indicates all correct statements for cone cells? Statements
(i) Cone cells are less sensitive in bright light than Rod cells
(ii) They are responsible for colour vision
(iii) Erythropsin is a photo pigment which is sensitive to red colour light
(iv) They are present in fovea of retina
a) (iii), (ii) and (i)
b) (ii), (iii) and (iv)
c) (i), (iii) and (iv)
d) (i), (ii) and (iv)
Answer:
c) (i), (iii) and (iv)

Question 14.
Which of the following statement concerning the somatic division of the peripheral neural system is incorrect?
a) Its pathways innervate skeletal muscles
b) Its pathways are usually voluntary
c) Some of its pathways are referred to as reflex arcs
d) Its pathways always involve four neurons
Answer:
d) Its pathways always involve four neurons

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination

Question 15.
When the potential across the axon membrane is more negative than the normal resting potential, the neuron is said to be in a state of
a) Depolarization
b)FIyperpo1ariation
c) Repolarization
d) Hypopolaiization
Answer:
c) Repolarization

Question 16.
Why is the blind spot called so?
Answer:
Slightly below the posterior pole of the eye, the optic nerve and the retinal blood vessels enter the eye. This region is devoid of rods and cones. Hence, this region is called blind spot.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination

Question 17.
Sam’s optometrist tells him that his intraocular pressure is high. What is this condition called and which fluid does it involve?
Answer:

  • The increase in intraocular pressure leads to the disease called Glaucoma.
  • Any block in the canal of Schlemm increases the intraocular pressure of aqueous humor and leads to ‘Glaucoma’ where the optic nerve and the retina are compressed due to pressure.

Question 18.
The action potential occurs in response to a threshold stimulus: but not at sub-threshold stimuli. what is the name of the principle involved?
Answer:
When we cry, the tears come out of the tear glands under the eyelids and drain through the tear duct that empties into the nose. It mixes with mucus there and the nose runs.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination

Question 19.
Pleasant smell of food urged Ravi to rush into the Kitchen. Name the parts of the brain involved in the identification of food and emotional responses to odour
Answer:
The hypothalamus contains a pair of small rounded body called mamillary bodies that are involved in olfactory reflexes and emotional responses to odour
This is also act as centre for appetite thirst and heat regulation.

Question 20.
Cornea transplant in humans is almost never rejected State the reason.
Answer:
The cornea does not have blood vessels. Hence there is no possibility of rejection when the cornea is transplanted from one person to another person.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination

Question 21.
At the end of repolarisation, the nerve membrane gets hyperpolarized Why?
Answer:
If repolarization becomes more negative than the resting potential – 70mV to about – 90mV it is called hyperpolarization.

Question 22.
Label the parts of the neuron.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination 2
A- Nucleus with nucleolus
B- Axolemma
C- Dendrites
D- Myelin sheath, Nucleus
E- Axon (Direction of signal transmission)
F- Node of Ranvier.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination

Question 23.
The choroid plexus secretes cerebral spinal fluid List the function it.
Answer:
Cerebrospinal fluid provides buoyancy to the central nervous system.

  1. It acts as a shock absorber for the brain and spinal cord.
  2. It nourishes the brain cells by transporting food and oxygen.
  3. It carries harmful metabolic wastes from the brain to the blood.
  4. It maintains constant pressure inside the cranial vessels.

Question 24.
What is the ANS controlling center? Name the parts that are supplied by the ANS?
Answer:
Controlling center – autonomic neural system. Controlling organs.

  1. Eyes
  2. Salivary Glands
  3. Heart
  4. Lungs
  5. Stomach
  6. Liver
  7. Kidney
  8. Intestines
  9. Bladder

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination

Question 25.
Why the limbic system is called the emotional brain. Name the parts of it?
Answer:
The limbic system is a set of components located on both sides of the thalamus present in the inner part of the cerebral hemisphere. It includes the olfactory bulbs, cingulate gyrus, mammillary body, amygdala, hippocampus and hypothalamus. The limbic system plays a primary role in the regulation of pleasure, pain, anger, fear, sexual feeling, affection and memory. Hence it is called the emotional brain.

Question 26.
Classify receptors based on the type of stimuli.
Answer:

Receptors Stimulus Effector organs
Mechano receptors Pressure and vibration Mechano receptors are present in the cochlea of the inner ear and the semicircular canal and utriculus
Chemoreceptors Chemicals Taste buds in the tongue and nasal epithelium
Thermo receptors Temperature Skin
Photoreceptors Light Rod and cone cells of the retina in the eye.

Question 27.
Name the first five cranial nerves, their nature and their functions
Answer:

Cranial nerves Nature of nerve Function
I. Olfactory nerve Sensory Sense of smell
II.Optic nerves Sensory Sense of sight
III. Oculo motor nerves Motor Movement of the eye
IV. Trochlear nerve Motor Rotation of the eyeball
V.Trigeminal nerve Sensory and motor mixed The functioning of face ball

Question 28.
The sense of taste is considered to be the most pleasurable of all senses. Describe the structure of the receptor involved with a diagram.
Answer:

  • The sense of taste is considered to be the most pleasurable of all senses.
  • The tongue is provided with many small projections called papillae.
  • Taste buds are located mainly on the papillae.
  • Taste buds are flask-shaped.

There are two major types.

  • Gustatory epithelial cells or taste cells.
  • Basal epithelial cells or repairing cells.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination 3

  • Long microvilli called gustatory hairs project from the tip of the gustatory cells and extend through a taste pore to the surface of the epithelium.
  • Gustatory hairs are the sensitive portion of the gustatory cells and they have sensory dendrites which send the signal to the brain.
  • The basal cells that act as stem cells divide and differentiate into new gustatory cells.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination

Question 29.
Describe the structures of olfactory receptors?
Answer:
The smell receptors are excited by air-borne chemicals that dissolve in fluids. The yellow coloured patches of olfactory epithelium form the olfactory organs that are located on the roof of the nasal cavity.

The olfactory epithelium is covered by a thin coat of mucus layer below and olfactory glands bounded connective tissues, above. It contains three types of cells: supporting cells, Basal cells and millions of pin-shaped olfactory receptor cells (which are unusual bipolar cells).

The olfactory glands and the supporting cells secrete the mucus. The unmyelinated axons of the olfactory receptor cells are gathered to form the filaments of olfactory nerve [cranial nerve-I] which synapse with cells of olfactory bulb.

The impulse, through the olfactory nerves, is transmitted to the frontal lobe of the brain for identification of smell and the limbic system for the emotional responses to odour.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination 4

Part-II.

11th Bio Zoology Guide Neural Control and Coordination Additional Important Questions and Answers

I. Choose The Correct Answer

Question 1.
What is the functional unit of the nervous system?
a) Neuroglial cells
b) Neuron
c) Nephron
d) Axon
Answer:
b) Neuron

Question 2.
Name the nutritive cells of neuron.
a) Axon
b) Neuroglia
c) Schwann’s cell
d) Epithelial cells.
Answer:
b) Neuroglia

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination

Question 3.
Name the cell organelle which is not seen in the nerve cell.
a) Mitochondria
b) Golgi apparatus
c) Centrioles
d) Nucleus
Answer:
c) Centrioles

Question 4.
Name the plasma membrane which surrounds the neurons?
a) Neurilemma
b) Axolemma
c) Myalin membrane
d) Sarcolemma
Answer:
a) Neurilemma

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination

Question 5.
Name the plasma membrane surrounds the axon?
a) Neurilemma
b) Myalin membrane
c) Sarcolemma
d) Axolemma
Answer:
d) Axolemma

Question 6.
Where is Nissl’s bodies seen in the nerve cell?
a) Cell body and dendrites
b) Cell body and axon
c) Cell body and myalin sheath
d) Cell body and end plate of axon.
Answer:
a) Cell body and dendrites

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination

Question 7.
Name the cell organell which is not seen in the axons.
a) Mitochondria
b) Golgi apparatus
c) Centriole
d) Endoplasmic reticulum
Answer:
b) Golgi apparatus

Question 8.
Cell forms the myalin sheath ……………..
a) Schwaan’s cell
b) Neuroglial cells
c) Nephron
d) Epithelial cells
Answer:
a) Schwaan’s cell

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination

Question 9.
Which part of the nerve cells do not contain myalin sheath.
a) Axon
b) Cell body
c) Dentrites
d) Axon end plate
Answer:
c) Dentrites

Question 10.
Which of the following does the work of phagocytosis of microbes during the infection of the brain
a) Schwann cells
b) Node of Ranvier
c) Neuroglial cells
d) Neurilemma
Answer:
c) Neuroglial cells

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination

Question 11.
Find out the correct statement
a) The short nerve fibres are called as dentrites.
b) The membrane surrounds the neuron is axolemma.
c) The longest sciatic nerve runs from the base of the spine to the big toe of each foot
d) Schwann cell’s do not synthesize myalin sheath
Answer:
c) The longest sciatic nerve runs from the base of the spine to the big toe of each foot

Question 12.
Find out the wrong pair
a) Multi polar neuron: One axon and two or more dentrites.
b) Bi polar neurons: One axon and more than two dentrites.
c) Uni polar neurons: Short process axon.
d) Synaptic Knob: Neurotransmitters
Answer:
b) Bi polar neurons: One axon and more than two dentrites.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination

Question 13.
This substance is more in the tissue fluid of cytoplasm of axolemma?
a) Sodium chloride and bicarbonates.
b) Nutritious substances and oxygen.
c) Potassium and magnesium phosphate.
d) All the above.
Answer:
c) Potassium and magnesium phosphate.

Question 14.
Match the following and find the answer.

1. Leakage channels a. Opens through the sensation of touch and pressure.
2. Ligand-gated channels b. They are stable.
3. Voltage gated channels c. Opens through chemical stimulation.
4. Charged particles d. Ionic channels are always open.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination 5
Answer:
c) i- B,ii – D,iii – C,iv – A

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination

Question 15.
Name the gaps in the myelin sheath between adjacent Schwann.
a) Nodes of Ranvier
b) Nodes of axon
c) Nodes of cyton
d) Nodes of dentrites
Answer:
a) Nodes of Ranvier

Question 16.
Where are bipolar neurons situated?
a) Cranial nerves
b) Olfactory lobes of brain
c) Spinal nerves
d) Skin
Answer:
b) Olfactory lobes of brain

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination

Question 17.
Where are Bipolar neurons situated?
a) Spinal cord
b) Retina
c) Inner ear
d) Brain.
Answer:
a) Spinal cord

Question 18.
Find out the odd one.
a) Schwann cell – Myalin sheath
b) Synaptic knob – Synaptic vesicles
c) Bipolar neuron – Cranial nerves
d) Multipolar neuron – Spinal nerves.
Answer:
c) Bipolar neuron – Cranial nerves

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination

Question 19.
Where is Bipolar neurons meet?
a) Synapses
b) Synaptic cleft
c) Synaptic vesicle
d) Synaptic Knob
Answer:
a) Synapses

Question 20.
Match and find the correct sequence.

I. Neuro junction a. Neuron which receives a stimulus
II. Presynaptic neurons b. Synaptic vesicles
III. Synaptic cleft c. Synapses
IV. Neurotransmitter d. Pre and post neuron junction

a) I-d II-a ¡II-c IV-d
b) I-a II-c III-d IV-b
c) I-a II-b III-c IV-d
d) I-c II-a III-d IV-b
Answer:
d) I-c II-a III-d IV-b

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination

Question 21.
Central nervous system forms from this layer during embryonic development.
a) Endoderm
b) Ectoderm
c) Mesoderm
d) Middle layer.
Answer:
b) Ectoderm

Question 22.
Find out whether the following statements are true or false. Find out the correct sequence.
i. The thick outer covering of the brain is dura matter
ii. The space between pia matter and dura matter is subarachnoid space.
iii. The membrane that surrounds the brain is piamalter
iv. The space between arachnoid and pia mater is subarachnoid space
a) I – False; II – False; III – True; IV – True
b) I-True; II-False; III-True; IV-True
c) I – True; II – False; III – False; IV – True
d) I-True; II-False; III-True; IV-False
Answer:
b) I-True; II-False; III-True; IV-True

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination

Question 23.
Which is considered as the seat of intelligence.
a) Cerebellum
b) Cerebrum
c) Medulla oblongata
d) Pons.
Answer:
b) Cerebrum

Question 24.
Find out whether the following statements are true or false.
a) At resting membrane potential the efflux of potassium is more than the influx of sodium from the outer surface of the neurilemma.
b) When the stimulus is sent from the cell body to the axon there is no creation of action potential.
c) The spike potential is +45mV.
d) The threshold potential is +55mV.
i) a) True b) True c) False d) False
ii) a) False b) True c) True d) True
iii) a) True b) False c) True d) True
iv) a) True b) False c) True d) False
Answer:
iv) a) True b) False c) True d) False

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination

Question 25.
Find out the wrong pair
a) Synapses – The junction of two neurons
b) Neurotransmitter – Postsynaptic neuron
c) Synaptic vesicles – A small bag filled with chemicals
d) Piamatter – Membrane which closely adheres to the brain.
Answer:
b) Neurotransmitter – Postsynaptic neuron

Question 26.
………………. is the part of the fore-brain.
a) Cerebrum – Mesencephalon
b) Cerebrum – Prosencephalon
c) Cerebrum – Diencephalon
d) Cerebrum – Parietal lobe.
Answer:
c) Cerebrum – Diencephalon

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination

Question 27.
…………………….. is useful in diagnosis of neurological and sleep disorders.
a) PET
b) CT
c) X – rays
d) EEG
Answer:
d) EEG

Question 28.
Name the structure which connects cerebral hemisphere
a) Choroid tissue
b) Corpus callosum
c) Neuroglia tissue
d) Pineal body
Answer:
b) Corpus callosum

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination

Question 29.
Match and find out the correct sequence.

I. Frontal lobe a. Reading
II. Parietal lobe b. Hearing
III. Temporal lobe c. Vision
IV. Occipital lobe d. Memory

a) I-d II-a III-c IV-b
b) I-a II-c III-d IV-b
c) I-a II-b III-c IV-d
d) I-d II-a III-b IV-c
Answer:
d) I-d II-a III-b IV-c

Question 30.
Assertion: Statement A- The cortex of cerebrum consists of grey matter.
Statement B- The reason for the grey matter is due to the presence of non – myelinated sheath.
a) Statement A- True, Statement B – False
b) Statement A and B are true
c) Statement A- False the statement B- True.
d) Statement A and B are false.
Answer:
b) Statement A and B are true

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination

Question 31.
Match and find the correct answer.
1. Broca area a. Perception of taste.
2. The pre-central gyrus b. Voluntary movements
3. The postcentral gyrus c. Aggression
4. Amygdala d. Speech function
a) I-a II-b III-c IV-d
b) I-d II-b III-c IV-a
c) I-d II-b Ill-a IV-c
d) I-a II-b III-c IV-d
Answer:
c) I-d II-b III-a IV-c

Question 32.
Assertion: Statement S – Brain controls emotions and feelings.
Statement T – There are no sensory neurons in the brain. Hence it cannot sense the pain.
a) Statement – S – True. Statement T – False
b) Statement – S – True Statement T – True
c) Statement – S – False Statement T – False
d) Statement S – False Statement T – True
Answer:
b) Statement – S – True Statement T – True

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination

Question 33.
Which is considered as the relay centre for impulses
a) Medulla oblongata
b) Cerebrum
c) Hypothalamus
d) Thalamus
Answer:
d) Thalamus

Question 34.
Which indicates A, B, C and D in the following diagram
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination 6
(a)
a) Temporal lobe
b) Frontal lobe
c) Parietal lobe
d) Cerebellum
(b)
a) Cerebellum
b) Parietal lobe
c) Temporal lobe
d) Frontal lobe
(c)
a) Cerebellum
b) Frontal lobe
c) Temporal lobe
d) Parietal lobe
(d)
a) Parietal lobe
b) Cerebellum
c) Frontal lobe
d) Temporal lobe
Answer:
(b)
a) Cerebellum
b) Parietal lobe
c) Temporal lobe
d) Frontal lobe

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination

Question 35.
Find out the wrong statement.
a) The pre-central gyrus is called a motor strip.
b) The post-central gyrus is called a sensory strip.
c) The medulla oblongata controls respiration.
d) Wernicke area of the brain involved in the comprehension of speech.
Answer:
d) Wernicke area of the brain involved in the comprehension of speech.

Question 36.
The melatonin hormone which controls the sleep-wake cycle is secreted by
a) Pineal body
b) Thalamus
c) Hypothalamus
d) Medulla oblongata
Answer:
a) Pineal body

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination

Question 37.
The lower portion of the midbrain consists of a pair of longitudinal nervous bands called
a) Emotional brain
b) Cerebral peduncles
c) Pons
d) Vermis
Answer:
b) Cerebral peduncles

Question 38.
The cauda equina presents in
a) Cerebrum
b) Thalamus
c) Hippo cambus
d) Spinal cord
Answer:
d) Spinal cord

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination

Question 39.
Match and find the correct answer.
i) Thalamus – A) Respiration Gastric Pits.
ii) Hypothalamus – B) Vision Hearing
iii) Mid brain – C) Satiety centre
iv) Medulla oblongata – D) Learning memory
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination 7
Answer:
a) i- D,ii – C,iii – B,iv – A

Question 40.
The cluster of nerve tissue in the cell body of neurons are called as
a) Gyri
b) Sulci
c) Vermis
d) Nerve ganglion.
Answer:
d) Nerve ganglion.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination

Question 41.
Find out the wrong pair
a) Cervical nerve – 8 pairs
b) Thoracic nerve – 12 pairs
c) Sacrum nerve – 4 pairs
d) Coccyx nerve – 1 pair
Answer:
c) Sacrum nerve – 4 pairs

Question 42.
What is the amount of cerebrospinal fluid secreted in an adult?
a) 500 ml
b) 150 ml
c) 400 ml
d) 250 ml
Answer:
b) 150 ml

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination

Question 43.
The dissolved nicotene and alcohol in …………………… and ………………… minutes reach the brain.
a) 7 and 8 minutes
b) 6 and 7 minutes
c) 7 seconds and 6 minutes
d) 7 and 5 minutes.
Answer:
c) 7 seconds and 6 minutes

Question 44.
Name the structure that regulates homeostasis.
a) Mammillary body
b) Pineal body
c) Hypothalamus
d) Pituitary.
Answer:
a) Mammillary body

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination

Question 45.
What is brain stem.
a) The structure seen in between spinal cord and cerebellum.
b) The region between Diencephalon and spinal cord
c) The region between medulla oblongata and cerebrum.
d) The region between medulla oblongata and mid-brain.
Answer:
b) The region between Diencephalon and spinal cord

Question 46.
What is the function of corpora quadri gemina?
a) Vision and hearing
b) Vision and homeostasis
c) Hearing and sense of touch
d) Hearing and vomiting.
Answer:
a) Vision and hearing

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination

Question 47.
The region seen in the mid of cerebellum.
a) Corpus callosum
b) Pineal body
c) Pituitary
d) Vermis.
Answer:
d) Vermis.

Question 48.
What is the function of the interneuron?
a) Impulses from afferent and efferent neurons.
b) Impulses transmitted from efferent neurons to afferent neurons.
c) Impulses transmitted from central nervous system to receptor organs
d) From nerve transmitters to the spinal cord
Answer:
a) Impulses from afferent and efferent neurons.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination

Question 49.
Which part of the brain controls the unconditioned reflux?
a) The cortex of cerebrum
b) The medulla of brain
c) Cerebellum
d) pons.
Answer:
a) The cortex of cerebrum

Question 50.
……………………..pair of nerves from cranium and
…………………….. pair of nerves from spinal cord
a) 10 and 31
b) 12 and 31
c) 31 and 12
d) 31 and 10.
Answer:
b) 12 and 31

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination

Question 51.
How much cerebrospinal fluid is synthesized in adults?
a) 200ml
b) 300ml
c) 150ml
d) 100ml.
Answer:
c) 150ml

Question 52.
What is the function of vagus nerve?
a) It regulates the function of abdominal structure
b) It regulates the speech and swallowing
c) It regulates the homeostasis of the body
d) Taste perception
Answer:
a) It regulates the function of abdominal structure

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination

Question 53.
Name the neural system which is auto functioning and self-governed.
a) Somatic neural system
b) Automatic neural system
c) Peripheral neural system
d) Limbic system.
Answer:
b) Automatic neural system

Question 54.
Name the structure that regulates the autonomic neural system.
a) Cerebrum
b) Cerebellum
c) Hypothalamus
d) Pons.
Answer:
c) Hypothalamus

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination

Question 55.
Name the lubricating fluid which is secreted from the gland present at the base of the eyelashes.
a) Lacrymal gland
b) Cerebro-spinal fluid
c) Thymus gland
d) Sebaceous glands.
Answer:
d) Sebaceous glands.

Question 56.
Find the ABC and D in the diagram
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination 8
a) a) Tear duct b) Sciera c) Iris d) Tear gland
b) a) Sciera b) Iris c) Tear gland d)Tear duct
c) a) Tear duct b) Iris c) Sclerad d)lTear duct
d) a) Tear gland b) Sclera c) Tear duct d) Iris.
Answer:
d) a) Tear gland b) Sclera c) Tear duct d) Iris.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination

Question 57.
Name the tissue which forms the non-vascular transparent coat cornea
a) Stratified squamous epithelium
b) Squamous epithelium
c) Canal of schlemm
d) All the above.
Answer:
a) Stratified squamous epithelium

Question 58.
Assertion: In bright light the circular muscle in the iris contract so that the size of the pupil decreases and the light enter is regulated Reason: In dim light, the radial muscle contract the pupil size increases and less light enters the eye.
a) The assertion true: but reason wrong
b) The assertion and reason are true
c) The assertion is true but reason does not explain the assertion
d) The assertion and reason are wrong.
Answer:
a) The assertion true: but reason wrong

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination

Question 59.
Name the yellow flat spot at the centre of the posterior region of the retina.
a) Blind spot
b) Scelera
c) Iris
d) Maculalutea
Answer:
d) Maculalutea

Question 60.
Which colour is perceived through chloropsin is sensitive to the medium wavelength of 530 mm
a) Red cones
b) Green cones
c) Blue cones
d) Red cells.
Answer:
b) Green cones

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination

Question 61.
Name the glands that secrete tear.
a) Lacrymal gland
b) Sebaceous gland
c) Mandibular gland
d) Choroid plexues
Answer:
a) Lacrymal gland

Question 62.
…………………… enzyme is present in the tear.
a) Ptyalin
b) Lysozyme
c) Lipase
d) Erypsin.
Answer:
b) Lysozyme

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination

Question 63.
Name the structure where more cones present.
a) Foveacenlralis
b) Maculalutea
c) Retina
d) Blind spot.
Answer:
a) Foveacenlralis

Question 64.
……………………………….. people can see the nearby object but cannot see the distant object.
a) Astigmatism
b) Presbiopia
c) Hypermetropia
d) Myopia
Answer:
d) Myopia

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination

Question 65.
The concave lens helps in correct ………………. defect
a) Myopia
b) Hyper metropia
c) Astigmatism
d) Presbiopia
Answer:
a) Myopia

Question 66.
Which of the defect is depicted in the following diagram:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination 9
a) Emmetropia
b) Myopia
c) Hypermetropia
d) Astigmatism.
Answer:
b) Myopia

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination

Question 67.
Match and find the correct sequence.

I. Concave Surgery
II. Convex Hypermetropia
III. Cataract Astigmatism
IV. Cylindrical lens Myopia

a) 1 -a 2-b 3-c 4-c
b) 1 -d 2-b 3-a 4-c
c) 1-d 2-a 3-a 4-b
d) 1-d 2-c 3-b 4-c
Answer:
b) 1 -d 2-b 3-a 4-c

Question 68.
Name the organ which regulates vision perception and homeostasis.
a) Ear
b) Eye
c) Cerebrum
d) Cerebellum.
Answer:
a) Ear

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination

Question 69.
Find out the wrong pair.
a) Pinna – Eardrum
b) Oval window – Round window
c) Cochlea – Malleus
d) Perilymph – Endolymph
Answer:
c) Cochlea – Malleus

Question 70.
Indicate ABC and D in the Diagram.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination 10
a)
a) lncus
b) Eardrum
c) Organ of Corti
d) Tactoreal membrane.
b)
a) Organ of cortri
b) Incus
c) Tectoreal membrane
d)Eardrum
c)
a) Eardrum
b) Incus
c) Organ of Corti
d) Tectoreal membrane
d)
a) Eardrum
b) Incus
c) Tectoreal membrane
d) Organ of Corti
Answer:
d)
a) Eardrum
b) Incus
c) Tectoreal membrane
d) Organ of Corti

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination

Question 71.
Find out the wrong statement.
a) The equilibrium receptor regions called maculae are involved in detecting the linear movement of the head.
b) The otoliths are made up of calcium
c) The crista ampullaris is to detect rotational movement of the head
d) Severe hearing loss occurs with frequent exposure to sound with intensities greater than50db.
(The 90db will affect the hearing).
Answer:
d) Severe hearing loss occurs with frequent exposure to sound with intensities greater than50db.

Question 72.
A person on his way to a village in a car for weekend holidays after finishing the office work. As he is very tired he begins to feel drowsy. He turns up the car stereo volume opens the car window and has sips ice-cold water.
How do these actions keep him awake? The increase in the number of sensory stimuli he received is relayed to the cerebral cortex which gets activated and prevents sleeping,
a) Spinal cord
b) Cerebrum
c) Medulla oblongata
d) Cerebellum.
Answer:
c) Medulla oblongata

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination

Question 73.
Name the structure that connects the middle ear and pharynx.
a) Eustachian tube
b) Middle ear
c) Oval window
d) Organ of the cortii.
Answer:
a) Eustachian tube

Question 74.
Which part of the ear have bony labyrinth and membranous labyrinth?
a) External ear
b) Inner ear
c) Middle ear
d) None of the above.
Answer:
b) Inner ear

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination

Question 75.
Name the structure present in the bony labyrinth.
a) Cochlea, vestibule, maleus
b) Cochlea, vestibule Incus
c) Cochlea semicircular canals, stapes
d) Cochlea, vestibule semicircular canals.
Answer:
d) Cochlea, vestibule semicircular canals.

Question 76.
Where is the stereo cilia cells present in the ear?
a) Scala media
b) Scala vestibuli
c) Scala tymnani
d) Middle ear.
Answer:
a) Scala media

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination

Question 77.
Match and find the correct sequence.

I. Meissner’s corpuscles a) continuous pressure
II. Pacinian corpuscles b) hardness, pain
III. Ruffini endings c) temperature
IV. Krause and bulbs d) light pressure

a) I-d, II-a, III-c, IV-d
b) I-d, II-b, III-c, V-a
c) I-d, II-b, Ill-a, IV-c
d) I-a, II-b, III-c, IV-d
Answer:
c) I-d, II-b, Ill-a, IV-c

Question 78.
When a cockroach tries to enter into the ear of a sleeping person, which one of the following process will start?
a) Unconditioned reflex
b) Neuro muscular fatigue
c) Stimulation of negative feedback mechanism
d) conditioned reflex
Answer:
a) Unconditioned reflex

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination

Question 79.
What is the number of nerve cells present in the brain
a) 90 million
b) 100 billion
c) 90 billion
d) 100 million
Answer:
b) 100 billion

(2 Marks)

II. Write Very Short Answer

Question 1.
What are the two branches of human nervous system?
Answer:

  1. Central nervous system
  2. Peripheral nervous system

Question 2.
What is meant by Neuroglia? What are its functions?
Answer:
The non-nervous special cells called neuroglia from the supporting cells of the nervous tissue.

  1. Providing nourishment to the neurons
  2. Repairing the injured tissues
  3. It helps in dividing and regeneration
  4. Acting as phagocyte cells to engulf the foreign particles at the time of any injury to the brain.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination

Question 3.
Differentiate the functions of myelinated and non-myelinated neurons.
Answer:

Myelinated neuron Non-myelinated neuron
They conduct impulses rapidly Conduct impulse slowly
Present in the medulla Seen in the cortex of the cerebrum.

Question 4.
Give notes on (a) Synaptic Knob (b) Neurotransmitters (c) Inter neural space.
Answer:

  • Synaptic Knob: Distant end of the axon terminates into a bulb
  • Synaptic vesicles: Vesicles filled with neurotransmitters
  • Inter neural space – The space between presynaptic and postsynaptic neurons.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination

Question 5.
What is meant by nerve impulses?
Answer:
A nerve impulse is a series of electrical impulses which travel along with the nerve fibre.

Question 6.
What is meant by resting potential?
Answer:
The electrical potential difference across the plasma membrane of a resting neuron is called the resting potential.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination

Question 7.
What is meant by threshold potential?
Answer:
During depolarization when enough Na+ ions enter the cell the action potential reaches a certain level called threshold potential. (-55 mV)

Question 8.
What is threshold stimulus?
Answer:
The particular stimulus which is able to bring the membrane potential to the threshold is called the threshold stimulus.

Question 9.
What is meant by all or none principle?
Answer:
The action potential occurs in response to a threshold stimulus but does not occur at sub-threshold stimuli. This is called the all or none principle.

Question 10.
What is the cause of brain tumours?
Answer:

  • Glial cells: Nerve cells do not divide but glial cells do not lose the ability to undergo cell division.
  • So most brain tumours of neural origin consist of glial cells.

Question 11.
What are meninges?
Answer:
The brain is covered by outer Duramater, the median Arachnoid mater and the inner Piamater. These membranes are called meninges.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination

Question 12.
What is meant by lazy gate?
Answer:
During hyper polarization the K+ion gates are more permeable to K+ even after reaching threshold level it closes slowly hence called lazy gates.

Question 13.
What is spike potential?
Answer:
Due to the rapid influx of Na+ ions the membrane potential shoots rapidly up +45 mV which is called the spike potential.

Question 14.
What is meant by repolarisation?
Answer:
When the membrane reaches the spike potential the potassium ions K+ efflux from the axolemma and hence form negative potential. This is called repolarisation.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination

Question 15.
What is Hyper polarisation?
Answer:
If repolarisation becomes more negative than the resting potential -70 mV to about -90 mV it is called hyper polarisation.

Question 16.
Which decides the speed of the conduction of a nerve impulse?
Answer:

  • The conduction speed of a nerve impulse depends on the diameter of axon.
  • The greater the axon’s diameter the faster is the conduction.

Question 17.
What is septum pellucidum?
Answer:
A thin membrane which separates the lateral ventricles I and II is called the septum pellucidSamacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination

Question 18.
What is the difference between sub durai space and sub arachnoid space
Answer:

Sub durai space Sub arachnoid space
A narrow sub dural space present in between arachnoid and durameter The space between arachnoid membrane and piameter.

Question 19.
What is meant by sulcus and gyrus? What is its functions.
Answer:

  • Gyri – The convolution seen in the cerebrum.
  • Sulci – The shallow grooves increase the surface area of the cerebral cortex.

Question 20.
Name the lobes of cerebrum?
Answer:

  1. Pair of frontal
  2. Pair of parietal
  3. Pair of temporal
  4. Occipital

Question 21.
What is the function of proca?
Answer:
It involves in speech function.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination

Question 22.
What is meant by a blood brain barrier.
Answer:
It protects the brain by preventing many foreign substances in our vascular system from reaching the brain.

Question 23.
Which part of the cerebrum is called as sheet of emotions?
Answer:
The cortex of parietal occipital and temporal.

Question 24.
What is meant by motor area?
Answer:

  • The area which controls the voluntary muscular movements lies in the posterior part of the frontal lobes.
  • Functions They receive and interpret the sensory impulses.

Question 25.
What is the function of association area?
Answer:
They deal with memory communications learning and reasoning.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination

Question 26.
Where is pineal body situated? What is its functions?
Answer:

It is situated behind the choroid plexus the epithalamus forms short stalk
Functions
The melotoxin secreted by the pineal body regulates sleep wake cycle.

Question 27.
For a man to live all parts of the brain is important. How is brain divided into?
Answer:

  • Cerebrum
  • Thalamus
  • Hypothalamus
  • Pons
  • Cerebellum
  • Medulla oblongata

Question 28.
What is meant by corpus callosum?
Answer:
The two hemispheres of cerebrum is connected with the nerve band known as corpus callosum.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination

Question 29.
What is meant by brain stem? What are its parts?
Answer:
The region between spinal cord and diencephalon.

  1. Mid-brain
  2. Pons varoli
  3. Medulla oblongata

Question 30.
What is meant by corpora quadri gemina? What are its functions.
Answer:

  • The four papillae seen on the dorsal side of mid brain.
  • Perception of vision and hearing

Question 31.
What is meant by reflex arc?
Answer:

  • It is a fast involuntary unplanned sequence of actions that occurs in response to a particular stimulus.
  • The nervous elements that involved in carrying out reflex action constitute reflex arc.

Question 32.
What are the functions of cerebellum?
Answer:
The cerebellum controls and co-ordinates muscular movements and body equilibrium.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination

Question 33.
What is meant by receptors?
Answer:
The organ which made us aware of changes occur in our surrounding is called receptors.

Question 34.
What is meant by voluntary neural system?
Answer:
It is the part of the peripheral neural system associated with the voluntary control of body movements via skeletal muscles

Question 35.
Name the bacteriocidal substance present in the tears? Where is it seen? Name its secretion?
Answer:

  • Lysosome enzyme
  • Seen in tears.
  • Lacrymal glands. 1ml is secreted in a day.

Question 36.
What are mammillary bodies? What are its functions?
Answer:

  • The hypothalamus contains a pair of small rounded body called mammillary bodies.
  • Functions: It is involved in olfactory reflexes and emotional responses to odour.

Question 37.
What are cerebral peduncles?
Answer:
The region between diencephalon and the pons is called midbrain. It consists of a pair of longitudinal bands of nervous tissue called cerebral peduncles.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination

Question 38.
What is brain stem? What are its parts?
Answer:
It is the part of the brain between the spinal cord and the diencephalon.
Organs: Mid-brain, Pons, Medulla oblongata

Question 39.
What is caudo equina?
Answer:

  • After the 2nd lumbar vertebra the spinal nerves are greatly elongated
  • The thick bundle of elongated nerve roots appears as a horse’s tail called as cauda equina.

Question 40.
Where is enlargement region seen in the spinal cord?
Answer:

  • Cervical enlargement
  • Lumbar enlargement.

Question 41.
What is meant by reflex action?
Answer:

  • When a very quick response is needed the spinal cord can effect motor initiation as the brain and brings about an effect.
  • This rapid action by spinal cord is called reflex action.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination

Question 42.
What is meant by peripheral nervous system?
Answer:
All nervous tissue outside the CNS is the nervous system.

Question 43.
What is meant by mixed nerve?
Answer:
Each spinal nerve is a mixed nerve containing both afferent (sensory) and efferent (motor) fibers.

Question 44.
What is meant by pre ganglionic neuron?
Answer:
Its cell body is in the brain or spinal card. Its myelinated axon exits the CNS as part of cranial or spinal nerve and end in an autonomic ganglion.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination

Question 45.
What is autonomic ganglion?
Answer:
The axons of pre ganglionic neuron and cell bodies of post ganglionic neuron includes autonomic ganglion.

Question 46.
What is post ganglionic neuron?
Answer:
It conveys nerve impulses from autonomic ganglia to visceral effector organs.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination

Question 47.
What are the two branches of autonomous nervous system?
Answer:

  1. Sympathetic neural system
  2. Parasympathetic neural system.
  3. varying distances is called accommodation.

Question 48.
Give short notes on Lacrymal glands?
Answer:

  • The tear secreting glands are known as Lacrymal glands.
  • 1ml of tear is secreted in a day.
  • Tear salts, mucous and lysozyme enzyme to destroy bacteria.

Question 49.
What is conjunctiva?
Answer:
It is a thin protective mucous membrane found lining the outer surface of the eye ball.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination

Question 50.
Dilation and congestion of the blood vessels due to local irritation or infections. What is the disease? When will it occur?
Answer:

  • Conjunctivitis or madras eye.
  • Irritation or infection are the cause of blood shot eye.

Question 51.
What is sty?
Answer:
Infection of ciliary glands by bacteria causes a painful pus filled swelling called a sty.

Question 52.
What are the three types of cell present on the neural retina?
Answer:

  • Photo receptor cell
  • Cones
  • Rods
  • Bipolar and ganglion cells.

Question 53.
What is cataract?
Answer:
Due to the changes in nature of protein the lens become opaque called cataract.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination

Question 54.
What is aqueous humour and vitreous humour
Answer:

  • Aqueous humour – The fluid filled in between the cornea and iris.
  • Vitreous humour – Fluid filled in between lens and retina.

Question 55.
Give notes on lens fibres?
Answer:
Eye lens is transparent and biconvex made up of long columnar epithelial cells called lens fibre, these cells are formed of crystalline protein.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination

Question 56.
What are the three layers of eye ball?
Answer:

  1. Sclera – Outer coat
  2. Choroid – Pigmented middle layer
  3. Retina – Inner most layer

Question 58.
What is meant by maculae lutea?
Answer:
The yellow flat spot at the centre of the posterior region of the retina is called macula lutea. It is responsible for sharp detailed vision.

Question 59.
What is fovea centralis?
Answer:
A small depression present in the centre of the yellow spot is called fovea centralis which contains only cones.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination

Question 60.
What is blind spot?
Answer:
The optic nerves and the retinal blood vessels enter the eye slightly below the posterior pole whichis devoid of photoreceptors is called blind spot.

Question 61.
Why there is no cornea rejection during cornea transplantation?
Answer:

  • There is little or no possibility of cornea rejection.
  • This is because cornea does not have blood vessels.

Question 62.
What are the three ear ossicles?
Answer:

  1. Malleus – hammer bone
  2. Incus – anvil bone
  3. Stapes – stirrup bone

Question 63.
What are the three chambers of cochlea?
Answer:

  1. Scala vestibule
  2. Scala tympani
  3. Scala media

Question 64.
What is tectorial membrane?
Answer:
A roof like structure over hanging the organ of corti through out its length with the stiff gel membrane called tectorial membrane.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination

Question 65.
Name the receptors which are excited by airborne chemicals that dissolve in fluids?
Answer:
The receptors for taste and smell are the chemo receptors

Question 66.
What is tactile merkel disc?
Answer:
It is the light touch receptor lying in the deeper layer of epidermis.

Question 67.
What are the structures present in the membranous labyrinth?
Answer:

  • Cochlea
  • Vestibule
  • Semi circular canals

Question 68.
What are the three chambers of cochlea? Name the membrane which separates these chambers?
Answer:

  1. Scala vestibuli
  2. Scala tympanii
  3. Scala media

Separating membranes
Reisner’s membrane. It separates scala vestibuli from scala media
Basilar membrane. It separates scala media from scala tympani.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination

Question 69.
What is meant by stereo cilia?
Answer:

  • The organ of corti contains numerous hair cells on the basilar membrane.
  • Protruding from the apical part of each hair cell is hair like structures called stereo cilia.

Question 70.
What is proprioception?
Answer:
The ability to provide information about position and movements of the body is proprioception.

Question 71.
What is meant by vestibular system?
Answer:
This is the organ of balance this system is composed of fluid filled sacs and tubules.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination

Question 72.
Give notes on utriculus and sacculus?
Answer:
The utricle and saccule contain equilibrium receptor regions called maculae that are involved in detecting the linear movement of the head.

Question 73.
What is otolith?
Answer:

  • Maculae contains hair cells. These hair cells contain calcareous particles called otoliths.
  • It increases the inertia.

Question 74.
What are ampullae?
Answer:
At one end of each semicircular canal at its lower end has a swollen area called ampulla Each ampulla has sensory hair cells and supporting cells called crista ampullaris. The function is to detect rotational movement of the head.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination

Question 75.
Give the name of balancing structures which perform the following action.
a) Linear movement of the head
b) Changes occurring in body position.
c) Rotational movement of the head
Answer:

  • Maculae
  • Vestibular system
  • Crista ampularis

Question 76.
What is the unit of sound? Give notes on our ability of sound perception?
Answer:

  • The intensity of sound is measured in decibels. (dB)
  • 0-50 dB is the threshold of hearing for normal ear.
  • Prolonged exposure to sound with intensities greater than 90dB causes hearing loss.

Question 77.
What are chemo receptors?
Answer:

  • The receptors for taste and smell are the chemo receptors
  • The smell receptors are excited by air borne chemicals that dissolve in fluids.

Question 78.
What are olfactory organs? Where are they situated?
Answer:

  • The yellow coloured patches of olfactory epithelium form the olfactory organs.
  • They are located on the roof of the nasal cavity.

Question 79.
What are papillae?
Answer:
The tongue is provided with many small projection called papillae which is responsible for taste.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination

Question 80.
Give notes on taste buds.
Answer:

  • The taste bud cells are subjected to huge amounts of friction because of their location and are routinely burned by hot foods.
  • These are the most dynamic cells in the body and replaced every seven to ten days.

 

(3 Marks)

III. Short Answers

Question 1.
What are the three main functions of nervous system.
Answer:

  • Sensory functions: It receives sensory input from internal and external environment.
    Motor functions: It transmits motor commands from the brain to the skeletal and muscular system.
  • Autonomic functions: Reflex actions.

Question 2.
How do we classify neurons on the basis of its functions.
Answer:

  • Afferent neurons – That take sensory impulses to the central nervous system from the sensory organs.
  • Efferent neurons – That carry motor impulses from CNS to the effector organ.
  • Inter neurons – That lie entirely within the CNS between the afferent and efferent neurons.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination

Question 3.
What is meant by depolarisation?
Answer:

  • The inside of the axolemma becomes positively charged and negatively charged outside.
    This reversal of electrical charge is called depolarisation.

Question 4.
How is nerve impulses transmitted?
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination 11

  • Inner to the axolemma the cytoplasm contains the infra cellular fluid with large amounts of potassium and magnesium phosphate with negatively charged proteins and other organic molecules.
  • Outside the axolemma contains large amounts of sodium chloride bicarbonates CO2 andmetabolic wastes
  • Due to the charged particles present in the inner and outside of the axolemma are responsible for the conduction of nervous impulses.

Question 5.
What is meant by repolarisation?
Answer:

  • When the axolemma reaches the spike potential the sodium voltage – gate closes and potassium – voltage gate opens.
  • It checks influx of Na+ ions and initiation the efflux of K ions which lowers the number of positive ions within the cell. Thus the potential falls back towards the resting potential.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination 12

  • The reversal of membrane potential inside the axolemma to negative occurs clue to efflux of K+ ions. This is called repolarisation.

Question 6.
What is meant by hyper polarisation.
Answer:

  • If repolarisation becomes more negative than the resting potential -70 mV to about -90 mV.
    • It is called hyper polarisation. During this K+ ion gate are more permeable to K+ even after reaching the threshold level as it closes slowly hence called lazy gates.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination 13

  • The membrane potential return to its original resting state when K+ ion channel close completely.
  • During hyper polarization the Na+ voltage gate remains closed.

Question 7.
Give an account of the conduction speed of a nerve impulse.
Answer:

  • If the axon’s diameter is greater the conduction will be faster.
  • The myelinated axon conducts the impulse faster than the non – myelinated axon.

Question 8.
What is meant by saltatory conduction?
Answer:
The myelinated axon conduction the impulse faster than the non – myelinated axon.
The voltage gated Na+ and K+ channels are concentrated at the nodes of Ranvier as a result the impulse jumps node to node. This is called saltatory conduction.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination

Question 9.
Give an account of the membranes (meninges) of brain?
Answer:
Brain is covered by three cranial meninges.

  1. The outer thicker layer is duramater which lines the inner surface of the cranial cavity.
  2. The inner most layer which is adhered to the brain is piameter.
  3. The median thin layer is arachnoid mater by a narrow subdural space.
  4. The piameter is separated from the arachnoid mater by the subarachnoid space.

Question 10.
List out the functions of brain lobes?
Answer:

Structure Function
Frontal Behaviour intelligence memory movement
Parietal Language reading sensation
Temporal Speech hearing memory
Occipital Visual processing

Question 11.
Why is thalamus considered as a important relay centre for impulse?
Answer:

  • It serves as a relay centre for impulses between the spinal and brain and cerebrum.
  • Information is sorted and edited.
  • It plays a key role in learning and memory.
  • It is a co-ordinating centre for sensory and motor signaling.

Question 12.
Why there may be a death due to the affectation of medulla oblongata?
Answer:

  • Medulla controls cardio-vascular reflexes respiration and gastric secretions.
  • If medulla is getting affected the circulation and respiration is affected.
  • That may cause a death of a person.

Question 13.
Give notes on mid brain?
Answer:

  • The midbrain is located between the diencephalon and the pons.
  • The lower portion of the mid-brain consists of a pair of longitudinal bands of nervous tissue called cerebral peduncles.
  • This relay impulses back and forth between cerebrum cerebellum pons and medulla.
  • The dorsal position of the mid Brain consist of four rounded bodies called corpora quadrigemina which acts as a reflex center for vision and hearing.

Question 14.
What are the features we develop when there is a functional deficiency of serotonin and nor epinephrine?
Answer:
Features:

  • negative mood
  • loss of interest
  • an in ability to experience pleasure
  • suicidal tendencies.

Drugs:
Anti depressant drug can treat all this features.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination

Question 15.
Give notes on cerebro spinal fluid?
Answer:

  • 150ml of cerebro spinal fluid is secreted in an adult.
  • 500ml of cerebro spinal fluid is secreted in a day.
  • Every 8 hours this fluid is rejuvenated.
  • Choroid plexux carries harmful metabolic wastes from the brain to the blood.

Question 16.
Based on their position how the receptors are classified?
Answer:
1. Exteroceptors – They are located at the surface of the body.
These senses the hearing vision touch taste and smell.

2. Introceptors: They are located in the visceral organs and blood vessels.
They are sensitive to internal stimuli.

3. Prerprioceptors:
They provide information about position and movements of the body.

Question 17.
Your friend is returning home after his visit to USA. All at home are waiting for his arrival.
How would you feel? State the division of ANS that predominates and mention few changes take place in your body?
Answer:

  • The sympathetic and parasympathetic neural system are is mainly involved.
  • On seeing his friend out of the happiness his autonomic nervous system is stimulated and he gets tears in his eyes.
  • After sometime the parasympathetic stops the secretion of tears.

Question 18.
What is meant by depression? What are its symptoms?
Answer:

  • Depression is a functional deficiency of serotonin and nor epinephrine.
  • This disorder is characterized by a pervasive negative mood, loss of interest an inability to experience pleasure and suicidal tendencies.

Question 19.
When dust falls on our eyes like eyelids close immediately not waiting for our willingness, on touching a hot pan the hand is with drawn rapidly. Do you know how this happens?
Answer:
Reflex axon.
When a very quick response is needed the spinal cord can effect motor initiation as the brain and brings about an effect it is due to fast action of spinal cord.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination

Question 20.
What are the differences between conditioned and unconditioned reflex.
Answer:

Unconditioned reflex Conditioned reflex
In born reflex for an unconditioned stimulus. It’s response to a stimulus acquired by learning.
It does not need any past experience or training Does not naturally exists in animals.
Eg: Blinking of an eye when a dust particle about to fall in it Eg: Excitement of salivary gland on seeing a food

Question 21.
What is the difference between exteroceptors and interoceptors.
Answer:

Exteroceptors Interoceptors
Located at or near the surface of the body They are located in the visceral organs and blood vessels.
These receive impulses from hearing vision touch taste and smell. They are sensitive to internal stimuli.

Question 22.
Where are lens fiber seen? What is the substance that fills it?
Answer:

  • The lens is a transparent biconvex structure made up of slender columnar epithelial cells.
  • These cells are called as lens fibre.
  • These cells are formed of crystaline protein.

Question 23.
What is meant by accommodation of eye? List the structures that are involved in this process?
Answer:

  • The ability of the eyes to focus objects at varying distances is called accommodation.
  • This is achieved by suspensory ligament ciliary muscle and ciliary body

Question 24.
Name the structures that helps in fixing eyes in the eye ball?
Answer:
Eye is held in its position with the help of six extrinsic muscles.
They are
Superior
Interior
Lateral
Median rectus muscle
Superior oblique
Inferior oblique

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination

Question 25.
Name the accessory structure which protects eye?
Answer:

  • Eye lashes and the eye brows
  • They help to protect the eyeballs from foreign objects, perspiration and from direct sunrays.
  • Sebaceous glands or ciliary glands.
  • They secrete a lubricating fluid.
  • Lacrymal glands.
  • Secrete tears.
  • Tears contain salts mucus and lysozyme enzyme to destroy bacteria.

Question 26.
Give an account of aqueous humour?
Answer:

  • It supplies nutrients and oxygen to the lens cornea and retinal cells.
  • It is produced and drained at same rate.
  • It maintains a constant infra ocular pressure of about 16 mmHg.

Question 27.
Give short notes on glaucoma.
Answer:
Any block in the canal of Schlemm increases the intra ocular pressure of aqueous humour and leads to “glaucoma when the optic nerve and the retina are compressed due to pressure.

Question 28.
Name the detects of detraction.
Answer:

  • Myopia
  • Hyper metropia
  • Astigmatism
  • Cataract

Question 29.
Give notes on pigments of colour vision
Answer:

  • Redcones. It contains visual pigment erythropsin which is sensitive to long wavelength close to 560 nm.
  • Green cones – It has a pigment chloropsin which is sensitive to medium wavelength of 530 nm.
  • Blue cones – It has a pigment which is sensitive to short wavelength of 420 nm.

Question 30.
What is the difference between conducting hearing loss and neuro sensory hearing loss.
Answer:

Conducting Hearing loss Neuro sensory
This defect is due to the blockage of ear canal with ear wax The defect may be in the organ of cortii
Rupture of ear The auditory nerve
Middle ear infection with fluid accumulation restriction of ossicular movement In the ascending auditory pathways or auditory cortex

Question 31.
Give short notes on melanin.
Answer:

  • Melanocytes synthesize melanin.
  • It gives colour to skin and protects it from the sun.
  • Vitiligo is a condition in which the melanin pigment is lost from the areas of the skin causing white patches.
  • The leukoderma appears when melanocytes fails to synthesis melanin pigment.

Question 32.
What is meant by the proprioception?
Answer:

  • Balance is part of a sense called proprioception.
  • It is the ability to sense the position orientation and movement of the body.

Question 33.
Which is the fastest renewable cells in the body? How is it affected?
Answer:
Taste buds

  • Taste buds are subjected to huge amounts of friction because of their location and are routinely burned by hot foods.
  • These cells are replaced every 7-10 days.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination

Question 34.
Name the disease which can affect people of any age gender or ethnic group. This is not the contagious disease?
Answer:
Leucoderma is a condition in which the melanin pigment is lost from areas of the skin causing white patches.

Question 35.
What are meissner’s corpuscles?
Answer:

  • These are small light pressure receptors found just beneath the epidermis in the dermal papillae.
  • They are numerous in hairless skin areas such as finger tips and soles of the feat.

(5 Marks)

IV. Brief Answers

Question 1.
Describe structure of a neuron.
Answer:
Neuron is composed of three region.

  1. Cell body
  2. Dendrites
  3. axon.

Cell body:
The cell body is spherical. There is no centriole.
The plasma membrane covering the neuron is called neurilemma and axon is axolemma.

Dendrites:
The repeatedly branched short fibres coming out of the cell bod dendrites which transmit impulses towards the cell body in it’s cytoplasm Nissl’s granules are present.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination 14
Axon:
It is a long fibre that arises from a cone shaped area of the cell body. There is no golgi bodies and Nissis granules in its cytoplasm.
The axon of peripheral nerves is surrounded by Schwann’s cells to form myelin sheath. The myelin sheath is not continuous. There are gaps in the myelin sheath between an adjacent Schwann cells called nodes of Ranvier.
Each branch at the distal end of the axon terminates into a knob like structure called synaptic knob which possesses synaptic vesicles filled with transmitters. The axon transmits nerve impulses away from the body to neuro muscular junction. The myelinated nerve cell transmits impulses faster than non – myelinated nerve cells.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination

Question 2.
Describe about the different types of neuron with diagram?
Answer:
1. Multi polar neurons:
They have many processes with one axon and two or more dendrites.

2. Bipolar neurons:
They have two processes with one axon and one dendrites.
These are found in the retina of the eye, inner ear and the olfactory area of the brain.

3. Unipolar neurons:
They have a single short process and one axon.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination 15

Question 3.
Give an account of Ionic channels in the axolemma?
Answer:
Ionic channels:

  1. Leakage channels
  2.  Ligand – gated channels
  3. Voltage-gated channels.

1. Leakage channels:

    • These channels are always remain open.
    • K+ leakage channels are more in number than the Na+ leakage channels.
    • Sarco lemma has greater permeability to k+ icons than Na+ icons
    • These icons keep moving continuously to maintain the potential continuously to maintain the
    • potential difference across the axo lemma.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination 16

2. Ligand – gated channels:
These are chemic called gated channels which open or close in response to a chemical stimuli.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination 17

  • They are located between the pre synaptic membrane of the first axon and post synaptic membrane of the second.
  • The neurotransmitter acetylcholine opens ligand channels that allow Na+ and Ca++ ions diffuse inward and K+ icon diffuse outward.

Voltage-gated channels:
Answer:
This channels open in response to a physical stimulus in the form of vibration such as touch and pressure.

  • Sodium Voltage gated channels.
  • Potassium Voltage gated channels.

Question 4.
Give an account of resting potential?
Answer:

  • The electrical potential difference across the plasma membrane of a resting neuron is called the resting potential.
  • More potassium is getting out of the neurilemma rather than sodium which is getting into.
  • Hence the interior of the cell becomes negative.
  • In resting condition the axon membrane is more permeable to K+ and less permeable to Na+ cons whereas it remains impermeable to negatively charged protein icons.
  • In the outer side of axon there is low concentration of K+ and high concentration of Na+ ions.
  • This difference can be maintained by ATP – driven sodium – potassium pump. This exchange 3 Na+ outwards for 2K+ in the cells.
  • In neuron the resting membrane potential ranges from 40mv to 90mv.
  • And its normal value is 70mv.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination

Question 5.
a) What is meant by action – membrane potential?
b) What is Depolarisation?
Answer:
a) An action potential occurs when a neuron sends information down an axon away from the cell body.
b) When a nerve fibre is stimulated sodium voltage gate opens and makes the axo lemma permeable to Na++ and the potassium voltage gate closes and potassium is getting out of the axo lemma. The concentration reduces
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination 18

  • The axo lemma becomes positively charged inside and negatively charged outside.
  • This reversal of electrical charge is called depolarisation potential reaches level called threshold potential (-55mV)
  • The stimulus which bring this threshold potential is called threshold stimulus.
  • The action potential occur in response to a threshold stimulus but does not occur at subthreshold stimuli. This is called all or none principle.
  • Due to the rapid influx of Na+ ions the membrane potential shoots rapidly up to +45mV which is called the spike potential.

Question 6.
What is synapsis?
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination 19

  • The junction between two neurons is called a synapses through which a nerve impulse is transmitted,
  • The first neuron involved in the synapse forms the pre synaptic neuron and the second neuron is the post – synaptic neuron
  • A small gap between the two neuron is synaptic cleft.
  • The axon terminals contain synaptic vesicles filled with neurotransmitters.
  • When an impulse arrives at the axon terminals it depolorizes the pre – synaptic membrane opening the voltage gated calcium channels.
  • Influx of calcium ions stimulates the synaptic vesicles toward the pre – synaptic membrane and fuse with it.
  • In the neurilemma the vesicles release their neurotransmitters into the synaptic cleft by exocytosis.
  • The released neurotransmitters bind to their specific receptors.
  • The entry of the ions can generate a new potential in the post synaptic neuron.
  • This excitatory post – synaptic potential causes depolarisation and in inhibitory post – synaptic potential causes hyperpolarisation.

Question 7.
In the following diagram indicate
Answer:
(A) – Frontal
(B) – parietal
(C) – occipital
(D) – temporal lobe
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination 20

Question 8.
Describe the structure of human brain with a diagram?
Answer:

  • The brain is located in the cranial cavity and it is covered by three cranial membranes.
  • The outer layer — durameter the inner most layer piameter and the median thin layer arachnoid. The brain is divided into three major regions. Fore brain, Mid-brain, Hind

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination 21

  • It comprises of cerebrum and diencephalon.
  • Tire cerebral cortex is composed of grey and unmyelinated nerve cells.
  • The medulla is composed of white mater.
  • The surface of the cerebrum shows many convolutions and grooves. The folds are called gyri and the shallow groove is sulci.

There are eight lobes in cerebrum.
A pair of frontals, parietals temporals and occipital lobes.
The longitudinal fissure divides the cerebrum | longitudinally into two hemispheres The hemispheres are connected by a tract of nerve fibres called corpus callosum.
Cerebral cortex has three functional areas

Sensory areas :
It occurs in the parietal temporal and occipital lobes of the cortex.

Motor areas :
This controls voluntary muscular movement which lies in the posterior part of the frontal iobes.

Association area :
It lies in between cortex and diencephalan This involves in memory communication learning and reasoning.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination

Question 9.
Describe the structure of hind brain?
Answer:
Rhombencephalon forms the hind brain.
It comprises of cerebellum pons varolii and medulla oblongata.

Cerebellum:
It is the second largest part of the brain. It consists of two cerebellar hemisphere and central worm shaped part the vermis.

Function:
It controls and coordinates muscular movements and body equilibrium.
Any damage to cerebellum results in unco-ordinated voluntary muscle movements.

Pons varoli:
It lies in between the midbrain and the medulla oblongata.
This form a bridge between the two cerebellar hemisphere and connect the medulla oblongata with the other region of the brain.

Medulla oblongata:
This forms the posterior most part of the brain. It connects the spinal cord with various parts of the brain.
It receives and integrates signals from spinal cord and sends it to the cerebellum and thalamus.

Function:
It controls cardiovascular reflexes respiration and gastric secretions.

Question 10.
Describe the structures of diencephalon?
Answer:
Epithalamus

  • It is a non – nervous tissue.
  • The anterior part of epithalamus is vascular and folded to form the anterior choroid plexus.
  • The epithalamus forms a short stalk which ends in a rounded body called pineal body.
  • This secretes the hormone melotonin which regulates sleep and wake cycle.

Thalamus

  • It is formed of grey matter
  • It serves as a relay centre for impulses between the spinal cord brain stem and cerebrum.
  • It plays a key role in learning and memory.
  • It is a major co-ordinating centre for sensory and motor signalling.

Hypothalamus

  • It forms the floor of the diencephalon.
  • It has a pair of small rounded body called mammillary bodies
  • It involves in olfactory reflexes and emotional responses to odour.
  • It maintains homeostasis.
  • It controls the body temperature.
  • Urge for eating and drinking.
  • It also contains a group of neuro secretory cells which secrete the hypothalamic hormones.
  • It also acts as the satiety centre.

Question 11.
Give an account of ventricles of the brain.
Answer:

  • The brain has four hollow fluid filled spaces.
  • The c – shaped space found inside each cerebral hemisphere forms the lateral ventricles I and II which are separated by a thin membrane called the septum pellucidum. Each lateral ventricle communicates with the III ventricle through opening called foramen of mortro.
  • The III ventricle opens in to the IV th ventricle through a canal called aqueduct of sylvius. Choroid plexus is a network of blood capillaries found in the root of the ventricles and forms cerebro spinal fluid.

Functions

  • CSF provides buoyancy to the CNS.
  • It acts as a shock absorber.
  • It nourishes the brain by supplying food and oxygen.
  • It carries harmful metabolic wastes from the brain to the blood.
  • It maintains a constant pressure inside the cranial vessels

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination

Question 12.
Differentiate the conditioned stimulus from unconditioned stimulus.
Answer:

Conditioned Unconditioned
1. Not through learning Acquired by learning
2. In born reflex It is not an in born reflex
3. It does not need any past experience Experience makes it a part of the behaviour
4. Eg: Blinking of an eye when a dust fall in to it. Eg: Secretion of salivary gland on seeing the food

Question 13.
Tabulate the nerves and functions and its nature of 6-12th cranial nerves.
Answer:

Cranial nerves Nature of nerve Function
I Olfactory nerve Sensory Sense of smell
II Optic nerve Sensory Sense of sight
III Oculomotor nerve Motor Movement of the eye
IV Trochlear nerve Motor Rotation of the eye ball
V Trigeminal nerve Sensory and motor (mixed) Functioning of facial parts
VI Abducens nerve Motor Rotation of the eye ball
VII Facial nerve Mixed Functioning of facial parts
VIII Auditory/ Vestibulocochlear nerve Sensory Maintains the equilibrium of the body/ Auditory function
IX Glossopharyngeal nerve Mixed Taste and touch
X Vagus Mixed Regulation of the visceral organs
XI Spinal accessory Motor Muscular movement of pharynx, larynx, neck and shoulder
XII Hypoglossal Motor Speech and swallowing

Question 14.
Tabulate the functions of sympathetic and para sympathetic nerve.
Answer:

Sympathetic nervous system Para sympathetic nervous system
1. It dialates pupil It constricts pupil of the eye
2. It inhibits the secretion of saliva It stimulates saliva secretion
3. It increases the heart beat It reduces the heart beat
4. It dialates bronches It constricts the bronchus
5. It inhibits digestion It stimulates digestion
6. It increases the glucose release It stimulates bile release
7. Stimulates epinephrine and nor epinephrine release It reduces the epinephrine and nor epinephrine release
8. Inhibits peristalsis and secretion Stimulates peristalsis and secretion
9. Reflexes bladder Contracts bladder

Question 15.
Describe the structure of cross section of spinal cord.
Answer:

  • There are two indentations the posterior median sulcus and the anterior median fissure.
  • In the spinal cord the grey matter forms an inner butterfly shaped region surrounded by the outer white matter.
  • The grey matter consists of dendrites inter neurons and guai cells.
  • White matter consists of bundles of nerve fibres.
  • Each half of the grey matter is divided into a
  • Dorsal horn – Cell bodies of inter neurons.
  • Ventral horn – Efferent motor neurons supplying the skeletal muscle.
  • Lateral horn – Nerves supply to heart smooth muscles exocrine glands. Originate from the cell bodies.
  • Ascending tract – This carry sensory impulses to the brain.
  • Descending tract – This carry motor impulses to brain.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination 22

Question 16.
Give an account of the functional components of a reflex arc.
Answer:
Sensory receptor – It is a sensory structure that responds to specific stimulus.
Sensory neuron – This neuron takes the sensory impulse to the grey (afferent) matter of the
spinal cord through the dorsal root of the spinal cord.
Inter neuron – It may serve to transmit the impulses from the sensory neuron to the motor neuron.
Motor neuron – It transmits impulse from CNS to the effector organ
Effector neuron – It may be a muscle or gland which responds to the impulse received.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination 23

  • Lacrymal glands located in the upper lateral region of each orbit secrete tears.
  • Tears are secreted at the rate of 1 ml/day.
  • Tears contain salt mucus and lysozyme enzyme to destroy bacteria.
  • The protective mucus membrane present in the outer surface of the eye ball.
  • The eye has two compartments anterior and posterior compartments filled with aqueous humour and vitreous humour respectively.
  • The eye ball is consists of three layers sclera, vascular choroid and sensory retina.

Sclera

  • It consists of anterior cornea and the posterior sclera.
  • Cornea is composed of stratified squamous epithelium. Sclera forms the white of the eye and protects the eyeball.
  • At the junction of the sclera and the cornea is a channel called canal of schlemm which continuously drains out the excess of aqueous humour.

Choroid layer
It is highly vascularised pigmented layer.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination

Question 17.
Tabulate the differences between sympathetic and parasympathetic neural system.
Answer:

Sympathetic Neural System (SNS) Parasympathetic Neural System (PNS)
SNS originates in the thoracic and lumbar region of the spinal cord. PNS originates in the cranial region of the brain and the sacral region of the spinal cord.
Sympathetic ganglia are linked up to form a chain. Its ganglia remain isolated
Preganglionic fibres are short and the postganglionic fibres are long. Preganglionic fibres are long and the postganglionic fibres are short.
Noradrenaline is produced at the terminal ends of the postganglionic fibres at the effector organs. Hence the system is adrenergic. Acetylcholine is produced at the terminal ends of the postganglionic fibres at the effector organs. Hence the system is cholinergic.
Active during stressful conditions preparing the body to face them. Active during relaxing times restoring normal activity after a stress.
The overall effect is excitatory and stimulating. The overall effect is inhibitory.
It is considered as the flight or fight system. It is considered as “The rest and Digest System” or “The Feed and Breed System”.

Question 18.
Give an account of peripheral nervous system.
Answer:

  • All nervous tissue outside the central nervous system is the peripheral neural system.
  • It includes nerves ganglia enteric plexuses and sensory receptors.
  • Ganglia are sinai! masses of nervous tissue.
  • The neurons of these plexuses help in regulating the digestive system.
  • The specialised structure that helps to respond to changes in the environment are called sensory receptor.
  • This triggers nerve impulses along the afferent fibres to CNS.
  • PNS comprises of 12 pairs of cranial nerves and 31 pairs of spinal nerve.
  • The neural retina layer consists of cones and rods.
  • The yellow flat spot at the centre of the posterior region of the retina is called macula lutea.
  • A small depression present in the centre of the

Question 19.
Describe the structure of an eye.
Answer:

  • Eye is located in the orbit of the skull and held in its position with the help of six-extrinsic muscles.
  • Eye lashes and the eye brows help to protect the eyeballs.
  • Anteriorly the choroid thickens to form the ciliary body and coloured portion of the iris.
  • The aperture at the centre of the iris is the pupil through which the light enters.
  • The ability of the eyes to focus objects at varying distances is called accommodation which is achieved by suspensory ligament ciliary muscle and ciliary body.

Retina

  • It contains two region.
  • A sheet of non visual pigmented part neural visual region.
  • yellow spot is called fovea centralis which contains only cones.
  • The optic nerves and the retinal blood vessels enter the eye slightly below the posterior pole which is devoid of photo receptors called blind spot.

Question 20.
Draw the diagram of cross section of the eye.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination 24

Question 21.
Describe about the mechanism of vision.
Answer:

  • When light enters the eye it gets refracted by the cornea, aqueous humor and lens and it is focused on the retina and excites the rod and cone cells.
  • The rods and cones contain the retinal a derivative of vitamin A and the photo pigment opsin.
  • Light induces dissociation of retinal from opsin and causes the structural changes in opsin.
  • This generates an action potential in the photo receptor cells.
  • It is transmitted by the optic nerves to the visual cortex of the brain via the optic nerves for the perception of vision.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination 25

Question 22.
List the refractive errors of eye.
Answer:
Myopia

  • The affected person cannot see distant objects.
  • As the eyeball is elongated or thickened lens the image of distant object is formed in front of the yellow spot.
  • This error can be corrected using concave lens.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination 26

Hyper metropia

  • Affected person cannot see the nearby objects.
  • This is due to a shortened eyeball and thin lens. So the image of closest object is converged behind the retina.
  • This defect can be corrected by using convex lens.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination 27

Presbyopia

  • Due to aging the lens loses elasticity and power of accommodation.
  • Convex lenses are used to correct this defect.

Astigmatism

  • It is due to the rough curvature of cornea or lens.
  • Cylindrical glasses are used to correct this error.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination

Question 23.
Describe the structure of an ear?
Answer:
Anatomically the ear is divided into three regions external ear middle ear and inner ear.
External ear:-

  • It consists of pinna external auditory meatus and ear drum.
  • The pinna collects the sound waves.
  • The external auditory meatus extends up to the tympanic membrane.
  • The tympanic membrane is covered with skin outside and with mucus membrane inside.

Middle ea:-

  • It is a air filled cavity in the temporal bone.
  • The middle ear contains three ossicles malleus incus and stapes.
  • The malleus is attached to the tympanic membrane and its head articulates with the incus.
  • The stapes is attached to the oval window in the inner ear.
  • The Eustachian tube connects the middle ear cavity with the pharynx

Inner ear:-

  • It is the fluid filled cavity consisting of two parts the bony labyrinth and the membranous labyrinths.
  • The bony labyrinth consists of three areas, cochlea, vestibule and semicircular canals.

a Cochlea is a coiled portion consist of 3 chambers namely.

  1. Scala vestibule
  2. Scala media
  3. Scala tympanii.

Scala vestibule and scala tympani are filled with peri lymph.
The scala media is filled with endo lymph.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination 28

Question 24.
Describe the structure and functions of organ of cortii.
Answer:

  • Organ of corti is a sensory ridge located on the top of the basilar membrane.
  • Basilar membrane contains numerous hair cells that are arranged in four rows.
  • Protruding from the apical part of each hair cell is hair like structures known as stereocilia.
  • On the organ of cortii a stiff gel membrane called tectorial membrane is situated.
  • During the conduction of sound wave sterocilia makes contact with tectorial membrane.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination 29

Question 25.
Give an account of mechanism of sound?
Answer:

  • Sound waves entering the external auditory meatus fall on the tympanic membrane and gets vibrated.
  • These vibrations are transmitted to the oval window through the three ear ossicles.
  • Since tympani membrane is 17-20 times larger than the oval windows. This pressure exerted on the oval window is about 20 times more than that on the tympanic membrane.
  • This pressure causes the round window to alternately bulge outward and inward mean while the basilar membrane along with the organ of corti move up and down.
  • These movements of hair alternately open and close the mechanically gated ion channel causes action potential.
  • This is propagated to the brain as sound sensation through cochlear nerve.

Question 26.
Differentiate the rods from cones.
Answer:

Rods Cones
1. Helps in seeing in dim light Colour perception in bright light
2. Contains Rhodopsin pigment Contains photopsin
3. The protein retinol and vitamins aldehyde combine to form scotoptin called Rhodopsin The protein opsin and retinol combines to form photopsin.
4. There are 120 million rods are seen on the retina 6-7 million cone cells are seen on the retina
5. Rods are seen richly over the surface of the foveal region. Cones are richly present on the foveal region.

Question 27.
A man is chating with his family in this time a house fly sits on his back at once he lifts the hand and strikes the fly. How can he know that? What are the structures involved in this perception?
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination 30

  • The skin senses this skin is the largest sense organ.
  • All over the skin sensory receptors of pressure heat cold and pain.
  • Following are the sensory receptors of skin.

Tactile merkel disc

  • It is a light touch receptor lying in the deeper layer of epdidermis.
  • Hair follicle receptors. These are light touch receptors lying around the hair follicles.

Meissner’s corpuscles

  • These are small light pressure receptors found just beneath the epidermis in the dermal papillae.
  • They are numerous in hair less skin areas such as finger tips and soles of the feet.

Pacinian corpuscles

  • These are the large egg shaped receptors found scattered in the dermis.
  • It detects different textures temperature hardness and pain.

Ruffini endings
This lie in the dermis responds to continuous pressure Krause end bulbs are thermo receptors that sense temperature.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination

Question 28.
Give notes on Defects of ear.
Answer:

  • Deafness may be temporary or permanent
  • Conductive deafness
  • Possible causes
  • The blockage of ear canal with ear wax.
  • Rupture of ear drum.
  • Middle ear infection with fluid accumulation,
  • Restriction of ossicular movement.
  • Sensory-neural deafness
  • The defect may be in the organ of cortii or the auditory nerve or in the ascending auditory pathways or auditory cortex.

Question 29.
a) What is meant by proprioception?
b) Give an account of organs of equilibrium?
Answer:
The ability to sense the position orientation and movement of the body is called proprioception.
1. Vestibular system: This is the organ of balance.
It is composed of a series of fluid filled sacs contain endolymph and are kept in the surrounding peri lymph.

Semicircular canals

  • The canals that lie posterior and lateral to the vestibule are semi circular canals.
  • At each end of semi circular canal has a swollen area called ampulla.
  • Each ampulla has a sensory area known as crista ampullaris.
  • It detects the rotational movement of the head.

Question 30.
Give notes on Gustatory receptors?
Answer:

  • The sense of taste is considered to be the most pleasurable of all senses.
  • The tongue is provided with many small projections called papillae which gives the tongue an abrasive feel.
  • Most taste buds are located on the tongue few are scattered on the soft palate inner surface of the cheeks.

Structure
Taste buds are flask shaped and consists of 50 -100 epithelial cells of two major types.

  1. ustatory epithelial cells: Taste cells.
  2. Basal epithelial cells

Gustatory epithelial cells:

  • Long gustatory hairs project from the tip of the gustatory cells and extends through a taste pore senses the taste.
  • The sensory dendrites send signal to the brain and senses the taste.
  • The basal cells differentiates in to new gustatory cells.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination

Question 31.
Describe the structure of the receptor involved with a diagram.
Answer:

  • Taste buds are flask shaped. There are two major types.
  • Gustatory epithelial cells or taste cells.
  • Basal epithelial cells or repairing cells.
  • Long micro villi called gustatory hairs project from the tip of the gustatory cells and extends through a taste pore to the surface of the epithelium.
  • Gustatory hairs are tire sensitive portion of the gustatory cells and they have sensory dendrites which send the signal to the brain.
  • The basal cells that act as stem cells divide and differentiate into new gustatory cells.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Zoology Guide Chapter 10 Neural Control and Coordination 31

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 12 Basic Concepts of Organic Reactions

Tamilnadu State Board New Syllabus Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Pdf Chapter 12 Basic Concepts of Organic Reactions Text Book Back Questions and Answers, Notes.

Tamilnadu Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Basic Concepts of Organic Reactions

11th Chemistry Guide Basic Concepts of Organic Reactions Text Book Back Questions and Answers

Textbook Evaluation:

I. Choose the best answer:

Question 1.
For the following reactions
(A) CH3CH2CH2Br + KOH → CH3 – CH = CH2 + KBr + H2O

(B) (CH3)3CBr + KOH → (CH3)3COH + KBr

(C) Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 12 Basic Concepts of Organic Reactions 1
Which of the following statement is correct?
a) (A) is elimination, (B) and (C) are substitution
b) (A) is substitution, (B) and (C) are elimination
c) (A) and (B) are elimination and (C) is addition reaction
d) (A) is elimination, (B) is substitution and (C) is addition reaction
Answer:
d) (A) is elimination, (B) is substitution and (C) is addition reaction

Question 2.
What is the hybridisation state of benzyl carbonium ion?
a) sp2
b) spd2
c) sp3
d) sp2d
Answer:
a) sp2

Question 3.
Decreasing order of nucleophilicity is
a) OH > NH2 > -OCH3 > RNH2
b) NH2 > OH > -OCH3 > RNH2
c) NH2 > CH3O > OH > RNH2
d) CH3O > NH2 > OH > RNH2
Answer:
b) NH2 > OH > -OCH3 > RNH2

Question 4.
Which of the following species is not electrophilic in nature?
a) Cl+
b) BH3
c) H3O+
d) +NO2
Answer:
c) H3O+

Question 5.
Homolytic fission of covalent bond leads to the formation of
a) electrophile
b) nucleophile
c) carbocation
d) free radical
Answer:
d) free radical

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 12 Basic Concepts of Organic Reactions

Question 6.
Hyper conjucation is also known as
a) no bond resonance
b) Baker – nathan effect
c) both (a) and (b)
d) none of these
Answer:
c) both (a) and (b)

Question 7.
Which of the group has highest + I effect?
a) CH3
b) CH3 – CH2
c) (CH3)2 – CH-
d) (CH3)3 – C –
Answer:
d) (CH3)3 – C –

Question 8.
Which of the following species does not exert a resonance effect?
a) C6H5OH
b) C6H5Cl
c) C6H5NH2
d) C6H5NH3
Answer:
d) C6H5NH3

Question 9.
– I effect is shown by
a) – Cl
b) – Br
c) both (a) and (b)
d) – CH3
Answer:
c) both (a) and (b)

Question 10.
Which of the following carbocation will be most stable?
a) Ph3+C –
b) CH3+CH2
c) (CH3)2+CH
d) CH2 = CH – +CH2
Answer:
d) CH2 = CH – +CH2

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 12 Basic Concepts of Organic Reactions

Question 11.
Assertion:
Tertiary Carbocations are generally formed more easily than primary Carbocations ions.
Reason:
Hyper conjucation as well as inductive effect due to additional alkyl group stabilize tertiary carbonium ions.
a) both assertion and reason are true and reason is the correct explanation of assertion.
b) both assertion and reason are true but reason is not the correct explanation of assertion.
c) assertion is true but reason is false.
d) both assertion and reason are false.
Answer:
a) both assertion and reason are true and reason is the correct explanation of assertion.

Question 12.
Heterolytic fission of C – Br bond results in the formation of
a) free radical
b) Carbanion
c) Carbocation
d) Carbanion and Carbocation
Answer:
d) Carbanion and Carbocation

Question 13.
Which of the following represent a set of nucleophiles?
a) BF3, H2O, NH2-
b) AlCl3, BF3, NH3
c) CN, RCH2, ROH
d) H+, RNH3+, :CCl2
Answer:
c) CN, RCH2, ROH

Question 14.
Which of the following species does not acts as a nucleophile?
a) ROH
b) ROR
c) PCl3
d) BF3
Answer:
d) BF3

Question 15.
The geometrical shape of carbocation is
a) Linear
b) tetrahedral
c) Planar
d) Pyramidal
Answer:
c) Planar

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 12 Basic Concepts of Organic Reactions

II. Write brief answer to the following questions:

Question 16.
Write short notes on
a) Resonance
b) Hyper Conjucation
Answer:
a) Resonance (or) Mesomeric effect:
The resonance is a chemical phenomenon which is observed in certain organic compounds possessing double bonds at a suitable position. Certain organic compounds can be represented by more than one structure and they differ only in the position of bonding and lone pair of electrons. Such structures are called resonance structures (canonical structures) and this phenomenon is called resonance. This phenomenon is also called mesomerism or mesomeric effect.

For example, the structure of aromatic compounds such as benzene and conjugated systems like 1,3 – butadiene cannot be represented by a single structure, and their, observed properties can be explained on the basis of a resonance hybrid.

In 1,3 butadiene, it is expected that the bond between C1 – C2 and C3 – C4 should be shorter than that of C2 – C3, but the observed bond lengths are of same. This property cannot be explained by a simple structure in which two n bonds localised between C1 – C2 and C3 – C4. Actually the n electrons are delocalised as shown below.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 12 Basic Concepts of Organic Reactions 2

The resonating structures are called canonical forms and the actual structure lies between these three resonating structures, and is called a resonance hybrid. The resonance hybrid is represented as below.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 12 Basic Concepts of Organic Reactions 3

Similar to the other electron displacement effect, mesomeric effect is also classified into positive mesomeric effect (+M or +R) and negative mesomeric effect (-M or -R) based on the nature of the functional group present adjacent to the multiple bond.

b) Hyper Conjucation:
The delocalisation of electrons of a bond is called as hyper conjugation. It is a special stabilising effect that results due to the interaction of electrons of a σ -bond (usually C – H or C – C) with the adjacent, empty non-bonding p-orbital or an anti¬bonding σ* or π*-orbitals resulting in an extended molecular orbital. Unlike electromeric effect, hyper conjugation is a permanent effect.

It requires an α-CH group or a lone pair on atom like N, O adjacent to a π bond (sp2 hybrid carbon). It occurs by the overlapping of the σ-bonding orbitai or the orbital containing a lone pair with the adjacent π-orbital or p-orbital.

Example:
In propene, the σ -electrons of C-H bond of methyl group can be delocalised into the π -orbital of doubly bonded carbonas represented below.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 12 Basic Concepts of Organic Reactions 4

In the above structure the sigma bond is involved in resonance and breaks in order to supply electrons for delocalization giving rise to 3 new canonical forms. In the contributing canonical structures: (Il), (III) & (IV) of propene, there is no bond between an α-carbon and one of the hydrogen atoms. Hence the hyper conjugation is also known as “no bond resonance” or “Baker Nathan effect”. The structures (II), (III) & (IV) are polar in nature.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 12 Basic Concepts of Organic Reactions

Question 17.
What are electrophiles and nucleophiles? Give suitable examples for each.
Answer:
Nucleophiles are reagents that has high affinity for electron positive centers. They possess an atom has an unshared
pair of electrons, and hence it is in search for an electro positive centre where it can have an opportunity to share its electrons to form a covalent bond, and gets stabilised. They are usually negatively charged ions or electron rich neutral molecules (contains one or more lone pair of electrons). All Lewis bases act as nucleophiles.
Example :
Ammonia(NH3) and amines (RNH2), water (H2O), alcohols (ROH) and ethers ((R-O-R)

Electrophiles:
Electrophiles are reagents that are attracted towards negative charge or electron rich center. They are either positively charged ions or electron deficient neutral molecules. All Lewis acids acts as electrophiles. Neutral molecules like SnCl4 can also act as an electrophile, as it has vacant d – orbitals which can accommodate the electrons from others.
Example:
Carbon dioxide (CO2), dichlorocarbene (: CCl2), Aluminium chloride (AlCl3), boron trifluoride (BF3) and Ferric Chloride (FeCl3)

Question 18.
Show the heterolysis of covalent bond by using curved arrow notation and complete the following equations. Identify the nucelophile in each case.
i) CH3 – Br + KOH →
ii) CH3 – O – CH3 + HI →
Answer:
(i) CH3 – Br + KOH →
CH3 – Br + KQH → CH3OH + KBr
Nucleophile is : OH

ii) CH3 – O – CH3 + HI →
H            I
CH3 – O – CH3 + HI → CH3OH + CH3 I
Nucleophile is : I

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 12 Basic Concepts of Organic Reactions

Question 19.
Explain inductive effect with suitable example.
Answer:
Inductive effect is defined as the change in the polarisation of a covalent bond due to the presence of adjacent bonds, atoms or groups in the molecule. This is a permanent phenomenon.

Let us explain the inductive effect by considering ethane and ethylchloride as examples. The C-C bond in ethane is non polar while the C-C bond in ethyl chloride is polar. We know that chlorine is more electronegative than carbon, and hence it attracts the shared pair of electron between C-Cl in ethyl chloride towards itself. This develops a slight negative charge on chlorine and a slight positive charge on carbon to which chlorine is attached.

To compensate it, the C1 draws the shared pair of electron between itself and C2 This polarisation effect is called inductive effect. This effect is greatest for the adjacent bonds, but they also be felt farther away. However, the magnitude of the charge separation decreases rapidly, as we move away from C2 and is observed maximum for 2 carbons and almost insignificant after 4 bonds from the active group.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 12 Basic Concepts of Organic Reactions 5

It is important to note that the inductive effect does not transfer electrons from one atom to another but the displacement effect is permanent. The inductive effect represents the ability of a particular atom or a group to either withdraw or donate electron density to the attached carbon. Based on this ability the substituents are classified as +I groups and -I groups. Their ability to release or withdraw the electron through sigma covalent bond is called +I effect and -I effect respectively.

Highly electronegative atoms and atoms of groups which are cany a positive charge are electron withdrawing or-I group.
Example :
-F , -Cl, -COOH, -NO2 NH2

Higher the electronegativity of the substituent, greater is the -I effect. The order of the -I effect of some groups are given below.
NH3 > NO2 > CN > SO3H > CHO > CO > COOH > COCl > CONH2 > F > Cl > Br > I > OH > OR > NH2 > C6H5 > H

Highly electropositive atoms and atoms are groups which carry a negative charge are electron donating or +1 groups.
Example:
Alkali metals, alkyl groups such as methyl, ethyl, negatively charged groups such as CH3O, C2H5O, COO etc.

Lesser the electronegativity of the elements, greater is the +1 effect. The relative order of +1 effect of some alkyl groups is given below.
-C(CH3)3 > -CH(CH3)2 > -CH2CH3 > -CH3

Question 20.
Explain electromeric effect with suitable example.
Answer:
Electromeric is a temporary effect which operates in unsaturated compounds (containing > C = C <, > C = 0, etc…) in the presence of an attacking reagent.
Let us consider two different compounds.
(i) compounds containing carbonyl group ( > C = O)
(ii) unsaturated compounds such as alkenes ( > C = C < )

When a nucleophile approaches the carbonyl compound, the n electrons between C and O is instantaneously shifted to the more electronegative oxygen. This makes the carbon electron deficient and thus facilitating the formation of a new bond between the incoming nucleophile and the carbonyl carbon atom.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 12 Basic Concepts of Organic Reactions 6

On the other hand when an electrophile such as H+ approaches an alkene molecule, the π electrons are instantaneously shifted to the electrophile and a new bond is formed between carbon and hydrogen. This makes the other carbon electron deficient and hence it acquires a positive charge.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 12 Basic Concepts of Organic Reactions 7

The electrometric effect, is denoted as E effect. Like the inductive effect, the electrometric effect is also classified as + E and – E based on the direction in which the pair of electron is transferred to form a new bond with the attacking agent.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 12 Basic Concepts of Organic Reactions 8

When the π electron is transferred towards the attacking reagent, it is called + E (positive electrometric) effect.

The addition of H+ to alkene as shown above is an example of +E effect.
When the n electron is transferred away from the attacking reagent, it is called, -E (negative electrometric) effect.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 12 Basic Concepts of Organic Reactions 9
The attack of CN on a carbonyl carbon, as shown above, is an example of – E effect.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 12 Basic Concepts of Organic Reactions

Question 21.
Give examples for the following types of organic reactions
(i) β – elimination
(ii) Electrophilic substitution
Answer:
(i) β – elimination:
In this reaction two substituents are eliminated from the molecule, and a new C – C double bond is formed between the carbon atoms to which the eliminated atoms/groups are previously attached. Elimination reaction is always accompanied with change in hybridisation.
Example:
n – Propyl bromide on reaction with alcoholic KOH gives propene. In this reaction hydrogen and Br are eliminated.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 12 Basic Concepts of Organic Reactions 10

(ii) Electrophilic substitution:

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 12 Basic Concepts of Organic Reactions 11
Here, Y+ is an electrophile.
Example :
Nitration of Benzene

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 12 Basic Concepts of Organic Reactions 12

11th Chemistry Guide Basic Concepts of Organic Reactions Additional Questions and Answers

I. Choose the best answer:

Question 1.
In organic reactions the reactant is called as ______.
a) intermediate
b) product
c) substrate
d) by product
Answer:
c) substrate

Question 2.
Heterolysis of C – Cl bond produces
a) Two free radicals
b) Two carbonium ions
c) Two carbanions
d) One cation and one anion
Answer:
d) One cation and one anion

Question 3.
Heterolysis of propane gives
a) Methyl and ethyl free radicals
b) Methyl carbocation and ethyl free radicals
c) Methyl anion and ethyl carbocation
d) Methyl free radical and ethyl carbocation
Answer:
c) Methyl anion and ethyl carbocation

Question 4.
Removal of hydride ion from a methane molecule will give a
a) Methyl radical
b) Carbonium ion
c) Carbanion
d) Methyl group
Answer:
b) Carbonium ion

Question 5.
The shape of carbonium ion is
a) Planar
b) Linear
c) Pyramidal
d) Tetrahedral
Answer:
a) Planar

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 12 Basic Concepts of Organic Reactions

Question 6.
The shape of methyl free radicals is
a) Planar
b) Pyramidal
c) Tetrahedral
d) Linear
Answer:
a) Planar

Question 7.
The reaction, (CH3)3C – Br -» (CH3)3 C+ + Br is an example of
a) Homolytic fission
b) Heterolytic fission
c) Cracking
d) All the above
Answer:
b) Heterolytic fission

Question 8.
Which of the following contains only three pairs of electrons
a) Carbocation
b) Carbanion
c) Free radical
d) All of these
Answer:
a) Carbocation

Question 9.
Which of the following species is paramagnetic
a) A carbaonium ion
b) A free radical
c) A carbanion
d) All of these
Answer:
b) A free radical

Question 10.
In carbonium ion the carbon bearing the positive charge is
a) sp hybridized
b) sp2 hybridized
c) sp3 hybridized
d) un hybridized
Answer:
b) sp2 hybridized

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 12 Basic Concepts of Organic Reactions

Question 11.
Among the following the true property about
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 12 Basic Concepts of Organic Reactions 13 is
a) non – planar
b) C+ is sp2 – hybridized
c) Electrophile can attack on C+
d) Does not undergo hydrolysis
Answer:
b) C+ is sp2 – hybridized

Question 12.
The geometry of a methyl carbanion is likely to be
a) Pyramidal
b) Tetrahedral
c) Planar
d) Linear
Answer:
a) Pyramidal

Question 13.
Which of the following statements are correct for nucleophile?
a) All negatively charged species are nucleophiles
b) Nucleophiles are Lewis bases
c) Alkenes, alkynes, benzene and pyrrole are nucleophiles
d) All are correct
Answer:
d) All are correct

Question 14.
Which one of the following statement is not correct for electrophile?
a) Electron deficient species are electrophiles
b) Electrophiles are Lewis acids
c) All positively charged species are electrophiles
d) AlCl3 and SO3 are electrophiles
Answer:
c) All positively charged species are electrophiles

Question 15.
Electrophiles are
a) Lewis bases
b) Lewis acids
c) Amphoteric
d) All of these
Answer:
b) Lewis acids

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 12 Basic Concepts of Organic Reactions

Question 16.
Electrophiles are
a) Electron loving species
b) Electron hating species
c) Nucleus loving reagents
d) Nucleus hating reagents
Answer:
a) Electron loving species

Question 17.
Nucleophiles are
a) Electron loving
b) Electron hating
c) Nucleus loving
d) Nucleus hating
Answer:
c) Nucleus loving

Question 18.
Which of the following statement is false about an electrophile?
a) Electron – deficient species
b) An acidic reagent
c) A reagent which attacks an electron – deficient site in a molecule
d) A species which seeks a pair of electrons
Answer:
c) A reagent which attacks an electron – deficient site in a molecule

Question 19.
Methyl carbanium ion is
a) Electrophile
b) Lewis acid
c) Nucleophile
d) Both (a) and (b)
Answer:
c) Nucleophile

Question 20.
Ammonia molecule is
a) A nucleophile
b) An electron deficient
c) A electrophile
d) An acid
Answer:
a) A nucleophile

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 12 Basic Concepts of Organic Reactions

Question 21.
Methyl carbanion is
a) Electrophile
b) Lewis acid
c) Both (a) and (b)
d) Nucelophile
Answer:
d) Nucelophile

Question 22.
Which of the following statements is correct about inductive effect?
a) Implies the transfer of lone pair of electrons from more electronegative atom to lesser electronegative atom in a molecule.
b) Implies the transfer to lone pair of electrons from lesser electronegative atom to the more electronegative atom in a molecule
c) Increases with increase in distance
d) Implies the atoms ability to cause bond polarization
Answer:
d) Implies the atoms ability to cause bond polarization

Question 23.
The displacement of electrons in a multiple bond in the presence of attacking reagent is called
a) inductive effect
b) electromeric effect
c) resonance
d) Hyper-conjugation
Answer:
b) electromeric effect

Question 24.
The electromeric effect in organic compounds is a
a) Temporary effect
b) Permanent effect
c) Temporary or permanent effect
d) All of the above
Answer:
a) Temporary effect

Question 25.
Which of the following is not the correct condition for resonance?
a) The positions of all the atomic nuclei in the resonating structures may be differ
b) The resonating structures must have the same number of unpaired or paired electrons
c) The molecules exhibiting resonance must be planar in nature
d) The resonating structures must have nearly the same energies
Answer:
a) The positions of all the atomic nuclei in the resonating structures may be differ

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 12 Basic Concepts of Organic Reactions

Question 26.
Resonance is due to ______.
a) delocalization of sigma electrons
b) migration of H atoms
c) migration of proton
d) delocalization of pi electrons
Answer:
d) delocalization of pi electrons

Question 27.
Resonance in benzene is accompanied by delocalization of n – electrons. Each n electron is attached with
a) 4 carbons
b) 2 carbons
c) 3 carbons
d) 6 carbons
Answer:
d) 6 carbons

Question 28.
Reaction mechanism describes
a) Sequential account of each step describing the details of electron movement
b) energy changes during bond breaking and bond formation
c) kinetics of the reaction
d) all of these
Answer:
d) all of these

Question 29.
Substitution reaction may be
a) Free radical substitution
b) Nucleophilic substitution
c) Electrophilic substitution
d) All are correct
Answer:
d) All are correct

Question 30.
CH3 – CH2 – X + KOH(alc) → CH2 = CH2 + KX + H2O is
a) addition reaction
b) substitution reaction
c) elimination reaction
d) molecular rearrangement
Answer:
c) elimination reaction

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 12 Basic Concepts of Organic Reactions

Question 31.
CH4 + Cl2 Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 12 Basic Concepts of Organic Reactions 14 CH3Cl + HCl is an example
for
a) free radical substitution reaction
b) electrophilic substitution reaction
c) nucleophile substitution reaction
d) nueclophilic addition reaction
Answer:
a) free radical substitution reaction

Question 32.
C6H6 + 3 Cl2 Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 12 Basic Concepts of Organic Reactions 14 C6H6Cl
a) free radical substitution reaction
b) electrophilic addition reaction
c) free radical addition reaction
d) nueclophilic addition reaction
Answer:
c) free radical addition reaction

Question 33.
Which one of the following orders is correct regarding the – I effect of the substituents?
a) – NR2 < – OR > – F
b) -NR2 > – OR > – F
c) -NR2 < – OR< – F
d) -NR2 > – OR < – F
Answer:
c) -NR2 < – OR< – F

Question 34.
Decreasing – I power of given groups is
(1) -CN
(2) -NO2
(3) – NH3+
(4) -F
a) 2 > 1 > 4 > 3
b) 2 > 3 > 4 > 1
c) 3 > 2 > 4 > 1
d) 3 > 2 > 1 > 4
Answer:
d) 3 > 2 > 1 > 4

Question 35.
Which of the following belongs to – I group?
a) – C6H5
b) – CH3
c) – CH2CH3
d) – C (CH3)3
Answer:
a) – C6H5

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 12 Basic Concepts of Organic Reactions

Question 36.
Which of the following functional group shows + R effect?
a) – CHO
b) – NO2
c) -CN
d) – NR2
Answer:
d) – NR2

Question 37.
Hyper conjugation is
a) σ – π conjugation
b) Due to delocalization of σ and π bonds
c) No bond resonance
d) All of these
Answer:
d) All of these

Question 38.
+ R power of the given groups
(1) -O
(2) – NH2
(3) – OH
(4) – NHCOCH3 in decreasing order is
a) 1 > 2 > 3 > 4
b) 4 > 3 > 2 > 1
c) 1 > 3 > 2 > 4
d) 1 > 4 > 3 > 2
Answer:
a) 1 > 2 > 3 > 4

Question 39.
In pyridine:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 12 Basic Concepts of Organic Reactions 15
Number of conjugated electrons are:
a) 6
b) 8
c) Zero
d) 5
Answer:
a) 6

Question 40.
In hyper conjugation, the atom involved is
a) β – H atom
b) α – H atom
c) γ – H atom
d) All
Answer:
b) α – H atom

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 12 Basic Concepts of Organic Reactions

Question 41.
Hyper conjugation involves overlap of the following orbtials
a) σ – σ
b) σ – p
c) p – p
d) π – π
Answer:
b) σ – p

Question 42.
+ I effect is shown by
a) – NO2
b) – Cl
c) – Br
d) – CH3
Answer:
d) – CH3

Question 43.
Zero inductive effect is exerted by
a) C6H5
b) – H
c) CH3
d) – Cl
Answer:
b) – H

Question 44.
Hyper conjugation is most useful for stabilizing which of the following carbocations?
a) neo – Pentyl
b) tert – Butyl
c) iso – Propyl
d) Ethyl
Answer:
b) tert – Butyl

Question 45.
Hyper conjugation phenomenon is possible in
a) H2C = CH2
b) CH3CH2 – CH = CH2
c) C6H5CH = CH2
d) (CH3)3C – CH = CH2
Answer:
b) CH3CH2 – CH = CH2

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 12 Basic Concepts of Organic Reactions

Question 46.
Among the following carbocations which is more stable
a) (C6H5)3C+
b) Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 12 Basic Concepts of Organic Reactions 16
c) Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 12 Basic Concepts of Organic Reactions 17
d) Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 12 Basic Concepts of Organic Reactions 18
Answer:
a) (C6H5)3C+

Question 47.
The compound which gives the most stable carbonium ion on dehydration
a) Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 12 Basic Concepts of Organic Reactions 19
b) Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 12 Basic Concepts of Organic Reactions 20
c) CH3 – CH2 – CH2 – CH2OH
d) Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 12 Basic Concepts of Organic Reactions 21
Answer:
b) Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 12 Basic Concepts of Organic Reactions 20

Question 48.
Which carbocation is more stable?
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 12 Basic Concepts of Organic Reactions 22
Answer:
a) Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 12 Basic Concepts of Organic Reactions 23

Question 49.
Arrange the following groups in order of decreasing – R (Or – M) power
(1) NO2
(2) SO3H
(3) CF3
(4) CHO
a) 1 > 3 > 2 > 4
b) 1 > 2 > 3 > 4
c) 1 > 4 > 3 > 2
d)4 > 3 > 2 > 1
Answer:
a) 1 > 3 > 2 > 4

Question 50.
The reaction intermediate produced by homolytic cleavage of bond is called
a) carbocations
b) carbanions
c) free radicals
d) carbenes
Answer:
c) free radicals

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 12 Basic Concepts of Organic Reactions

Question 51.
Most stable carbocation is
a) CH3+CH2
b) +CH2CHCl2
c) +CH2CH2Cl
d) +CH2 – CH2NO2
Answer:
a) CH3+CH2

Question 52.
Carbocation is a reaction intermediate in which of the following reactions
a) E1 reactions
b) Electrophilic addition reactions of alkenes and alkynes
c) SN1 reactions
d) All of the above
Answer:
d) All of the above

Question 53.
Halogenation of an alkane takes place through the intermediate
a) Carbocation
b) carbanion
c) carbon free radical
d) carbene
Answer:
c) carbon free radical

Question 54.
Which free radical is the most stable?
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 12 Basic Concepts of Organic Reactions 24
Answer:
a) Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 12 Basic Concepts of Organic Reactions 25

Question 55.
The most stable carbonium ion is
a) Methyl carbonium ion
b) Primary carbonium ion
c) Secondary carbonium ion
d) Tertiary carbonium ion
Answer:
d) Tertiary carbonium ion

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 12 Basic Concepts of Organic Reactions

Question 56.
Stability of which intermediate is not govern by hyperconjugation?
a) Carbon cation
b) carbon anion
c) carbon free radical
d) carboniumion
Answer:
b) carbon anion

Question 57.
Which of the following is an electrophilic reagent?
a) H2O
b) OH
c) NO2+
d) All of these
Answer:
c) NO2+

Question 58.
CH2 = CH2 + Br2 → CH2Br – CH2Br is an example for
a) addition reaction
b) substitution reaction
c) elimination reaction
d) molecular rearrangement
Answer:
a) addition reaction

Question 59.
R – X + OH(aq) → R – OH + X+(aq) is an example for
a) addition reaction
b) substitution reaction
c) elimination reaction
d) molecular rearrangement
Answer:
b) substitution reaction

Question 60.
C6H6 + Cl2 Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 12 Basic Concepts of Organic Reactions 26 C6H5Cl + HC1 is an example for
a) Free radical substitution reaction
b) Electrophilic substitution reaction
c) Nucleophilic addition reaction
d) Nucelophilic substitution reaction
Answer:
b) Electrophilic substitution reaction

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 12 Basic Concepts of Organic Reactions

Question 61.
Alkenes readily undergo
a) Substitution reactions
b) Addition reactions
c) Elimination reactions
d) Rearrangement reactions
Answer:
b) Addition reactions

Question 62.
Nitration of benzene is
a) nucleophilic substitution
b) nucleophilic addition
c) electrophilic substitution
d) free radical substitution
Answer:
c) electrophilic substitution

Question 63.
The reaction (CH3)3C – Br Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 12 Basic Concepts of Organic Reactions 27 (CH3)3 C – OH is
a) elimination reaction
b) substitution reaction
c) free radical reaction
d) displacement reaction
Answer:
b) substitution reaction

Question 64.
Inductive effect involves
a) displacement of σ – electrons
b) delocalization of π – electrons
c) delocalization of σ – electrons
d) displacement of π – electrons
Answer:
b) delocalization of π – electrons

Question 65.
Compound which shows positive mesomeric effect
a) H2C = CH – Cl
b) C6H5 – NO2
c) H2C = CH – CH2Cl
d) both b & c
Answer:
a) H2C = CH – Cl

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 12 Basic Concepts of Organic Reactions

Question 66.
The stability order, in the following carbocations,
CH3CH2+ (I), (CH3)2 +CH (II), (CH3)3 C+ (III), +CH3 (IV)
a) I > IV > III > II
b) I > II > III > IV
c) III > IV > I > II
d) III > II > I > IV
Answer:
d) III > II > I > IV

Question 67.
Which is most stable carbocation?
a) n – propyl cation
b) iso – propyl cation
c) Ethyl cation
d) Triphenylmethyl cation
Answer:
d) Triphenylmethyl cation

Question 68.
Which one of the following carbanions is least stable?
a) CH3CH2
b) HC ≡ C
c) (C6H5)3C
d) (CH3)3C
Answer:
d) (CH3)3C

Question 69.
Among the following, the strongest nucleophile is
a) C2H5SH
b) CH3COO
c) CH3NH2
d) NCCH2
Answer:
a) C2H5SH

Question 70.
Which of the following is least reactive in a nucleophile substitution reaction?
a) (CH3)3C – Cl
b) CH2 = CHCl
c) CH3CH2Cl
d) CH2 = CHCH2Cl
Answer:
b) CH2 = CHCl

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 12 Basic Concepts of Organic Reactions

II. Very short question and answers (2 Marks):

Question 1.
What is mechanism of reaction?
Answer:
Many chemical reactions are depicted in one or more simple steps. Each step passes through an energy barrier, leading to the formation of short lived intermediates or transition states. The series of simple steps which collectively represent the chemical change, from substrate to product is called as the mechanism of the reaction. The slowest step in the mechanism determines the overall rate of the reaction.

Question 2.
What is Positive Mesomeric effect? Give example.
Answer:
Positive resonance effect occurs, when the electrons move away from substituent attached to the conjugated system. It occurs, if the electron releasing substituents are attached to the conjugated system. In such cases, the attached group has a tendency to release electrons through resonance. These electron releasing groups . are usually denoted as +R or +M groups.
Example:
– OH , – SH , – OR , – SR, – NH2, – O – etc…

Question 3.
What is Negative Mesomeric effect? Give example.
Answer:
Negative resonance effect occurs, when the electrons move towards the substituent attached to the conjugated system. It occurs if the electron withdrawing substituents are attached to the conjugated system. In such cases, the attached group has a tendency to withdraw electrons through resonance. These electron withdrawing groups are usually denoted as -R or -M groups.
Example:
NO2, > C = O, – COOH, – C ≡ N etc..

Question 4.
Explain hyper conjugate effect of vinyl chloride molecule.
Answer:
Hyper conjugation effect is also observed when atoms/groups having lone pair of electrons are attached by a single bond, and in conjugation with a π bond. The lone pair of electrons enters into resonance and displaces π electrons resulting in more than one structure.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 12 Basic Concepts of Organic Reactions 28

Question 5.
What are the types of substitution reaction?
Answer:
In this reaction an atom or a group of atoms attached to a carbon atom is replaced by a new atom or a group of atoms. Based on the nature of the attacking reagent, these reactions can be classified as

  • Nucleophilic substitution
  • Electrophilic substitution
  • Free radical substitution

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 12 Basic Concepts of Organic Reactions

Question 6.
Explain free radical substitution reaction with the suitable example.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 12 Basic Concepts of Organic Reactions 29
Aliphatic electrophilic substitution
A general aliphatic electrophilic substitution is represented as
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 12 Basic Concepts of Organic Reactions 30

Question 7.
Explain Nucleophilic Addition reaction with suitable example.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 12 Basic Concepts of Organic Reactions 31
Example:
Addition of HCN to acetaldehyde
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 12 Basic Concepts of Organic Reactions 32

Question 8.
Explain free radical addition reaction with suitable example.
Answer:
A general free radical addition reaction can be represented as below.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 12 Basic Concepts of Organic Reactions 33
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 12 Basic Concepts of Organic Reactions 34
In the above reaction, Benzoyl perioxide acts as an radial initiator. The mechanism involves free radicals.

Question 9.
Write a note on Functional Group inter conversion.
Answer:
Organic synthesis involves functional group inter conversions. A particular functional group can be converted into other functional group by reacting it with suitable reagents. For example: The carboxylic acid group (-COOH) presents in organic acids can be transformed to a variety of other functional group such as – CH2-OH, – CONH2, – COCl by treating the acid with LiAlH4, NH3, and SOCl2 respectively.

Question 10.
After cutting an apple it turn brown. Why?
Answer:
Apples contain an enzyme called polyphenol oxidase (PPO), also known as tyrosinase. Cutting an apple exposes its cells to the atmospheric oxygen and oxidizes the phenolic compounds present in apples. This is called the enzymatic browning that turns a cut apple brown. In addition to apples, enzymatic browning is also evident in bananas, pears, avocados and even potatoes.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 12 Basic Concepts of Organic Reactions

III. Short answer questions (3 Marks):

Question 1.
Explain hybridization of carbon in carbocation.
Answer:
In a carbocation, the carbon bearing positive charge is sp2 hybridised and hence it has a planar structure. In the reaction involving such a carbocation, the attack of a negatively charged species (nucleophiles) take place on either side of the carbocation as shown below.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 12 Basic Concepts of Organic Reactions 35
Shape of carbocation

The carbanions are generally pyramidal in shape and the lone pair occupies one of the sp3 hybridized orbitais. An alkyl free radical may be either pyramidal or planar.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 12 Basic Concepts of Organic Reactions 36
Shape of carbanion

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 12 Basic Concepts of Organic Reactions 37
Shape of Carbon radical

Question 2.
Write three types of electron movement in organic reaction.
Answer:

  • lone pair becomes a bonding pair.
  • bonding pair becomes a lone pair.
  • a bond breaks and becomes another bond.

Type: 1
A lone pair to a bonding pair
Example:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 12 Basic Concepts of Organic Reactions 38

Type: 2
A bonding pair to a lone pair
Example:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 12 Basic Concepts of Organic Reactions 39

Type: 3
A bonding pair to an another bonding pair
Example:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 12 Basic Concepts of Organic Reactions 40

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 12 Basic Concepts of Organic Reactions

Question 3.
Explain hyper conjugate effect of acrylonitrile.
Answer:
When electronegative atoms or group of atoms are in conjugation with a π – bond,they pull π – electrons from the multiple bond. In case of carbocations, greater the number of alky groups attached to the carbon bearing positive charge, greater is number of the hyper conjucate structure. thus the stability of various carbocations decreases in the order :
3° Carbocation > 2° Carbocation > 1° Carbocation.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 12 Basic Concepts of Organic Reactions 41

Question 4.
What are the different types of organic reactions?
Answer:
Organic compounds undergo many number of reactions, however in actual sense we can fit all those reactions into the below mentiohed six categories.

  1. Substitution reactions
  2. Addition reactions
  3. Elimination reactions
  4. Oxidation and reduction reactions
  5. Rearrangement reactions
  6. Combination of the above

Question 5.
Explain nucleophilc substituion reaction with suitable example.
Answer:
This reaction can be represented as
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 12 Basic Concepts of Organic Reactions 42
Here Y is the incoming nuclophile or and attacking species and x is the leaving group.

Example:
Hydrolysis of alkyl halides by aqueous KOH.
CH3Br  Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 12 Basic Concepts of Organic Reactions 43 CH3OH + Br
Aliphatic nucleophilic substitution reactions take place either by SN1 or SN2 mechanism.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 12 Basic Concepts of Organic Reactions

Question 6.
Explain Electrophilic Addition Reaction with suitable example.
Answer:
A general electrophilic addition reaction can be represented as below.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 12 Basic Concepts of Organic Reactions 44
Example:
Bromination of alkene to give bromo alkane
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 12 Basic Concepts of Organic Reactions 45

Question 7.
What are oxidation and reduction reactions? Give suitable example.
Answer:
Many oxidation and reduction reactions of organic compounds fall into one of the four types of reaction that we already discussed but others do not. Most of the oxidation reaction of organic compounds involves gain of oxygen or loss of hydrogen Reduction involves gain of hydrogen and loss of oxygen.
Example:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 12 Basic Concepts of Organic Reactions 46

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 12 Basic Concepts of Organic Reactions 47

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 12 Basic Concepts of Organic Reactions

IV. Long answer questions (5 Marks):

Question 1.
Explain different types of Fission of a covalent bond.
Answer:
All organic molecules contain covalent bonds which are formed by the mutual sharing of electrons between atoms. These covalent bonds break in two different ways, namely homolytic cleavage (symmetrical splitting) and heterolytic cleavage (unsymmetrical splitting). The cleavage of a bond in the substrate is influenced by the nature of the reagent (attacking agent).

Homolytic Cleavage:
Homolytic cleavage is the process in which a covalent bond breaks symmetrically in such way that each of the bonded atoms retains one electron. It is denoted by a half headed arrow (fish hook arrow). This type of cleavage occurs under high temperature or in the presence of UV light in a compound containing non polar covalent bond formed between atoms of similar electronegativity.

In such molecules, the cleavage of bonds results into free radicals. They are short lived and are highly reactive. The type of reagents that promote holmolytic cleavage in substrate are called as free radical initiators. For example Azobisisobutyronitile (AIBN) and peroxides such as benzoyl peroxide are used as free radical initiators in polymerisation reactions.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 12 Basic Concepts of Organic Reactions 48

As a free radical with an unpaired electron is neutral and unstable, it has a tendency to gain an electron to attain stability. Organic reactions involve homolytic fission of C – C bonds to form alkyl free radicals. The stability of alkyl free radicals is in the following order:
C(CH3)3 > CH(CH3)2 > CH2CH3 > CH3

Heterolytic Cleavage:
Heterolytic cleavage is the process in which a covalent bond breaks unsymmetrically such that one of the bonded atoms retains the bond pair of electrons. It results in the formation of a cation and an anion. Of the two bonded atoms, the most electronegative atom becomes the anion and the other atom becomes the cation. The cleavage is denoted by a curved arrow pointing towards the more electronegative atom.

For example, in tert-butyl bromide, the C – Br bond is polar as bromine is more electronegative than carbon. The bonding electrons of the C – Br bond are attracted more by bromine than carbon. Hence, the C – Br undergoes heterolytic cleavage to form a tert-butyl cation during hydrolysis.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 12 Basic Concepts of Organic Reactions 49

Let us consider the cleavage in a carbon-hydrogen (C-H) bond of aldehydes or ketones We know that the carbon is more electronegative than hydrogen and hence the heterolytic cleavage of C-H bonds results in the formation of carbanion (carbon bears a negative charge). For example in aldol condensation the OH- ion abstracts a a-hydrogen from the aldehyde, which leads to the formation of the below mentioned carbanion.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 12 Basic Concepts of Organic Reactions 50

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 12 Basic Concepts of Organic Reactions

Question 2.
Explain the acidic nature of carboxylic acid.
Answer:
When a halogen atom is attached to the carbon which is nearer to the carboxylic acid group, its -I effect withdraws the bonded electrons towards itself and makes the ionisation of H easy. The acidity of various chioro acetic acid is in the following order. The strength of the acid increases with increase in the -J effect of the group attached to the carboxyl group.

Trichioro acetic acid > Dichloro acetic acid > Chloro acetic acid > acetic acid.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 12 Basic Concepts of Organic Reactions 51

Similarly, the following order of acidity in the carboxylic acids is due to the +I effect of alkyl group.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 12 Basic Concepts of Organic Reactions 52